c-class - mercedes-benz usa · pdf fileour company and staff congratulate you on the purchase...

C-ClassOperator’s Manual

204_AKB; 5; 23, en-USd2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 1

SymbolsTrademarks:RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.RLogic 7® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries,Incorporated.RMicrosoft® is a registered trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. andother countries.RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks

of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.RWindows media® is a registered trademark

of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. andother countries.

The following symbols are found in thisOperator’s Manual:

G Warning!Warning notices draw your attention tohazards that may endanger your health or life,or the health or life of others.

! Highlights hazards that may result indamage to your vehicle.

i Helpful hints or further information youmay find useful.

X This symbol points to instructionsfor you to follow.

X A number of these symbolsappearing in succession indicatesa multiple-step procedure.

Y page This symbol tells you where to lookfor further information on a topic.

YY This continuation symbol marks awarning or procedure which iscontinued on the next page.

Display Text in displays, such as the controlsystem, are printed in the typeshown here.


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 2

Our company and staff congratulate you onthe purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.Your selection of our product is ademonstration of your trust in our companyname. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desireto own an automobile that will be as easy aspossible to operate and will provide years ofservice.Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts ofmany skilled engineers and craftsmen. Tohelp assure your driving pleasure, and alsothe safety of you and your passengers, we askyou to make a small investment of time:RPlease read this manual carefully, then

return it to your vehicle where it will behandy for your reference.RPlease follow the recommendations

contained in this manual. They aredesigned to acquaint you with theoperation of your Mercedes-Benz.RPlease pay attention to the warnings and

cautions contained in this manual. They aredesigned to help improve the safety of thevehicle operator and occupants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles ofsafe, pleasurable driving.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCA Daimler Company

2045845381 É2045845381zËÍ


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 1


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 2

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 20

At a glance ........................................... 25

Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 69

Operation ........................................... 221

Practical hints ................................... 267

Technical data ................................... 331

Contents 3


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 3

1, 2, 3 ...4-ETS

see ETS/4-ETS 4MATIC

see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) 911 Emergency calls ........................ 173

AABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 61

Indicator lamp ................................ 298Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ................................... 280, 281

Accessory weight .............................. 250Accidents ........................................... 105

Air bags ........................................... 37Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 212Emergency calls (Telephone) ......... 173NECK-PRO active front headrestraints ........................................ 52

Active Bi-Xenon headlampssee Headlamps

Adaptive Brake .................................... 62Additives

Engine oil ....................................... 353Gasoline ......................................... 355

Address change ................................... 21Advanced Tire PressureMonitoring System (AdvancedTPMS) ................................................. 234

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 277

Air bags ................................................ 37Emergency call upon deployment . . 212Front, driver and passenger ............. 40Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp (Canadaonly) ........................................ 46, 307Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 308Knee bag .......................................... 40Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 272OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 42Pelvis ............................................... 41Safety guidelines ............................. 39

Side impact ...................................... 41Window curtain ................................ 42

Air conditioning refrigerant andlubricant ............................................. 354Air distribution .................................. 194Air pressure

see Tire inflation pressure Air pressure (tires) ............................ 250Air recirculation mode ...................... 195Air volume .......................................... 194Alarm system

see Anti-theft systems All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 183Alternator


Alternator (Technical data)see Vehicle specification

AMG menu ......................................... 123Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 357Antilock Brake System

see ABS Anti-theft systems ............................... 66

Anti-theft alarm system ................... 67Immobilizer ...................................... 66

Aquaplaningsee Hydroplaning

Armrest, front Storage compartments .................. 206

Armrest, rear Storage compartment .................... 206

Ashtrays ............................................. 209Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 250Audio menu ........................................ 126Audio system ..................................... 136

Adjusting volume ........................... 144Audio and telephone operation ...... 136Audio AUX mode ............................ 166Bluetooth® settings ....................... 147CD mode ........................................ 158Components .................................. 137MP3 mode ..................................... 158Operating safety ............................ 137Radio operation ............................. 148Satellite radio ................................ 152Switching on and off ...................... 144

4 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 4

System settings ............................. 147Telephone ...................................... 167

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 87Automatic central locking .......... 74, 135Automatic headlamp mode ................ 91Automatic interior lighting control .... 95Automatic locking when driving ...... 135Automatic shift program .................. 111Automatic transmission ................... 108

Automatic shift program ................ 111Gear range indicator ...................... 111Gear ranges ................................... 111Gear selector lever ........................ 108Hill-start assist system .................. 183Kickdown ....................................... 110Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 115Manual shift program ..................... 113One-touch gearshifting .................. 112Program mode indicator ................ 112Program mode selector switch(automatic shift program) .............. 111Program mode selector switch(manual shift program) .......... 113, 114Shifting procedure ......................... 109Steering wheel gearshift control .... 112Transmission position indicator ..... 109Transmission positions .................. 109

AUX socket ........................................ 166Axle oils .............................................. 351

BBabySmart™

Air bag deactivation system ............. 46Self-test ........................................... 47

Back button ....................................... 141Backrest

see Seats Backup lamps

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 292Replacing bulbs ............................. 314

Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 250BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 61Batteries, SmartKey

Checking condition .......................... 73Replacing ....................................... 312

Battery, Vehicle ................................. 321Charging ........................................ 323Jump starting ................................. 323Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 290

Bead (tire) .......................................... 250Beverage holders

see Cup holders Bluetooth® settings .......................... 147Brake Assist System

see BAS Brake fluid

Checking level ............................... 228Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 282

Brake lamps Cleaning lenses ............................. 263Replacing bulbs ............................. 314

Brake pads Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 279

Brakes ................................................ 255High-performance brake system .... 256Parking brake ................................ 105Warning lamp ................................. 298

Break-in period .................................. 222Bulbs

see Replacing bulbs

CCAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23California retail buyers andlessees, important notice for ............. 21Calls (phone) .............................. 128, 167Can holders

see Cup holders Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants .................................. 349Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 203Carpets, cleaning .............................. 265CD player ............................................ 158Center console

Lower part ....................................... 32Upper part ....................................... 31

Central locking Automatic ................................ 74, 135KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71

Index 5


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 5

Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 75SmartKey ......................................... 70

Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 75Certification label .............................. 332Children in the vehicle

Air bags ........................................... 37BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem ............................................. 46Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 59Child seat anchors – LATCH-type(ISOFIX) ........................................... 58Indicator lamp, front passengerfront air bag off (Canada only) ......... 46Indicator lamp, front passengerfront air bag off (USA only) .............. 42Infant and child restraint systems .... 55ISOFIX (Child seat anchors –LATCH-type) ..................................... 58OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 42Override switch ................................ 59Safety notes ..................................... 54Tether anchorage points .................. 57Top tether ........................................ 57

Child safetysee Children in the vehicle

Child seat anchors – LATCH-type(ISOFIX)

see Children in the vehicle Chrome-plated exhaust tip,cleaning .............................................. 266Cigarette lighter ................................ 209Clear button ....................................... 142Climate control system

Air conditioning ............................. 191Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 354Air distribution ............................... 194Air recirculation mode ................... 195Air volume ..................................... 194Automatic mode ............................ 192Deactivating system ...................... 191Front defroster .............................. 194Maximum cooling MAX COOL ........ 195Temperature .................................. 192

Clock ............................................ 29, 132Cockpit ................................................. 27Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 250Collapsible wheel chock ................... 269

COMAND systemsee separate COMAND systemoperating instructions

Combination gauge ............................. 28Combination switch ............................ 93Compass ............................................ 210Control system .................................. 118

Multifunction display ..................... 120Multifunction steering wheel ......... 118Resetting to factory settings .......... 130

Control system menus ...................... 121AMG ............................................... 123Audio ............................................. 126Navi ............................................... 126Service ........................................... 129Settings ......................................... 130Telephone ...................................... 128Trip ................................................ 121

Control system submenus Convenience .................................. 135Instrument cluster ......................... 131Lighting .......................................... 133Time/Date ..................................... 132Vehicle ........................................... 135

Convenience submenu Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 136Fold-in function for exterior rearview mirrors ................................... 136

Coolant Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 357Capacities ...................................... 351Checking level ............................... 227Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 288Temperature gauge ........................ 117Warning lamp ................................. 305

Coolant temperature gauge ............... 28Corner-illuminating front foglamps .................................................... 94Cruise control .................................... 180

Activating ....................................... 181Canceling ....................................... 181Changing the set speed ................. 182Last stored speed .......................... 183Lever .............................................. 181Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 275

6 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 6

Resume function ............................ 183Setting current speed .................... 181

Cup holders ........................................ 207Curb weight ....................................... 250Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23Customer Relations Department ....... 23

DDashboard

see Instrument cluster Data recording ..................................... 23Date, Setting ...................................... 133Daytime running lamp mode .............. 91

Switching on or off ......................... 133Deep water

see Standing water Defogging (windshield) ..................... 195Defroster

Front (Climate control system) ...... 194Rear window .................................. 196

Delayed shut-off Exterior lamps ................................ 134Interior lighting .............................. 135

Department of Transportationsee DOT

Difficulties While driving .................................. 104With starting .................................. 102

Dimensions (vehicle)see Vehicle specification

Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 242Displays

Maintenance service indicator ....... 259Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 270Multifunction display ..................... 120Symbol messages .......................... 279Text messages ............................... 272Trip computer ................................ 121Vehicle status message memory . . . 129Vehicle system settings ................. 130

Door control panel .............................. 33Door handles ........................................ 33Doors

Child safety locks ............................ 59Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 71Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 286Opening from inside ......................... 74Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 216Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 215Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 309

DOT (Department ofTransportation) .................................. 250Drinking and driving ......................... 254Driving

Abroad ........................................... 257Hydroplaning ................................. 257Instructions ........................... 101, 254In winter ........................................ 253Problems ....................................... 104Safety systems ................................ 60Systems ......................................... 180Through standing water ................. 257

Driving and parking Safety notes .................................. 101

Driving off .................................. 103, 257Driving safety systems ....................... 60

ABS .................................................. 61Adaptive Brake ................................ 62BAS .................................................. 61EBP .................................................. 62ESP® ................................................ 62ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 63

Driving systems All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 183Cruise control ................................ 180Dynamic handling package withsport driving mode ......................... 184Hill-start assist system .................. 183Parktronic system .......................... 185Rear view camera .......................... 188

Driving tips, automatictransmission ...................................... 110Dynamic handling package withsport driving mode ............................ 184

EE85 (ethanol fuel) .............................. 355Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 85, 136EBP (Electronic BrakeProportioning) ...................................... 62

Index 7


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 7

Electrical system Improper work on ormodifications ................................... 22Power outlets ................................. 210

Electrical system (Technical data)see Vehicle specification

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP®

Electronic Traction Systemsee ETS/4-ETS

Emergency, in case of First aid kit ..................................... 268Flat tire .......................................... 317Hazard warning flasher .................... 93Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 214Towing the vehicle ......................... 325

Emergency calls Tele Aid .......................................... 212Telephone ...................................... 173

Emergency operations Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 216Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 215Trunk lid, emergency release ........... 76

Emergency Tensioning Devicesee ETD

Emission control ............................... 258Information label ............................ 333System warranties ........................... 20

Engine Break-in recommendations ............ 222Cleaning ......................................... 262Compartment ................................ 224Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 305Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 288Number .......................................... 333Starting .......................................... 101Turning off ..................................... 106

Engine (Technical data)see Vehicle specification

Engine coolantsee Coolant

Engine oil Adding ........................................... 226Additives ........................................ 353Checking level ............................... 226Consumption ................................. 225

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 291Oil dipstick ..................................... 226Recommended engine oils and oilfilter ............................................... 353

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .............................................. 62

ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 63Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................... 280, 281, 283Warning lamp ................................. 302

ETD (Emergency TensioningDevice) ................................................. 52

Safety guidelines ............................. 39Ethanol fuel (E85) .............................. 355ETS/4-ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ................................................ 63Express operation

Panorama roof ............................... 200Power windows ................................ 98Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 196

Exterior lamp switch ........................... 90Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 86

Fold-in function ................................ 88Parking position ............................... 87Power-folding ................................... 88Switching fold-in function on oroff .................................................. 136

Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26

FFastening the seat belts ..................... 50First aid kit ......................................... 268Flat tire ............................................... 317

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 321Mounting the spare wheel ............. 318Preparing the vehicle ..................... 318Spare wheel ........................... 317, 349

Flexible Fuel Vehicles ....................... 355Floormats ........................................... 220Fluids

Automatic transmission fluid ......... 350Brake fluid ..................................... 351Capacities ...................................... 349Engine coolant ............................... 351Engine oil ....................................... 350Manual transmission oil ................. 350

8 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 8

Power steering fluid ....................... 351Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem ........................................... 352

Fog lamps ............................................. 92Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ................................... 292, 294

Fold-in function for exterior rearview mirrors ........................................ 88Four-wheel drive

see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Front air bags

see Air bags Front axle oil ...................................... 351Front lamps

see Headlamps Front passenger front air bag ............ 40


Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 46, 307Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 308Front seat head restraints

see Head restraints Fuel ..................................................... 222

Additives ........................................ 355Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 352Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 254Ethanol fuel (E85) .......................... 355Fuel consumption (Flexible FuelVehicle) .......................................... 355Fuel consumption statistics ........... 122Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 223Fuel tank reserve warning lamp ..... 304Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 354Refueling ........................................ 222Requirements ................................ 354Switching (Flexible Fuel Vehicle) .... 355

Fuel filler flap ..................................... 223Opening manually .......................... 310

Fuel gauge ................................... 28, 118Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ........ 349Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 352Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 223Refueling ........................................ 222

Fuses .................................................. 328

GGarage door opener .................... 32, 216Gasoline

see Fuel GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 251Gear range ......................................... 111

Indicator ........................................ 111Limiting .......................................... 112Shifting into optimal ...................... 113

Gear selector lever ............................ 108Cleaning ......................................... 265Gearshift pattern ........................... 108Lock ...................................... 102, 108Shifting procedure ......................... 109Transmission position indicator ..... 109Transmission positions .................. 109

Gearshift lever ................................... 107Gearshift pattern ........................... 107

Generatorsee Alternator

Global locking/unlockingsee Key, SmartKey

Glove box ........................................... 205Gross Axle Weight Rating

see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight

see GVW Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

see GVWR GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 251GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) ................................................ 251

HHalogen headlamps

see Headlamps Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 265Hazard warning flasher ....................... 93Headlamp cleaning system ................ 93Headlamps

Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 90Automatic headlamp mode .............. 91Bi-Xenon .................................. 90, 314Cleaning lenses ............................. 263Cleaning system .............................. 93Daytime running lamp mode ............ 91

Index 9


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 9

Delayed shut-off ............................ 134Halogen ......................................... 314High-beam flasher ............................ 93High-beam headlamps ..................... 93Low-beam headlamps ...................... 91Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 292Replacing bulbs ............................. 313Switch .............................................. 90

Headliner and shelf below rearwindow, cleaning and care of .......... 265Head restraints .................................... 79

Adjustment ................................ 79, 82Folding back .................................... 83NECK-PRO active front headrestraints ......................................... 52Rear seat head restraints ................. 83

Height adjustment Seat belt outlet ................................ 51Seats ............................................... 79

High-beam flasher ............................... 93High-beam headlamps ................ 93, 314High-performance brake system ..... 256Hill-start assist system ..................... 183Hood ................................................... 224


Horn ...................................................... 27Hydroplaning ..................................... 257

IIdentification labels .......................... 332Identification number, vehicle(VIN) ................................................... 333Ignition ......................................... 78, 102Immobilizer .......................................... 66Infant and child restraint systems

see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure

see Tires, Inflation pressure Inside door handle .............................. 74Instrument cluster ...................... 28, 116

Illumination .................................... 117Lamps ............................................ 297Multifunction display ..................... 120

Instrument lightingsee Instrument cluster, Illumination

Instrument panelsee Instrument cluster

Instruments and controlssee Cockpit

Interior lighting Delayed shut-off ............................ 135Emergency lighting .......................... 95Front ................................................ 95Front reading lamps ......................... 95Rear ................................................. 95Rear reading lamps .......................... 95

Interior rear view mirror ..................... 86Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 87

Interior storage spacessee Storage compartments

Intermittent wiping ............................. 96Rain sensor ...................................... 96

ISOFIX (Child seat anchors –LATCH-type)

see Children in the vehicle

JJack ..................................................... 269Jump starting ..................................... 323

KKey, Mechanical

Loss of ............................................. 73Replacing ......................................... 74Unlocking/locking manually .......... 309Valet locking .................................... 77

Key, SmartKey Battery check lamp .......................... 73Checking batteries ........................... 73Factory setting ........................... 71, 73Global locking (KEYLESS-GO) .................................................. 73Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 71Global unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) .................................................. 73Global unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 71Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 72Locking/unlocking ........................... 70Loss of ............................................. 73

10 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 10

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 286Opening, trunk ................................. 75Opening and closing the powertilt/sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof ................................. 99Opening and closing the windows .... 99Remote control ................................ 70Replacing ......................................... 74Replacing batteries ........................ 312Restoring to factory setting ....... 71, 73Selective setting ........................ 71, 73Starter switch positions ................... 77

KEYLESS-GO Starter switch positions ................... 78

Kickdown ........................................... 110Kickdown (manual shift program) ... 115Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 251Knee bag .............................................. 40

LLabels

Certification ................................... 332Emission control information ......... 333Tire and Loading Informationplacard ........................................... 238Tire inflation pressure .................... 231

Lamps, exterior Exterior lamp switch ........................ 90Front .............................................. 314Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 292Rear ............................................... 314Switching on/off .............................. 90

Lamps, indicator and warning ABS .......................................... 29, 298Brakes ..................................... 28, 298Center console ................................ 31Coolant .................................... 28, 305Engine malfunction .................. 28, 305ESP® ........................................ 28, 302ESP® OFF ................................ 28, 303Fog lamps ........................................ 92Front fog lamps ................................ 28Front passenger front air bag off(Canada only) .......................... 46, 307

Front passenger front air bag off(USA only) ................................ 42, 308Fuel tank reserve ..................... 28, 304High-beam headlamps ............... 28, 93Instrument cluster ................... 28, 297Low-beam headlamps ................ 28, 91Low tire pressure/TPMSmalfunction telltale .................. 28, 306Rear fog lamp .................................. 28Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 51, 301SRS .................................... 28, 36, 302Turn signals ..................................... 28

LATCH-type child seat anchors (ISOFIX)see Children in the vehicle

License plate lamps Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 294

Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 265Lighter

see Cigarette lighter Lighting ................................................ 90

Daytime running lamp mode ............ 91Exterior ............................................ 90Interior ............................................. 95

Limp-home mode .............................. 116Load index (tires) ...................... 246, 251Loading

see Vehicle loading Locator lighting ................................. 134Locking the vehicle

KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71Manually ........................................ 310SmartKey ......................................... 70

Loss of Key .................................................. 73Service and Warranty Informationbooklet .......................................... 332

Low-beam headlamps ......................... 91Exterior lamp switch ........................ 90Replacing bulbs ............................. 314Switching on .................................... 91

Lubricants .......................................... 349Lumbar support ................................... 82

Index 11


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 11

MMaintenance ........................................ 21Maintenance System

Service indicator display ................ 259Service indicator message ............. 259Service term exceeded .................. 259

Manual headlamp mode (Low-beam headlamps) ................................ 91Manual shift program ....................... 113Manual transmission ........................ 107

Gearshift lever ............................... 107Hill-start assist system .................. 183

Maximum engine speedsee Vehicle specification

Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 251Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 251Maximum permissible tireinflation pressure .............................. 251Mechanical key

see Key, Mechanical Media interface ................................. 205Memory function ................................. 89Menus

see Control system menus Minispare wheel

see Spare wheel Mirrors .................................................. 86

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 87Exterior rear view mirror parkingposition ............................................ 87Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 86Interior rear view mirror ................... 86Memory function .............................. 89Power-folding exterior rear viewmirrors ............................................. 88Vanity mirror .................................. 208

MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 354Motor Octane Number

see MON MP3 mode .......................................... 158Multifunction display ........................ 120

Symbol messages .......................... 279Text messages ............................... 272Vehicle status messages ............... 270

Multifunction display messages ABS ....................................... 280, 281Active headlamps .......................... 292

Advanced TPMS ............................. 277Air bags ......................................... 272Alternator ...................................... 290Backrests ....................................... 286Battery ........................................... 290Brake fluid ..................................... 282Brake pads ..................................... 279Child seat ...................................... 275Coolant .......................................... 288Corner-illuminating front foglamps ............................................. 295Cruise control ................................ 275Doors ............................................. 286EBP ................................................ 281Engine oil ....................................... 291ESP® ............................. 280, 281, 283Fog lamps .............................. 292, 294Front passenger front air bag ........ 272Gas cap .......................................... 291High-beam lamps ........................... 293Hood .............................................. 286License plate lamps ....................... 294Light sensor ................................... 294Low-beam lamps ............................ 294Parking brake ................................ 281Parking lamps ................................ 293Power steering ............................... 288Reserve fuel ................................... 291Reverse lamp ................................. 292Side marker lamps ......................... 293SmartKey ....................................... 286SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 286SRS ................................................ 284Tail lamps ...................................... 295Tele Aid .......................................... 284Tire inflation pressure ............ 276, 296Tire pressure monitor .................... 277Tires ...................................... 276, 296Trunk ............................................. 286Turn signals ................................... 296

Multifunction steering wheel Adjustment ...................................... 84Buttons .......................................... 118Cleaning ......................................... 265Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 85, 136Gearshift control ............................ 112Memory function .............................. 89Overview .......................................... 29

12 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 12

NNavigation system

see Separate operating instructions Navi menu .......................................... 126NECK-PRO active front headrestraints ............................................. 52

Resetting ....................................... 311Nets, parcel ....................................... 203Normal occupant weight .................. 251Number, vehicle identification(VIN) ................................................... 333

OOccupant Classification System

see OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem)

Occupant distribution ....................... 251Occupant safety

Air bags ........................................... 37BabySmart™ .................................... 46Children and air bags ....................... 37Children in the vehicle ..................... 54Child seat anchors – LATCH-type(ISOFIX) ........................................... 58Fastening the seat belts ................... 50Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp (Canadaonly) ........................................ 46, 307Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 308Infant and child restraint systems .... 55Introduction ..................................... 36ISOFIX (Child seat anchors –LATCH-type) ..................................... 58OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 42Seat belts .................................. 39, 48

OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ................................................ 42

Self-test ........................................... 46Odometer ........................................... 121Oil, oil level

see Engine oil On-board computer

see Control system One-touch gearshifting ..................... 112

Operating safety .................................. 22Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 263Overhead control panel ...................... 32

PPaintwork, cleaning .......................... 261Paintwork code ................................. 333Panic alarm .......................................... 60Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ...................................... 200

Cleaning ......................................... 264Operation ....................................... 200Roller sunblinds ............................. 199Synchronizing ................................ 201

Parcel nets ......................................... 203Parking ............................................... 105

Parktronic system .......................... 185Parking brake .................................... 105


Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 87Transmission position .................... 109

Parktronic system Cleaning system sensors ............... 263Malfunction .................................... 187Minimum distance ......................... 186Sensor range ................................. 185Switching on/off ........................... 187System sensors ............................. 185Warning indicators ......................... 186

Parts service ...................................... 332PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp(Canada only)

see Front passenger front air bagoff indicator lamp (Canada only)

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp(USA only)

see Front passenger front air bagoff indicator lamp (USA only)

Passenger safetysee Occupant safety

Pedals ................................................. 254Pelvis air bags ..................................... 41Phone

see Telephone Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 265

Index 13


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 13

Power assistance .............................. 255Power outlets .................................... 210Power seats

see Seats Power steering


Power tilt/sliding sunroof Operation ....................................... 196Synchronizing ................................ 199

Power washer .................................... 261Power windows ................................... 98

Cleaning ......................................... 264Operation ......................................... 98Rear door window, overrideswitch .............................................. 59Synchronizing .................................. 99

Practical hints ................................... 268Problems

While driving .................................. 104With vehicle ..................................... 23With wipers ...................................... 97

Product information ............................ 20Production options weight ............... 251Program mode selector switch

Automatic shift program ................ 111Manual shift program ............ 113, 114

Proximity keysee Key, SmartKey

PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 251

RRACETIMER ........................................ 124Radio .................................................. 148

Satellite radio ................................ 152Selecting stations .......................... 126

Radio transmitters ............................ 258Rain sensor

see Intermittent wiping Rear axle oil ....................................... 351Rear center console ashtray

see Ashtrays Rear doors

Child safety locks ............................ 59Rear door window

Override switch ................................ 59

Rear fog lampsee Fog lamps

Rear lampssee Tail lamps

Rear seat head restraintssee Head restraints

Rear view camera .............................. 188Cleaning the camera lens .............. 263

Rear window defroster ..................... 196Recommended tire inflationpressure ..................................... 230, 251Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 354Refueling ............................................ 222Regular checks .................................. 224Reminder, Seat belt

see Seat belts, Telltale Remote control

see Key, SmartKey Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ............. 216Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 215Replacing

Key .................................................. 74Replacing bulbs ................................. 313Reporting safety defects .................... 23Research Octane Number

see RON Reserve fuel

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 291Warning lamp ................................. 304

Restraint systemssee Occupant safety

Retaining hooks ................................. 203Rims ........................................... 251, 344Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 214Roller sunblinds ................................. 199RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 354Roof rack ............................................ 203Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 265

SSafety

Driving safety systems ..................... 60Occupant safety ............................... 36Reporting defects ............................ 23

Safety beltssee Seat belts

14 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 14

Satellite radio .................................... 152Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52Seat belts ............................................. 48

Children in the vehicle ..................... 54Cleaning ......................................... 265Fastening ......................................... 50Height adjustment ........................... 51Proper use of ................................... 49Safety guidelines ............................. 39Safety notes ..................................... 48Telltale ........................................... 301

Seat heating ......................................... 84Seating capacity ................................ 239Seats ..................................................... 79

Adjustment ...................................... 79Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 85Heating ............................................ 84Memory function .............................. 89Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 286Split rear seat bench ..................... 204

Securing cargo Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 203

Selective settingsee Key, SmartKey

Selector leversee Gear selector lever

Self-test BabySmart™ .................................... 47OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 46Tele Aid .......................................... 212

Servicesee Maintenance

Service, parts .................................... 332Service and warranty information ..... 20Service intervals

see Maintenance System, Serviceindicator message

Service life (tires) .............................. 243Service menu ..................................... 129Settings

Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 73Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 71Memory function .............................. 89Menu ............................................. 130

Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 71

Shelf below rear window, cleaning .. 265Side impact air bags ........................... 41Side marker lamps

Cleaning lenses ............................. 263Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 293Replacing bulbs ............................. 314

Sidewall (tires) .................................. 252SmartKey

see Key, SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

see Key, SmartKey Snow chains ...................................... 253Snow tires

see Winter tires Spare wheel ....................................... 344

Mounting ....................................... 318Storage location ............................ 270

Speedometer ....................................... 28Speed settings

Cruise control ................................ 181Resume function ............................ 183

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator lamp ......................... 36, 302Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 284

Standing water, driving through ...... 257Starter switch positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................... 78SmartKey ......................................... 77

Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 102Starting the engine ........................... 101Steering column

see Multifunction steering wheel,Adjustment

Steering wheelsee Multifunction steering wheel

Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 112Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 216Storage compartments ..................... 205Storing tires ....................................... 244Sunroof

see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Sunshade

Rear window .................................. 208

Index 15


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 15

Sun visors .......................................... 208

TTachometer .................................. 28, 117

Overspeed range ........................... 117Tail lamps ........................................... 314

Cleaning lenses ............................. 263Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 295Replacing bulbs ............................. 314

Tar stains ........................................... 261Technical data

Air conditioning refrigerant .... 352, 354Brake fluid ............................. 351, 354Capacities fuels, coolants,lubricants etc. ................................ 349Coolant .................................. 351, 356Engine oil additives ........................ 353Engine oils ............................. 350, 353Fuel requirements .......................... 354Gasoline additives .......................... 355Identification labels ....................... 332Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 354Rims and tires ................................ 344Spare wheel ................................... 349Vehicle specification C 250 ........... 334Vehicle specificationC 250 4MATIC ............................... 335Vehicle specificationC 250 4MATIC Sport ...................... 336Vehicle specification C 250 Sport .. 334Vehicle specification C 300 ........... 337Vehicle specificationC 300 4MATIC ............................... 339Vehicle specificationC 300 4MATIC Sport ...................... 340Vehicle specification C 300 Sport .. 338Vehicle specification C 350 ........... 341Vehicle specificationC 350 4MATIC ............................... 343Vehicle specification C 350 Sport .. 342Vehicle specification C 63 AMG ..... 343Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem ................................... 352, 358

Technical data (dimensions)see Vehicle specification

Technical data (electrical system)see Vehicle specification

Technical data (engine)see Vehicle specification

Technical data (weights)see Vehicle specification

Tele Aid ............................................... 211Emergency calls ............................. 212Information button ......................... 215Initiating an emergency callmanually ........................................ 213Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 284Remote door lock .......................... 216Remote door unlock ...................... 215Roadside Assistance button .......... 214Search & Send ............................... 215SOS button .................................... 213Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . 216System self-test ............................. 212

Telephone .......................................... 167Answering/ending a call ................ 128Call lists ......................................... 176Emergency calls “911” .................. 173Hands-free microphone ................... 33Making calls ................................... 177Menu ............................................. 128Operation ....................................... 128Phone book ........................... 128, 174Redialing ........................................ 129

Temperature Coolant .......................................... 117Interior temperature ...................... 192Outside .......................................... 118

Tether anchorage pointssee Children in the vehicle

Tie-down rings ................................... 203Tightening torque

Wheels ........................................... 321Time setting ....................................... 132TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 252Tire and Loading Informationplacard ............................................... 238Tire and loading terminology ........... 250Tire Identification Number

see TIN

16 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 16

Tire inflation pressure Checking ........................................ 232Important notes on ........................ 231Label on the inside of fuel fillerflap ................................................ 231Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 238

Tire labeling ....................................... 246Tire load rating .................................. 251Tire ply composition and materialused .................................................... 252Tire pressure loss warning system . 233Tires ........................................... 229, 344

Advanced Tire PressureMonitoring System (AdvancedTPMS) ............................................ 234Air pressure ................................... 230Care and maintenance ................... 243Cleaning ......................................... 244Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 242Important notes on tire inflationpressure ........................................ 231Inflation pressure ........................... 232Information placard ....................... 238Inspection ...................................... 243Labeling ......................................... 246Load index ............................. 246, 251Load rating .................................... 251Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ................................... 276, 296Ply composition and materialused ............................................... 252Problems under-/overinflation ...... 232Retreads ........................................ 229Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 344Rotation ......................................... 245Service life ..................................... 243Sizes .............................................. 344Snow chains .................................. 253Speed rating .......................... 247, 252Storing ........................................... 244Temperature .......................... 231, 245Terminology ................................... 250Tire Identification Number ............. 252Tire pressure loss warning system . 233TPMS low tire pressure/malfunction telltale ........................ 306Traction ................................. 244, 252Tread ............................................. 252

Tread depth ........................... 243, 252Treadwear ...................................... 244Treadwear indicators ............. 243, 252Vehicle maximum load on .............. 252Wear pattern .................................. 245Winter tires ............................ 252, 344

Tire speed rating ....................... 247, 252Top tether

see Children in the vehicle Total load limit ................................... 252Towing

Towing eye bolt .............................. 326Vehicle ........................................... 325

Towing eye bolt ................................. 326Traction ...................................... 244, 252Transfer case ..................................... 116Transmission

see Automatic transmission orManual transmission

Transmission fluid level .................... 227Transmission gear selector lever

see Gear selector lever Transmission positions .................... 109Traveling abroad ............................... 257Tread (tires) ....................................... 252Tread depth (tires) .................... 243, 252Treadwear .......................................... 244Treadwear indicators (tires) . . . . 243, 252Trip menu ........................................... 121Trunk

Closing ............................................. 76Fuse box ........................................ 329Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 286Opening ........................................... 75Tie-down rings ............................... 203Trunk lid emergency release ............ 76Unlocking manually ....................... 309Valet locking .................................... 77

Turning off the engine ...................... 106Turn signals ......................................... 93

Cleaning lenses ............................. 263Indicator lamps ................................ 28Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 296Replacing bulbs ............................. 314

Index 17


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 17

UUniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .................................. 244, 252Units

Selecting speedometer displaymode ............................................. 131

Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 354Unlocking the vehicle

KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71Manually ........................................ 309SmartKey ......................................... 70

Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 266Useful features .................................. 207

VValet locking ........................................ 77Vehicle

Battery ........................................... 321Care ............................................... 260Control system .............................. 118Identification Number (VIN) ........... 332Locking/unlocking ........................... 70Lowering (wheel change) ............... 321Modifications and alterations,Operating safety .............................. 22Towing ........................................... 325Unlocking/locking manually .......... 309

Vehicle dimensionssee Vehicle specification

Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) ................................................... 332Vehicle jack

see Jack Vehicle lighting .................................... 90Vehicle loading

Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 203Instructions .................................... 202Load limit ....................................... 239Roof rack ....................................... 203Split rear seat bench ..................... 204Terminology ................................... 250

Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 252Vehicle specification

C 250 ............................................. 334C 250 4MATIC ............................... 335C 250 4MATIC Sport ...................... 336

C 250 Sport ................................... 334C 300 ............................................. 337C 300 4MATIC ............................... 339C 300 4MATIC Sport ...................... 340C 300 Sport ................................... 338C 350 ............................................. 341C 350 4MATIC ............................... 343C 350 Sport ................................... 342C 63 AMG ...................................... 343

Vehicle status message memory . . . . 129Vehicle tool kit .................................. 268Vehicle washing

see Vehicle care Vehicle weights

see Vehicle specification

WWarning sounds

Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 51Parking brake ................................ 281Parktronic system .......................... 187Seat belt telltale ............................ 301

Warranty coverage ............................ 332Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem ................................................ 358Washer fluid

Mixing ratio .................................... 358Refilling .......................................... 228

Washing the vehicle .......................... 260Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 245Weights (vehicle)

see Vehicle specification Wheel

Changing ....................................... 317Removing ....................................... 320Spare ............................................. 317Tightening torque ........................... 321

Wheels, sizes ..................................... 344Wheels, Tires and .............................. 229Window curtain air bags ..................... 42Windows

see Power windows Windows, cleaning ............................ 264Windshield

Cleaning wiper blades .................... 264Defogging ...................................... 195

18 Index


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 18

Washer fluid ................................... 358Wipers ............................................. 96

Windshield wipers Replacing wiper blades .................. 316

Winter driving Instructions .................................... 253Snow chains .................................. 253Tires ............................................... 252

Winter tires ................................ 252, 344Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 266

Index 19


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 19

Product Information

Please observe the following in your own bestinterest:We recommend using Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion parts andaccessories explicitly approved by us for yourvehicle model.We have tested these parts to determine theirreliability, safety and special suitability forMercedes-Benz vehicles.We are unable to make an assessment forother products and therefore cannot be heldresponsible for them, even if in individualcases an official approval or authorization bygovernmental or other agencies should exist.Use of such parts and accessories couldadversely affect the safety, performance orreliability of your vehicle. Please do not usethem.Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre-approved conversion parts and accessoriesare available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In addition, you will receivecomprehensive information on permissibletechnical modifications and expertinstallations.

Operator’s Manual

NotesThis Operator’s Manual contains a great dealof useful information. We urge you to read itcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving.For your own safety and longer service life ofthe vehicle, we urge you to follow theinstructions and warnings contained in thisOperator’s Manual. Ignoring them couldresult in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others. Vehicle damagecaused by failure to follow instructions is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

We continuously strive to improve ourproduct and ask for your understanding thatwe reserve the right to make changes indesign and equipment. Therefore,information, illustrations, and descriptions inthis Operator’s Manual might differ from yourvehicle.

Vehicle equipmentYour vehicle may have some or all of theequipment described in this manual.Therefore, you may find explanations foroptional equipment not installed in yourvehicle. If you have any questions aboutoperating particular equipment, anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be gladto demonstrate the proper procedures.Optional equipment is also described in thismanual, including operating instructionswherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrationsherein may vary slightly from the actualequipment of your vehicle.If there are any equipment details that are notshown or described in this Operator’sManual, any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will be glad to inform you of correctcare and operating procedures. TheOperator’s Manual and Maintenance Bookletare important documents and should be keptwith the vehicle.

Service and warranty informationThe Service and Warranty Informationbooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,including:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

20 Introduction


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 20

Rhode Island, and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)

Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles

Under California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directlynotified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Written notification should not be sent to adealer, it should be addressed to

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Maintenance Booklet describes all thenecessary maintenance work which shouldbe performed at regular intervals.Always have the Maintenance Booklet withyou when you take the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forservice. The service advisor will record eachservice in the booklet for you.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram provides factory-trained technicalhelp in the event of a breakdown. Calls to thetoll-free Roadside Assistance number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)will be answered by Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Representatives24 hours a day, 365 days a year.For additional information refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (in the USA) or theRoadside Assistance section of the Serviceand Warranty Information Booklet (inCanada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or ownershipIf you change your address, be sure to sendin the “Change of Address Notice” found inthe Service and Warranty InformationBooklet, or simply call the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center (in the USA) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), orCustomer Service (in Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in

Introduction 21


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 21

Z

contacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave allliterature with the vehicle to make it availableto the next operator.If you bought this vehicle used, be sure tosend in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car”found in the Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in theUSA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (inCanada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:RService facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with

catalytic converters may not be available;the use of leaded fuels will damage thecatalysts.RGasoline may have a considerably lower

octane rating, and improper fuel can causeengine damage.

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe under our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:In the USA:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In Canada:Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

G Warning!Work improperly carried out on electroniccomponents and associated software couldcause them to cease functioning. Because thevehicle’s electronic components areinterconnected, any modifications made mayproduce an undesired effect on othersystems. Electronic malfunctions couldseriously impair the operating safety of yourvehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor repairs or modifications to electroniccomponents.Other improper work or modifications on thevehicle could also have a negative impact onthe operating safety of the vehicle.Some safety systems only function while theengine is running. You should therefore neverturn off the engine while driving.

G Warning!Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody ortires/wheels may cause serious damage andimpair the operating safety of your vehicle.Such blows can be caused, for example, byrunning over an obstacle, road debris or apothole. If you feel a sudden significantvibration or ride disturbance, or you suspectthat damage to your vehicle as occurred:Rturn on your hazard warning flashersRslow down carefullyRdrive with caution to an area which is a safe

distance from the road

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicleappears unsafe, have it towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or otherqualified maintenance or repair facility forfurther inspection or repairs.

22 Introduction


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 22

Proper use of the vehicleProper use of the vehicle requires that you arefamiliar with the following information andrules:Rthe safety precautions in this manualRthe “Technical data” section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRmotor vehicle laws and safety standards

G Warning!Various warning labels are attached to yourvehicle. These warning labels are intended tomake you and others aware of various risks.Do not remove any of these warning labelsunless explicitly instructed to do so byinformation on the label itself. Removingwarning labels may cause you and others tobe unaware of certain risks which may resultin an accident and/or personal injury.

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand corrected if required. If the matter is nothandled to your satisfaction, please discussthe problem with the Mercedes-Benz Centermanagement or, if necessary, contact us atone of the following addresses:In the USA:Customer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In Canada:Customer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

For the USA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966”.

Reporting safety defectsIf you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go towww.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromwww.safercar.gov.

Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronic recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Please note that your vehicle is equipped withdevices that can record vehicle systems dataand, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, maytransmit some data in certain accidents.

Introduction 23


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 23

Z

This information helps, for example, todiagnose vehicle systems after a collision andto continuously improve vehicle safety.Daimler may access the information andshare it with othersRfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle owner or

lesseeRin response to an official request by law

enforcement or other government agencyRfor use in dispute resolution involving

Daimler, its affiliates or sales/serviceorganization and/orRas otherwise required or permitted by lawPlease check the Tele Aid subscriptionservice agreement for details regarding theinformation that may be recorded ortransmitted via that system.

24 Introduction


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 24

Exterior view ....................................... 26Cockpit ................................................. 27Instrument cluster .............................. 28Multifunction steering wheel ............. 29Center console .................................... 31Overhead control panel ...................... 32Door control panel, seat adjust-ment ..................................................... 33

25

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 25

Exterior view

i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially availablefor your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not beequipped with all features described in this manual.

Function Page

: Trunk:Locking and unlocking 70,

309Opening and closing 75Valet locking 77

; Rear lamps 314

= Rear window defroster 196

? Fuel filler flap 222

A Exterior rear view mirrors 86

B Power tilt/sliding sunroof 196Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel 199

C Windshield:Wiping with washer fluid 97Cleaning 264

Function Page

D Doors:Locking and unlocking 70,

309

E Wipers 96Wiper blades, replacing 316Wiper blades, cleaning 264

F Hood 224

G Front lamps 314

H Headlamp cleaning system 93

I Front towing eye 326

J Tires and wheels 229Rims and tires 344

K Rear towing eye 326

26 Exterior viewAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 26

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel gearshiftcontrol 112

; Cruise control lever 180

= Instrument cluster 116

? Multifunction steeringwheel 118

A Horn

B Front Parktronic warningindicators, Canada only 186

C Overhead control panel 32

D Glove box 205

E Glove box lock 206

F Center console 31

G Starter switch 77KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton 78

Function Page

H Steering wheel releasehandle (manual) 85

I Steering wheel adjustmentstalk (electrical) 85

J Combination switch:Turn signals 93Wipers 96High beam 93

K Parking brake pedal 105

L Parking brake release 105

M On-board diagnostics(OBD) socket

N Hood lock release 224

O Exterior lamp switch 90

P Door control panel and seatadjustment/memory 33

Cockpit 27

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 27

Z

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Combination gauge with:

Fuel gauge 1188 Fuel tank reservewarning lamp 304Coolant temperature gauge 117? Coolant temperaturewarning lamp 305Indicator/warning lamps:K High-beam headlampindicator lamp 93L Low-beam headlampindicator lamp 91; Engine malfunctionindicator lamp 305$ Brake warning lamp,USA only 300J Brake warning lamp,Canada only 300

; # Left turn signalindicator lamp 93

Function Page

= d ESP® warning lamp 62,302

? Speedometer

A Multifunction display 120

B ! Right turn signalindicator lamp 93

C Tachometer with: N Front fog lampsindicator lamp 92R Rear fog lampindicator lamp 92å ESP OFF warninglamp, C 63 AMG only

64,302

h Combination low tirepressure/TPMSmalfunction telltale, USAonly

234,306

6 SupplementalRestraint System (SRS)indicator lamp

36,302

28 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 28

Function Page! Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) indicatorlamp

61,298

7 Seat belt telltale 51,301

D Outside temperature(manual transmission) 118Permanent display:Outside temperature orspeedometer(automatic transmission)

118,132

E Outside temperature(automatic transmission)

118,132

F Program mode indicator(automatic transmission) 111

G Transmission positionindicator/gear rangeindicator(automatic transmission)

109,111

Additional speedometer(manual transmission) 132

H Digital clock 132

I Instrument clusterillumination 117

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 120

; Press button ~:to end a call 128to reject an incoming call 128Press button 6:to answer a call 128to dial1 128to redial1 129Press button W or X:to set the volume 126to operate the RACETIMER2 124Press button 8 to mute

= Press button ? toactivate the Voice ControlSystem3

1 Function only available in telephone menu.2 AMG vehicles only.3 The Voice Control System is only available with the COMAND system. Refer to separate operating

instructions.

Multifunction steering wheel 29

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 29

Z

Function Page

? Press button % briefly:to go to the next highermenu level 120to confirm display message 120to cancel the Voice ControlSystem3

Press and hold button% to select the standarddisplay 120

A Press button = or ;: 120to call up line for mainmenusto scroll to the left or rightto select menusPress button 9 or :briefly: 120to select submenusto scroll up or down throughliststo select previous or nexttrack, scene, or storedstation within Audio menu 126to switch to the phone bookand select a name ornumber within Tel menu 128Press and hold button9 or :: 120to select previous or nexttrack or scene with quicksearch or to select previousor next station in waveband(if no station list isavailable) within Audiomenu 126to start the quick search inthe phone book within Telmenu 128

Function PagePress button a:to confirm selection ormessage 120to switch to the phonebook1 128to dial a selected phonenumber1 128

3 The Voice Control System is only available with the COMAND system. Refer to separate operatinginstructions.

1 Function only available in telephone menu.

30 Multifunction steering wheelAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 30

Center console

Upper part

Function Page

: Audio display cover 139

; Hazard warning flasherswitch 93

= Alarm system indicatorlamp 67

? Front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp, USAonly

42,308

Front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp,Canada only

46,307

A Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP®) switch 63

B Audio system 136orCOMAND system, seeseparate operatinginstructions

C Seat heating, frontpassenger side 84

Function Page

D Parktronic systemdeactivation switch,Canada only 187

E Rear window sunshadeswitch 208

F Sport driving mode on/offbutton 184

G Dual-zone automaticclimate control 189Rear window defroster 196

H Seat heating, driver’s side 84

Center console 31

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 31

Z

Lower part

Function Page

: Ashtray 209Cigarette lighter 209

; Gear shift lever for manualtransmission 107Gear selector lever forautomatic transmission 108

= Cup holder 207

? Front armrest storagecompartments 206

A Audio controller 140COMAND controller (seeseparate operatinginstructions)

B Program mode selectorswitch for automatictransmission 111

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: Rear interior lighting on/off 95

; Interior lighting control 95

= Right reading lamp on/off 95

? Power tilt/sliding sunroofswitch 196orPower tilt/sliding panelswitch 200

A Information button (TeleAid system) 215

B SOS button (Tele Aidsystem) 213

C Interior rear view mirror 86

D Integrated electroniccompass 210

E Garage door opener 216

32 Overhead control panelAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 32

Function Page

F Hands-free microphone forTele Aid (emergency callsystem), telephone andVoice Control System4

G Roadside Assistancebutton (Tele Aid system) 214

H Left reading lamp on/off 95

I Front interior lighting on/off 95

Door control panel, seat adjustment

Door control panel, vehicles with memory function

Function Page

: Inside door handle 74

; Central unlocking switch 75

= Seat adjustment 82

? Memory function (forstoring seat, exteriormirror, and steering wheelsettings) 89

A Exterior rear view mirrorsadjustment 86Power-folding exterior rearview mirrors, Canada only 88

B Switches for opening/closing front and rear doorwindows 98

C Rear door window overrideswitch 59

4 The Voice Control System is only available with the COMAND system. Refer to separate operatinginstructions.

Door control panel, seat adjustment 33

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 33

Z

Function Page

D Trunk opening switch 75

E Central locking switch 75

Seat adjustment, vehicles without memoryfunction

Function Page

= Seat adjustment 80

34 Door control panel, seat adjustmentAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 34

Vehicle equipment .............................. 36Occupant safety .................................. 36Panic alarm .......................................... 60Driving safety systems ....................... 60Anti-theft systems .............................. 66

35

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 35

Vehicle equipment

i This Operator’s Manual describes allfeatures, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Occupant safety

IntroductionIn this section you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint systems are:RSeat beltsRChild restraintsRLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) also known as ISOFIXAdditional protection potential is provided by:RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with

- Air bags- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for

seat belts- Seat belt force limiter

RNECK-PRO active front head restraintsRAir bag system components with

- Front passenger front air bag offindicator lamp

- USA only: Front passenger seat withOccupant Classification System (OCS)

- Canada only: Front passenger seat withBabySmart™ air bag deactivation system

Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other.

G Warning!Modifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

i See “Children in the vehicle”(Y page 54) for information onRinfants and children traveling with you in

the vehicleRrestraint systems for infants and children

SRS indicator lampThe SRS system conducts a self-test whenthe ignition is switched on and in regularintervals while the engine is running. Thisfacilitates detection of system malfunctions.The SRS indicator lamp 6 in theinstrument cluster comes on when theignition is switched on. It goes out no laterthan a few seconds after the engine has beenstarted.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the SRS indicator lamp6 is not lit while the engine is running.

36 Occupant safetySa

fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 36

G Warning!The SRS self-check has detected amalfunction when the SRS indicator lamp6

Rdoes not come on at allRfails to go out after approximately

4 seconds after the engine was startedRcomes on after the engine was started or

while driving

For your safety, we strongly recommend thatyou contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter immediately to have the systemchecked. Otherwise the SRS may not beactivated when needed in an accident, whichcould result in serious or fatal injury. The SRSmight also deploy unexpectedly andunnecessarily which could also result in injuryas well.In addition, improper work on the SRS createsa risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment. Workon the SRS must therefore only be performedby qualified technicians. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.USA only: Call our Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for details.

Air bags

G Warning!Air bags are designed to reduce the potentialof injury and fatality in certainRfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s

side knee bag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window

curtain air bags and pelvis air bags)

However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

Deployment of the air bags temporarilyreleases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither harmfulto your health, nor does it indicate a fire in thevehicle. The dust might cause sometemporary breathing difficulty for people withasthma or other breathing trouble. To avoidthis, you may wish to get out of the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so. If you have anybreathing difficulty but cannot get out of thevehicle after the air bag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or door.

G Warning!To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driverand front passenger to always be in a properlyseated position and to wear their respectiveseat belt.For maximum protection in the event of acollision always be in normal seated positionwith your back against the seat backrest.Fasten your seat belt and make sure it isproperly positioned on your body.Since the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag as itinflates with great force instantaneously:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RMove the driver’s seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver’s chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.You should be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. If

Occupant safety 37

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 37

Z

you have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RDo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.RKeep hands on the outside of the steering

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms insidethe rim can increase the risk and potentialseverity of hand/arm injury when the driverfront air bag inflates.RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as

possible rearward from the dashboardwhen the seat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious injuries or death should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for the size andweight of the child.RCanada only: Children 12 years old and

under must never ride in the front seat,except in a Mercedes-Benz authorizedBabySmart™ compatible child seat, whichoperates with the BabySmart™ air bagdeactivation system installed in the vehicleto deactivate the front passenger front airbag when it is installed properly. Otherwisethey will be struck by the air bag when itinflates in a crash. If this happens, seriousor fatal injury will result.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator’s Manual.

G Warning!Accident research shows that the safest placefor children in an automobile is in a rear seat.

There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-related injury if occupants, especiallychildren, are not properly seated or restrainedwhen next to a side impact air bag whichneeds to deploy rapidly in a side impact inorder to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possible,wear the seat belt properly, and forchildren 12 years old and under,use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for thesize and weight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

Air bags are designed to deploy only in certainRfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s

side knee bag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags, pelvis

air bags and window curtain air bags) if thesystem determines the need for air bagdeployment

Only in the event of such a situation will theyprovide their supplemental protection.The driver and passengers should alwayswear their seat belts. Otherwise it is notpossible for the air bags to provide theirsupplemental protection.In case of other types of impacts and impactsbelow air bag deployment thresholds, airbags will not deploy. The driver andpassengers will then be protected to theextent possible by a properly fastened seatbelt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.Always wear your seat belt, regardless ofwhether or not your vehicle is equipped withair bags.It is important to your safety and that of yourpassengers to have deployed air bags


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 38

replaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags will continue to provide supplementalcrash protection for occupants.

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) and air bag

G Warning!RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check with your localgovernment’s disposal guidelines.California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo no change or remove any component or

part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front passenger front air bagcover, outboard sides of the seat

backrests, door trim panels, or door frametrims.RDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupants

free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangers

from the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, we stronglyrecommend that you inform the subsequentowner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.Also refer them to the applicable section inthe Operator’s Manual.

Occupant safety 39

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 39

Z

Front air bags

G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.

Driver’s front air bag : and front passengerfront air bag ; are designed to provideincreased protection for the driver and frontpassenger against the risk of injuries to thehead and thorax.Driver and front passenger front air bag anddriver’s side knee bag are deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending on whether the respective seat

belt is in useRindependently of the side impact air bags,

pelvis air bags and/or the window curtainair bags

The front air bags in this vehicle have beendesigned to inflate in two stages. This allowsthe air bags to have different rates of inflation.The rate of inflation is based on the vehicledeceleration rate as assessed by the air bagcontrol unit.Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The frontpassenger front air bag deployment isadditionally influenced by the passenger’sweight category as identified by the OccupantClassification System (OCS) (Y page 42).Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter thefront passenger-side occupant, the higher thevehicle deceleration rate required for second

stage inflation of the front passenger front airbag.The air bags will not deploy in impacts whichdo not exceed the system’s presetdeployment thresholds. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belts.The front air bags will not deploy in the eventof a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate oflongitudinal deceleration or accelerationexceeds the preset deployment threshold forthe front air bags.The front passenger front air bag will only bedeployed ifRvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,

based on OCS weight sensor readings,detects that the front passenger seat isoccupiedRthe 45 indicator lamp in the center

console is not lit (USA only: (Y page 42),Canada only: (Y page 46))Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment

threshold

! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bagdeactivation system (Canada only): Do notplace objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) onthe front passenger seat. This could causethe front or side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side to deploy in a crash whichexceeds the system’s deploymentthreshold.

Knee bag Knee bag = is designed to provide increasedprotection for the driver against the risk ofinjuries to the knees, thighs and lower legs.Knee bag = is located on the driver sidelower instrument panel. It is designed tooperate together with the driver front air bagin certain frontal impacts if the systemdetermines that air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt. Knee bag = operates best inconjunction with a properly positioned andfastened seat belt.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 40

Side impact air bags


G Warning!The pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do notmodify any components of the doors or doortrim panels including, for example, theaddition of door speakers.Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to thedoors create a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Side impact air bags : are designed toprovide increased protection for the thoraxbut not the head, neck and arms of the driveror front passenger.The side impact air bags : are deployedRon the impacted side of the vehicleRin instances with a high rate of lateral

vehicle deceleration or accelerationRregardless of whether the seat belts on the

impacted side of the vehicle are in useRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsVehicles with OCS (USA only): The frontpassenger side impact air bag will not deployif the OCS senses that the front passenger

seat is empty and the front passenger seatbelt is not fastened. With the front passengerseat empty and the seat belt fastened, thefront passenger side impact air bag willdeploy independently of the empty seat.Whether a seat belt is recognized as fasteneddepends on whether or not the latch plate isproperly inserted into the buckle.Side impact air bags : are not deployed inside impacts which do not exceed thesystem’s deployment threshold.Side impact air bags : will not deploy in theevent of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate oflateral deceleration or acceleration exceedsthe preset deployment threshold for sideimpact air bags :.

! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bagdeactivation system (Canada only): Do notplace objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) onthe front passenger seat. This could causethe front or side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side to deploy in a crash whichexceeds the system’s deploymentthreshold.

G Warning!Only use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using other seat covers mayinterfere with or prevent the deployment ofthe side impact air bags and/or pelvis airbags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for availability.

Pelvis air bags

G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.Pelvis air bags are not available on C 63 AMG.

Occupant safety 41

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 41

Z

Pelvis air bags : are designed to provideincreased protection for the pelvis.Pelvis air bags : are deployedRin instances with a high rate of lateral

vehicle deceleration or accelerationRon the impacted side of the vehicleRindependently of whether the seat belt is in

useRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsVehicles with OCS, USA only: Frontpassenger pelvis air bag : will not deploy ifthe OCS senses that the front passenger seatis empty and the front passenger seat belt isnot fastened. With the front passenger seatempty and the seat belt fastened, frontpassenger pelvis air bag : will deployindependently of the empty seat. Whether aseat belt is recognized as fastened dependson whether or not the latch plate is properlyinserted into the buckle.Pelvis air bags : are not deployed in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system’sdeployment threshold.Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in the eventof a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateraldeceleration or acceleration exceeds thepreset deployment threshold for pelvis airbags :.

G Warning!Only use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using other seat covers may

interfere with or prevent the deployment ofthe side impact air bags and/or pelvis airbags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for availability.

Window curtain air bags


Window curtain air bags : are designed toprovide increased protection for the head butnot the chest or arms.Window curtain air bags : are deployedRon the impacted side of the vehicleRin instances with a high rate of lateral

vehicle deceleration or accelerationRindependently of the front air bagsRregardless of whether the front passenger

seat is occupiedRregardless of whether the seat belt on the

impacted side of the vehicle is in useWindow curtain air bags : are not deployedin impacts which do not exceed the system’sdeployment threshold.Window curtain air bags : deploy in the areaindicated by the arrows.

Occupant Classification SystemThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) isstandard equipment in USA.The OCS activates or deactivates the frontpassenger front air bag automatically. Therespective status is based on the classified


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 42

occupant weight category determined byweight sensor readings from the frontpassenger seat.The system does not deactivateRthe front passenger side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)To be classified correctly, the front passengermust sitRwith the seat belt properly fastenedRin a position that is as upright as possible

with the back against the seat backrestRwith the feet on the floorIf the occupant’s weight is transferred toanother object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaningon armrests), the OCS may not be able toproperly approximate the occupant’s weightcategory.If your seat, including the trim cover andcushion, needs to be serviced in any way, takethe vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Only seat accessories approved byMercedes-Benz may be used.Both the driver and the front passengershould always use the 45 indicatorlamp as an indication of whether or not thefront passenger is properly positioned.

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself orherself in the seat until the 45indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front passenger front air bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront passenger seat occupant as weightingas much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the

front passenger seat is classified as beingempty.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remainilluminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted and then, depending on occupantweight sensor readings from the seat, remainilluminated or go out. With the 45indicator lamp illuminated, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Withthe 45 indicator lamp out, the frontpassenger front air bag is activated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately 6 seconds whenthe engine is started and then goes out,indicating that the front passenger front airbag is activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front passenger front air bag isdeactivated and will not be deployed.

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 43

Z

If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front passenger front air bagis activated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif impact exceeds a preset deployment

thresholdRindependently of the side impact air bags

or pelvis air bag

If the front passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced byRthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as

assessed by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger’s weight category as

identified by the OCS

For more information on air bag displaymessages in the multifunction display, see(Y page 272).

G Warning!According to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.

Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 45 indicator lampis illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 45 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 45 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated. Ifthe 45 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriously


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 44

injured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle’s seat belt according to the childseat manufacturer’s instructions. Forchildren larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bagmay or may not be activated.

Deployment of the driver front air bag doesnot mean that the front passenger front airbag also should have deployed.The OCS may have determinedRthat the seat was empty or occupied by the

weight up to or less than that of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standardchild restraint – both of which are instanceswhere the system suppresses deploymentof the front passenger front air bag eventhough the impact met the criteria and wasof sufficient severity to deploy the driverfront air bagRthat the seat was occupied by a small

individual (such as a young teenager or asmall adult) or a child who weighs morethan the weight of a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint – both ofwhich are instances where the system maysuppress deployment of the frontpassenger front air bag even though theimpact met the criteria and was ofsufficient severity to deploy the driver frontair bag

45 indicator lamp : will beilluminated, except with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch or with thestarter switch in position 0.

G Warning!If the red SRS indicator lamp 6 in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp are lit at the same time, thereis a malfunction in the OCS. The frontpassenger front air bag will be deactivated inthis case. Have the system checked byqualified technicians as soon as possible.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhile seated, an occupant should not

position him/herself in such a way as tocause the occupant’s weight to be liftedfrom the seat bottom as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the occupant’s weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in this

chapter.

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 45

Z

OCS Self-test After turning the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 1 or 2 or pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button once ortwice, the 45 indicator lampilluminates. If an adult occupant is properlysitting on the front passenger seat and thesystem classifies the occupant as an adult,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminateand go out after approximately 6 seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the systemclassifies the front passenger seat as beingempty, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate and not go out.

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

For more information, see the “Practicalhints” section (Y page 308).

G Warning!Never place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom andback of the child seat must make full contactwith the passenger seat cushion andbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectly mounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer’s instructions forinstallation of child seats.

BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system

The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation systemis standard equipment in Canada.

G Warning!According to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RChildren 12 years old and under must never

ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatiblechild seat, which operates with theBabySmart™ system installed in the vehicleto deactivate the front passenger front airbag when it is installed properly. Otherwisethey will be struck by the air bag when itinflates in a crash. If this happens, seriousor fatal injury will result.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means to


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 46

completely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a BabySmart™

compatible rear-facing child restraint onthe front passenger seat becausecircumstances require you to do so, makesure the 45 indicator lamp isilluminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 45 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 45 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated. Ifthe 45 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle’s seat belt according to the childseat manufacturer’s instructions.

G Warning!When using a BabySmart™ compatible childseat on the front passenger seat, the frontpassenger front air bag will not deploy only ifthe 45 indicator lamp remainsilluminated.Please be sure to check the 45indicator lamp every time you use aBabySmart™ compatible child seat on thefront passenger seat. Should the 45

indicator lamp go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation. If the45 indicator lamp remains out, do notuse the BabySmart™ restraint to transport achild on the front passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.

Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats,designed for use with the Mercedes-Benzsystem, are required for use with theBabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.Please contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for information on availability. Withthe special child seat installed properly, thefront passenger front air bag will not deploy.45 indicator lamp : will beilluminated, except with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch or with thestarter switch in position 0.The system does not deactivateRthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)

Self-test BabySmart™ without special child seat installed After turning the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 1 or 2 or pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button once ortwice, the 45 indicator lamp comeson for approximately 6 seconds and thengoes out.

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 47

Z

If the 45 indicator lamp should notcome on or is continuously lit, the system isnot functioning. You must see an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center before seating anychild on the front passenger seat. Moreinformation can be found in the “Practicalhints” section (Y page 307).

G Warning!Do not place powered-on laptops, mobilephones, electronic tags such as those used inski passes and like electronic devices on thefront passenger seat. Signals from suchdevices may interfere with the BabySmart™air bag deactivation system. Such signalinterference may cause the 45indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.The SRS indicator lamp 6 and/or the45 indicator lamp could becontinuously lit, indicating that the system isnot functioning. The front passenger front airbag could deploy inadvertently or fail todeploy in an accident.

G Warning!The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation systemwill ONLY work with a special child seatdesigned to operate with it. It will not workwith child seats which are not BabySmart™compatible.Never place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bagdeactivation system. The bottom of the childseat must make full contact with the frontpassenger seat cushion. An incorrectlymounted child seat could cause injuries to thechild in case of an accident, instead ofprotecting the child.Follow the manufacturer’s instructions forinstallation of special child seats.

Seat belts

Safety notesThe use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in all 50states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.territories and all Canadian provinces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

i See “Children in the vehicle”(Y page 54) for information onRinfants and children traveling with you in

the vehicleRrestraint systems for infants and children

G Warning!Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure all of your passengers areproperly restrained. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearingyour seat belt. The air bags can only protectas intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

G Warning!Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 48

seat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G Warning!Never let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G Warning!Damaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accident mustbe replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoringpoints must be checked.Only use seat belts which have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintended activationof the ETDs or to their failure to activate whennecessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Proper use of seat belts

G Warning!USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only protect when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in caseof an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includes

SRS (driver front air bag, driver side kneebag, front passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, pelvis air bags, windowcurtain air bags for side windows),Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),seat belt force limiters, and front seat kneebolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver’s side knee bag, and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, pelvis air bags,window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impactswhich exceed preset deploymentthresholds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted

snugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 49

Z

around a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use a

lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

G Warning!Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening the seat belts

G Warning!According to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,

children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child. For additionalinformation, see “Children in the vehicle”.A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

G Warning!Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bagdeactivation system, Canada only: Children12 years old and under must never ride in thefront seat, except in a Mercedes-Benzauthorized BabySmart™ compatible childseat, which operates with the BabySmart™system installed in the vehicle to deactivatethe front passenger front air bag when it isinstalled properly. Otherwise they will bestruck by the air bag when it inflates in acrash. If this happens, serious or fatal injurywill result.

X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt outof seat belt outlet :.

X Place the shoulder portion of the seat beltacross the top of your shoulder and the lapportion across your hips.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 50

X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until itclicks.

X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to thecorrect height (Y page 51).

X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to asnug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.

All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seatbelt have special seat belt retractors tosecure child restraints properly. For moreinformation on special seat belt retractors,see “Infant and child restraint systems”(Y page 55).To release the seat belt with seat belt releasebutton ?, see (Y page 51).

Seat belt outlet height adjustmentYou can adjust the height of the seat beltoutlet for the driver’s and front passengerseat.

X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet heightadjuster upward.The seat belt outlet height adjusterengages in different positions.

X Lowering: Press and hold releasebutton :.

X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjusterdownward.

X Release release button : and make surethe seat belt outlet height adjuster engagesinto place.

Releasing the seat beltsX Press seat belt release button ?

(Y page 50).Allow the retractor to completely rewindthe seat belt by guiding latch plate ;(Y page 50).

! Make sure the seat belt retractscompletely. Otherwise the seat belt and/orlatch plate could get caught or pinched inthe door or in the seat mechanism. This candamage the seat belt and impair itseffectiveness, and/or cause damage to thedoor and/or door trim panel. Such damageis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.Damaged seat belts must be replaced.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Enhanced seat belt reminder systemWhen the engine is started, the seat belttelltale 7 will always illuminate for6 seconds to remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningchime will sound. The warning chime goes outafter approximately 6 seconds or once thedriver’s seat belt is fastened.If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or thefront passenger’s seat belt (with the frontpassenger seat occupied) is not fastened withfront doors closed,Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains

illuminated for as long as either the driver’sor front passenger’s seat belt is notfastened.Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds

15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale7 starts flashing and a warning chimesounds with increasing intensity for amaximum of 60 seconds or until thedriver’s and front passenger’s seat belt arefastened.

Occupant safety 51

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 51

Z

If you and/or your passenger release theseat belt during driving, the seat belttelltale 7 starts flashing and thewarning chime sounds as described before.If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seatbelt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,the warning chime stops sounding, the seatbelt telltale 7 stops flashing butcontinues to be illuminated.After a vehicle standstill, the warning chimeis reactivated and the seat belt telltale7 is flashing again if the vehicle speedonce exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).

The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out ifboth the driver’s and the front passenger’sseat belt (with the front passenger seatoccupied) are fastened, or the vehicle isstanding still and a front door is opened.For more information, see “Practical hints”(Y page 301).

Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), seat belt force limiterThe seat belts for the front seats and rearouter seats are equipped with ETDs and seatbelt force limiters.The ETDs are designed to activate in thefollowing cases:Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding

the system’s preset deployment thresholdRin side impacts exceeding the system’s

preset deployment threshold on the farside of the impactRif the restraint systems are operational and

functioning correctly, see “SRS indicatorlamp” (Y page 36)

The ETDs for the front seats will only activateif the front seat belts are fastened (latch plateproperly inserted into buckle).The ETDs for the rear seats will activate withor without the respective seat belts fastened.In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from theseat belts in such a way that the seat belts fitmore snugly against the body. Seat belt force

limiters, when activated, are employed tohelp reduce the peak force exerted by theseat belts on occupants during a crash.

i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seatposition or incorrectly worn seat belts.The ETDs do not pull occupants backtoward the seat backrest.

G Warning!Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

NECK-PRO active front head restraints (except C 63 AMG)

The NECK-PRO active front head restraintsare intended to offer the driver and frontpassenger increased protection fromwhiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear-end collision, the NECK-PRO active front headrestraints on the front seats are designed tomove forward in the direction of travel. Theythus provide the head with increased supportearlier on in the collision sequence. TheNECK-PRO active front head restraints willmove forward whether the seats are occupiedor not.

G Warning!Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to thehead restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO active front head restraints may not beable to function properly or offer the intendeddegree of protection they were designed forin the event of a rear-end collision.

G Warning!Only use seat or head restraint covers whichhave been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.Using other seat or head restraint covers mayinterfere with or prevent the activation of the


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 52

NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/or the deployment of the front side impact airbags or pelvis air bags.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

When the NECK-PRO active front headrestraints have been triggered in an accident,the NECK-PRO active front head restraintsmust be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PROactive front head restraints cannot offer anyadditional protection in the event of anotherrear-end collision.For information on resetting the activatedNECK-PRO active front head restraints, see“Resetting activated head restraints”(Y page 311).You cannot remove the NECK-PRO activefront head restraints.

G Warning!For your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.

For information on head restraint adjustment,see “Head restraint height” (Y page 82), orsee “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment”(Y page 82).

Correct driver seat adjustment

G Warning!In order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol the following must be done before thevehicle is put into motion:Rseat adjustmentRhead restraint adjustmentRsteering wheel adjustment

Rrear view mirror adjustmentRfastening of seat belts

Steering wheel

G Observe Safety notes, see page 84.X Position steering wheel : properly. See

(Y page 85) for manual adjustment and(Y page 85) for electrical adjustment.

Make sure:RYou can reach the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent at the elbows.RYou can move your legs freely.RAll displays (including malfunction and

indicator lamps) on the instrument clusterare clearly visible.

Seat belt

G Observe Safety notes, see page 48.X Fasten and position your seat belt ;

correctly (Y page 50).

Occupant safety 53

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 53

Z

Make sure:RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder

section is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder.RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low

as possible on your hips.

Seat and head restraint

G Observe Safety notes, see page 79.X Position seat = and head restraint

properly. See (Y page 80) for seat andhead restraint adjustment.

Observe the following points:RAlways be in a properly seated position.RThe position should be as far rearward from

the front air bag in the steering wheel aspossible, while still permitting properoperation of vehicle controls.RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely.RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten and position your seat belt.RThe seat backrest must be in a position that

is as nearly upright as possible.RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front

edge of the seat cushion lightly supportsyour legs.RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports theback of the head at eye level.RNever place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while the seat is beingadjusted.

Children in the vehicle

Safety notesIf an infant or child is traveling with you in thevehicle:X Secure the child using an infant or child

restraint appropriate to the age and size ofthe child.

X Make sure the infant or child is properlysecured at all times while the vehicle is inmotion.

G Warning!When leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the starter switch. Alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock thevehicle. Do not leave children unattended inthe vehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencouldRinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from thestarter switch or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system’smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned by theseparts.

G Warning!Do not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 54

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child’s risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Infant and child restraint systems

G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.We recommend all infants and children beproperly restrained at all times while thevehicle is in motion.Canada only:Only use a BabySmart™ compatible childrestraint for the front passenger seat in thisvehicle.All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seatbelt have special seat belt retractors forsecure fastening of child restraints.To fasten a child restraint, follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions formounting.To activate the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and

let it retract.During seat belt retraction, a ratchetingsound can be heard to indicate that thespecial seat belt retractor is activated.The seat belt is now locked.

X Push down on child restraint to take up anyslack.

To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:X Release the seat belt buckle and let the

seat belt retract completely.The seat belt can then again be used in theusual manner.

To deactivate the special seat belt retractorfor the front passenger seat, the frontpassenger seat must be in the most backwardposition.

G Warning!Never release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is in motion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

i Information on child seats with mountingfittings for tether anchorages(Y page 57).For information on LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child seat anchors (Y page 58).

The use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, the U.S. territories and allCanadian provinces.Infants and small children should be seatedin an appropriate infant or child restraintsystem. They must be properly secured inaccordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions for the child restraint. All infantor child restraint systems must comply withU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225 and Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards 213 and 210.2.A statement by the child restraintmanufacturer of compliance with thesestandards can be found on the instructionlabel on the restraint and in the instructionmanual provided with the restraint.When using any infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat, make sure tocarefully read and follow all manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.Please read and observe warning labelsaffixed to the inside of the vehicle and toinfant or child restraints.

G Warning!According to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriate

Occupant safety 55

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 55

Z

infant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RUSA only: Your vehicle is equipped with air

bag technology designed to deactivate thefront passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RUSA only: For children larger than the

typical 12-month-old child, the frontpassenger front air bag may or may not beactivated. Always make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front passenger front airbag is deactivated.RCanada only: Children 12 years old and

under must never ride in the front seat,except in a Mercedes-Benz authorizedBabySmart™ compatible child seat, whichoperates with the BabySmart™ systeminstalled in the vehicle to deactivate thefront passenger front air bag when it isinstalled properly. Otherwise they will bestruck by the air bag when it inflates in acrash. If this happens, serious or fatal injurywill result.

RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 45 indicator lampis illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 45 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 45 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated. Ifthe 45 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle’s seat belt according to the childseat manufacturer’s instructions.

G Warning!Infants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. During anaccident, they could be crushed between theoccupant and seat belt.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 56

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts. Positionshoulder belt across chest and shoulder, notface or neck. A booster seat may benecessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) untilthey reach a height where a lap/shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

Installation of infant and child restraint systems


G Warning!Always lock the seat backrests in their uprightposition when the rear seats are occupied bypassengers. Lock the seat backrests in theirupright position before installing top tetherstraps or when the extended cargocompartment is not in use. Make sure thatseat backrests are secured properly bypushing and pulling on the seat backrests. Ifa seat backrest is not locked properly, theseat backrest could fold. The child seat wouldno longer be supported properly or positionedto provide its intended benefit. That couldcause serious or even fatal injuries.

This vehicle is equipped with tetheranchorages for a top tether strap at each ofthe rear seating positions.Top tether straps enable an additionalconnection to be made between childrestraint systems secured with LATCH-type(ISOFIX) anchors and rear seats. This canfurther reduce the risk of injury.

X Move the respective head restraint : toits uppermost position (Y page 83).

X Lift up anchorage ring cover ; fromanchorage ring =.

X Guide top tether strap A between headrestraint : and top of the seat backrest.

X Securely fasten hook ?, which is part oftop tether strap A, to anchorage ring =.

Make sureRhook ? is attached to anchorage ring =

beyond the safety catch, as illustratedRtop tether strap A is not twistedRhead restraint : is installed (if removable)

and positioned such that top tether strapA can pass freely between headrestraint : and top of the seat backrest

X Lower head restraint : if necessary(Y page 83).

Occupant safety 57

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 57

Z

Once hook ? is attached, the child restraintitself can be secured.X Install the child restraint system and

tighten top tether strap A according to thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

After removing the child restraint system andtop tether strap A:X Pull down and close anchorage ring

cover ; from respective anchorage ring=.

Child seat anchors – LATCH-type (ISOFIX)


G Warning!Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts. Positionshoulder belt across chest and shoulder, notface or neck.A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea lap/shoulder belt fits properly without abooster.Install child seat according to manufacturer’sinstructions.The child seat must be firmly attached to bothanchors.An incorrectly mounted child seat may comeloose during an accident which could result inserious injury or death to the child.Damaged or impact damaged child seats orchild seat mounting fittings must be replaced.

Each rear outer seat has two LATCH-type(ISOFIX) anchors for the installation of aLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat with matchingmounting fittings.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seataccording to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Vehicles with non-foldable rear bench seat:The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) anchors areblended with covers. Vehicles with split rearbench seat: The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) anchorsare located between the seat cushion and thebackrest.

Non-foldable rear bench seat

Information sign : indicates the position ofanchor =.X Remove anchorage ring covers ; from

anchors = by pulling it in direction ofarrow.

X Store anchorage ring covers ;, forexample in the storage compartment of therear center armrest.

Split rear bench seat, child seat anchors


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 58

X Install a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seataccording to the manufacturer’sinstructions.A rigid connection between the child seatand the body of the vehicle is established.

X Make sure that the seat belt for the rearcenter seat can operate freely with a childseat installed.

Child safety

Child safety locksG Observe Safety notes, see page 54.

G Warning!Children could open a rear door from theinside. This may cause serious personal injuryor an accident. Therefore, secure the reardoors with the child safety locks wheneverchildren are riding in the back seats of thevehicle.

The child safety locks on the rear doorsenable you to secure each rear doorindividually. You cannot open a secured reardoor from the inside. You can open the reardoor from the outside when the vehicle isunlocked.

X Securing: Press the lever up in direction ofarrow :.

X Check to make sure the child safety locksare working properly.

X Releasing: Press the lever down indirection of arrow ;.

Override switchG Observe Safety notes, see page 54.

With the override switch you can disable therear door window switches in the rear doorpanels. This can be useful, for instance, whenyou have children riding in the rear passengercompartment.

G Warning!Activate the override switch when childrenare riding in the back seats of the vehicle. Thechildren may otherwise injure themselves,e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear doorwindow opening.

X Activating: Press override switch :.Indicator lamp ; comes on.The rear door windows can no longer beoperated using the respective switchlocated in the rear doors.

You can still operate the rear door windowsusing the switches located on the doorcontrol panel of the driver’s door.X Deactivating: Press override switch :

again.The rear door windows can be operatedagain using the respective switch locatedin the rear doors.

For more information on power windows, seethe “Controls in detail” section(Y page 98).

Occupant safety 59

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 59

Z

Panic alarm

X Activating: Press and hold !button : for at least 1 second.An audible alarm and flashing exteriorlamps will operate.

X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must beinside the vehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. this device must accept any

interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,

and2. this device must accept any

interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.


Driving safety systems

IntroductionThis section contains information about thefollowing driving safety systems:RABS (Antilock Brake System)RAdaptive BrakeRBAS (Brake Assist System)REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

i In winter operation, the maximumeffectiveness of most of the drivingsystems described in this section is onlyachieved with winter tires, or snow chainsas required.

Safety notes

G Warning!The following factors increase the risk ofaccidents:RExcessive speed, especially in turnsRWet and slippery road surfacesRFollowing another vehicle too closely

The driving safety systems described in thissection cannot reduce these risks or preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on the

60 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 60

vehicle. They cannot increase braking orsteering efficiency beyond that afforded bythe condition of the vehicle brakes and tiresor the traction afforded.Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with thedriving safety systems described in thissection must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner which could jeopardizethe user’s safety or the safety of others.Always adjust your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions andkeep a safe distance to other road users andobjects on the street.If a driving system malfunctions, other drivingsafety systems may also switch off. Observeindicator and warning lamps that may comeon as well as messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.

ABS


G Warning!Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steadybrake pedal pressure instead. Pumping thebrake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABSand significantly reduces brakingeffectiveness.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulatesthe brake pressure so that the wheels do notlock during braking. This allows you tomaintain the ability to steer your vehicle.The ABS is functional above a speed ofapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independentof road surface conditions.On slippery road surfaces, the ABS willrespond even to light brake pressure.The ABS indicator lamp ! in theinstrument cluster comes on when you switchon the ignition. It goes out when the engineis running.

BrakingAt the instant one of the wheels is about tolock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in thebrake pedal. The pulsation indicates that theABS is in the regulating mode.X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake

pedal while you feel the pulsation.Continuous, steady brake pedal pressureyields the advantages provided by the ABS,namely braking power and the ability to steerthe vehicle.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

Emergency brake maneuverX Keep continuous full pressure on the brake

pedal.

G Warning!If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safetysystems such as the BAS or the ESP® are alsoswitched off. Observe indicator and warninglamps that may come on as well as messagesin the multifunction display that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.

BAS

G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates inemergency situations. If you apply the brakesvery quickly, the BAS provides full brakeboost automatically, thereby potentiallyreducing the braking distance.X Apply continuous full braking pressure until

the emergency braking situation is over.The ABS will prevent the wheels fromlocking.

Driving safety systems 61

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 61

Z

When you release the brake pedal, the brakesfunction again as normal. The BAS is thendeactivated.

G Warning!If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system stillfunctions, but without the additional brakeboost available that the BAS would normallyprovide in an emergency braking maneuver.Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

Adaptive BrakeAdaptive Brake provides a high level ofbraking safety as well as increased brakingcomfort. Adaptive Brake takes driver andvehicle characteristics into consideration,thus achieving an optimal braking effect.In addiditon, Adaptive Brake provides the hill-start assist system (Y page 183).For more information on the brake system,see (Y page 255).

EBP

G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)enhances braking effectiveness by allowingthe rear brakes to supply a greater proportionof the braking effort in straight-line brakingwithout a loss of vehicle stability.

G Warning!If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system willstill function with full brake boost. However,the rear wheels could lock up duringemergency braking situations, for example.You could lose control of the vehicle andcause an accident.Adapt your driving style to the changeddriving characteristics.

ESP®

G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) isoperational as soon as the engine is running.It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force ofadhesive friction between the tires and theroad surface) and handling.The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviatesfrom the direction of travel as intended by thedriver. By applying brakes to individualwheels and by limiting the engine output, theESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. TheESP® is especially useful while driving off andon wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®

also stabilizes the vehicle during braking andsteering maneuvers.The ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster comes on when you switchon the ignition. It goes out when the engineis running.The ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster flashes when the ESP® isengaged.

G Warning!Never switch off the ESP® when you see theESP® warning lamp d flashing in theinstrument cluster. In this case proceed asfollows:RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as

possible.RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator

pedal.RAdapt your speed and driving style to the

prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannotprevent accidents resulting from excessivespeed.

i Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display (Y page 270) willrefer to the ESP® as ESC.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 62

! Vehicles with 4MATIC:Only conduct operational or performancetests on a two-axle dynamometer. If suchtests are necessary, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You couldotherwise seriously damage the brakesystem or the transfer case which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometer.Active braking action through the ESP®

may otherwise seriously damage the brakesystem which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometeror the vehicle is being towed with the frontaxle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®


! The ESP® will only function properly if youuse wheels of the recommended tire sizeas specified in the “Technical data” sectionof this Operator’s Manual.

i The cruise control switches offautomatically when the ESP® engages.

Electronic Traction System (ETS/4-ETS)

G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic TractionSystem, vehicles with 4MATIC only) arecomponents of the ESP®. The ETS/4-ETSimproves the vehicle’s ability to utilizeavailable traction, especially under slipperyroad conditions by applying the brakes to aspinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC alsotransfer more power to the wheel(s) withtraction.When you switch off the ESP®, theETS/4-ETS is still enabled.

Switching the ESP® off or on (except C 63 AMG)

G Warning!The ESP® should not be switched off duringnormal driving other than in thecircumstances described below. Disablingthe system will reduce vehicle stability indriving maneuvers.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch offthe ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spinand thus cut into surfaces for better grip, forexampleRwhen driving with snow chainsRin deep snowRin sand or gravel

G Warning!Switch on the ESP® immediately if theaforementioned circumstances do not applyanymore. Otherwise the ESP® will notstabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skidor a wheel is spinning.


Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 63

Z

When you switch off the ESP®,Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicleRthe engine output is not limited, which

allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cutinto surfaces for better gripRthe ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to

a spinning wheelRthe ESP® continues to operate when you

are brakingRthe cruise control cannot be activatedRthe cruise control switches off if activated

i When the ESP® is switched off and one ormore drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®

warning lamp d in the instrumentcluster flashes. However, the ESP® willthen not stabilize the vehicle.

X Switching off: With the engine running,press ESP® switch : until the ESP®

warning lamp d in the instrumentcluster comes on.The ESP® is switched off.

G Warning!When the ESP® warning lamp d isilluminated continuously, the ESP® isswitched off or is not operational due to amalfunction. Vehicle stability in standarddriving maneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. This may cause serious damage to thedrivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

X Switching on: Press ESP® switch : untilthe ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster goes out.You are now again in normal driving modewith the ESP® switched on.

C 63 AMG

Switching ESP® SPORT on or offG Warning!ESP® SPORT should not be switched onduring normal driving.Switching ESP® SPORT on will result in thefollowing:Rno restriction to engine torqueRsystem-supported traction control is

limited

ESP® SPORT is designed for driving on closedtracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteerand understeer characteristics are desiredand requires a highly skilled and experienceddriver able to handle these critical drivingsituations.You could lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.Please be aware of these limits when youswitch on ESP® SPORT.Do not switch on ESP® SPORT when a sparewheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch onESP® SPORT. This allows the drive wheels tospin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip,for exampleRwhen driving with snow chainsRin deep snowRin sand or gravel


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 64

G Warning!Switch off ESP® SPORT and switch on theESP® immediately if the aforementionedcircumstances do not apply anymore.Otherwise ESP® SPORT will only stabilize thevehicle to a limited extent when it is startingto skid or a wheel is spinning.

When you switch on ESP® SPORTRthe ESP® stabilizes the vehicle only to a

limited extentRthe engine output is limited, but only to the

extent that allows the drive wheels to spinand thus cut into surfaces for better gripRthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a

spinning wheelRthe ESP® continues to operate when you

are braking hardRthe cruise control cannot be activatedRthe cruise control switches off if activated

i When ESP® SPORT is switched on andone or more drive wheels are spinning, theESP® warning lamp d in the instrumentcluster flashes. However, the ESP® willthen stabilize the vehicle only to a limitedextent.

X Switching on: With the engine running,press ESP® SPORT switch : briefly.The ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster comes on. The message

ESC-SPORT appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Switching off: With the engine running,press ESP® SPORT switch : briefly.The ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster goes out. The messageESC-ON appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

ESP® SPORT switches off automatically whenyou turn off the engine. When starting theengine, the ESP® is activated automatically.


Switching the ESP® off or onG Warning!The ESP® should not be switched off duringnormal driving.Disabling of the system will result in thefollowing:Rno restriction to engine torqueRloss of system-supported traction control

“ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on closedtracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteerand understeer characteristics are desiredand requires a highly skilled and experienceddriver able to handle these critical drivingsituations.You could lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.Please be aware of these limits when youswitch off the ESP®.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch offthe ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spinand thus cut into surfaces for better grip, forexampleRwhen driving with snow chainsRin deep snowRin sand or gravel


Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 65

Z

G Warning!Switch on the ESP® immediately if theaforementioned circumstances do not applyanymore. Otherwise the ESP® will notstabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skidor a wheel is spinning.

When you switch off the ESP®,Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicleRthe engine output is not limited, which

allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cutinto surfaces for better gripRthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a

spinning wheelRthe ESP® continues to operate when you

are braking hardRthe cruise control cannot be activatedRthe cruise control switches off if activated

i When the ESP® is switched off and one ormore drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®

warning lamp d in the instrumentcluster does not flash. The ESP® will thennot stabilize the vehicle.

X Switching off: With the engine running,press ESP® SPORT switch : until theESP® warning lamp d and the ESP OFFwarning lamp åin the instrumentcluster come on.The message ESC-OFF appears in themultifunction display.


G Warning!When the ESP® warning lamp d and theESP® OFF warning lamp å are illuminatedcontinuously, the ESP® is switched off.Vehicle stability in standard drivingmaneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. This may cause serious damage to thedrivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

X Switching on: With the engine running,press ESP® SPORT switch : briefly.The ESP® warning lamp d and theESP® OFF warning lamp å in theinstrument cluster go out. The messageESC-ON appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Anti-theft systems

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents unauthorizedpersons from starting your vehicle.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

ActivatingX With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey

from the starter switch.X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and

open the driver’s door.

66 Anti-theft systemsSa

fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 66

DeactivatingX Switch on the ignition.

i Starting the engine will also deactivatethe immobilizer.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted (yet the vehicle’s battery ischarged), the system is not operational.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Anti-theft alarm systemOnce the alarm system has been armed, avisual and audible alarm is triggered whensomeone opensRa doorRthe trunkRthe hoodThe alarm will stay on even if the activatingelement, a door, for example, is closedimmediately.The alarm system will also be triggered whenRthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical

keyRa door is opened from the insideRthe trunk is opened with the emergency

release buttonTo cancel the alarm after it has beentriggered, see “Canceling the alarm”(Y page 68).

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates acall to the Customer Assistance Centerautomatically. The Tele Aid system willinitiate the call provided thatRyou have subscribed to the Tele Aid

serviceRthe Tele Aid service has been activated

properlyRthe necessary mobile phone, power

supply and GPS coverage are available

X Arming: Lock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The turn signal lamps flash three times andan acoustic warning sounds three times toindicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicatorlamp : flashes to indicate that the alarmsystem is armed.

i If the turn signal lamps do not flash threetimes and the acoustic warning does notsound three times, a door or the trunk maynot be properly closed.Close the respective element.

X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The turn signal lamps flash once and anacoustic warning sounds once to indicatethat the alarm system is disarmed.

Anti-theft systems 67

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 67

Z

i Unless you open a door or the trunk withinapproximately 40 seconds after unlockingthe vehicle:RThe vehicle will be locked again.RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.

Canceling the alarmTo cancel the alarm, do one of the following:X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.X Press button % or & on the

SmartKey.

In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Grasp an outside door handle.

The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) ofthe vehicle.

X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.

68 Anti-theft systemsSa

fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 68

Vehicle equipment .............................. 70Locking and unlocking ....................... 70Starter switch positions ..................... 77Seats .................................................... 79Multifunction steering wheel ............. 84Mirrors ................................................. 86Memory function ................................. 89Lighting ................................................ 90Wipers .................................................. 96Power windows ................................... 98Driving and parking .......................... 101Manual transmission ........................ 107Automatic transmission ................... 108Transfer case .................................... 116Instrument cluster ............................ 116Control system .................................. 118Audio system .................................... 136Driving systems ................................ 180Climate control system .................... 189Rear window defroster ..................... 196Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 196Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ...................................... 199Loading and storing .......................... 202Useful features ................................. 207

69

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 69

Vehicle equipment


Locking and unlocking

Notes

G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.When unlocking or locking the vehicle withthe SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. Theacoustic signal is activated at the factory. Ifyou wish to deactivate the feature, or adjustits signal volume, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signallamps flash once. An acoustic signal soundsonce, and the locking knobs in the doorsmove up. The anti-theft alarm system isdisarmed.When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lampsflash three times. An acoustic signal soundsthree times, and the locking knobs in thedoors move down. The anti-theft alarmsystem is armed.All doors and the trunk must be closed.If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle withthe SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKeyare discharged, the SmartKey ismalfunctioning, or the vehicle battery isdrained.X Check the batteries in the SmartKey

(Y page 73) and replace them ifnecessary.

X Use the mechanical key to unlock thedriver’s door and the trunk (Y page 309).

X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle(Y page 310).

X Have the vehicle battery and the vehiclebattery connections checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contactRoadside Assistance or an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

SmartKeyYour vehicle comes supplied with twoSmartKeys, each with remote control and aremovable mechanical key.The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocksRthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flap

: & Lock button; F Unlock button for trunk lid= % Unlock button




70 Locking and unlockingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 70






Factory setting X Global unlocking: Press button %.Unless you open a door or the trunk withinapproximately 40 seconds after unlockingthe vehicle:RThe vehicle will be locked again.RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.X Global locking: Press button &.

Selective setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wishto reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressingbutton % will then only unlock the driver’sdoor and the fuel filler flap.X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons% and & simultaneously forapproximately 6 seconds until the batterycheck lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.

The SmartKey will then function as follows:

X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap: Press button % once.

X Global unlocking: Press button %twice.

X Global locking: Press button &.

KEYLESS-GOVehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO comewith two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, eachwith remote control and a removablemechanical key.The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated intothe SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey ischecked every time you grasp an outside doorhandle.When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicleunlocksRthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flap





Locking and unlocking 71

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 71

Z





Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO RYou can also use the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey(Y page 70).RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions

with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and lockingwith button &).RAlways carry the SmartKey with you.RNever store the SmartKey together with

- electronic items such as a mobile phoneor another SmartKey

- metallic objects such as coins or metalfoil

Doing so could impair the function of theKEYLESS-GO system.RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey

must be located outside the vehicle withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or thetrunk.RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more

than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function isdeactivated. Pull an outside door handleand switch on the ignition once to activatethe KEYLESS-GO function.RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away

from the vehicle, the system may no longerrecognize the SmartKey. The vehicle

cannot be locked or the engine started viathe KEYLESS-GO system.RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle

(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle withthe SmartKey)- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/

stop button or trying to lock the vehiclewith the outside door handle themessage Key Not Detected appears inthe multifunction display

- with the engine running, the red messageKey Not Detected appears in themultifunction display while driving off

Find the SmartKey or change its presentlocation immediately (e.g. place it on thefront passenger seat or insert it in shirtpocket).RIf you have started the engine with the

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you canturn it off again bypressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop

button- inserting the SmartKey into the starter

switch when the vehicle is at a standstilland the automatic transmission is in parkposition P

RThe vehicle could be inadvertentlyunlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)of the vehicle andan outside door handle is splashed with

wateror

- you attempt to clean an outside doorhandle

RRemember that the engine can be startedby anyone with a SmartKey that is leftinside the vehicle.Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,one SmartKey outside the vehicle):If you leave the SmartKey behind whenexiting and locking the vehicle, no messageappears in the multifunction display.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 72

Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,no SmartKey outside the vehicle):When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,the message Key Detected in Vehicleappears in the multifunction display. Thevehicle will not be locked.

Factory setting X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door

handle.Unless you open a door or the trunk withinapproximately 40 seconds after unlockingthe vehicle:RThe vehicle will be locked again.RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.

X Global locking: Touch outside of a doorhandle :.

Selective setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wishto reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping thedriver’s outside door handle will then onlyunlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons% and & simultaneously forapproximately 6 seconds until the batterycheck lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.

KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:

X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap: Grasp the driver’s outside doorhandle.

X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside doorhandle other than the driver’s outside doorhandle.

X Global locking: Touch outside of a doorhandle :.

Checking SmartKey batteries

X Press button & or % on theSmartKey.Battery check lamp : comes on briefly toindicate that the SmartKey batteries are inorder.

If the battery check lamp does not come onbriefly during check, the SmartKey batteriesare discharged.X Replace the batteries (Y page 312).

i You can obtain the required batteries atany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If the batteries are checked within signalrange of the vehicle, pressing button& or % will lock or unlock the vehicleaccordingly.

Loss of the SmartKeyIf you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,you should do the following:


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 73

Z

X Have the SmartKey deactivated by anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Report the loss of the SmartKey or themechanical key to your car insurancecompany immediately.

X Have the mechanical lock replaced ifnecessary.

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will beglad to supply you with a replacement. Forinformation on replacing the SmartKey, see“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 74).

Replacing the SmartKeyOnly you, or someone authorized by you canorder a replacement key from any Mercedes-Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-Benz Center will require proof of identity andvehicle ownership with original documents,including the following:If you are the current owner of the vehicle:Rthe vehicle’s current state registrationRa current identity card, passport, or drivers

licenseIf you are an authorized person:Rthe vehicle’s current state registrationRa current identity card, passport, or drivers

license for the authorized individualRsigned and dated authorization from the

owner of the vehicle for which the key isbeing requested

i Duplicated or photocopieddocumentation will not be accepted.

Activating the keyOnce you, or an authorized person, hasprovided the appropriate documents, theMercedes-Benz Center will need tosynchronize the key to your vehicle before itcan be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes-Benz Center need access to your vehicle.

Opening the doors from the insideYou can open a door from the inside evenwhen it is locked unless it is secured with thechild safety lock (Y page 59).Open door only when conditions are safe todo so.

Example illustration driver’s door

If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, openinga door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 68).X Front doors: Pull on inside door

handle ; on the respective front door.If the door was locked, locking knob : willmove up.

X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on therespective rear door to unlock door.

X Pull on the inside door handle on therespective rear door.

Automatic central lockingThe doors and the trunk lock automaticallywhen the vehicle is set into motion.You can open a locked front door from theinside. Open door only when conditions aresafe to do so.The doors are designed to unlockautomatically after an accident if the force ofthe impact exceeds a preset threshold.The vehicle locks automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 74

turning at a vehicle speed of above 9 mph(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourselfout when the vehicle is pushed or towed or ison a test stand.

X Switching off: Press and hold centralunlocking switch : until an acoustic signalsounds.

X Switching on: Press and hold centrallocking switch ; until an acoustic signalsounds.

i If you press and hold either switch and noacoustic signal sounds, the respectivesetting has already been selected.

i You can also switch on or off theautomatic central locking using the controlsystem (Y page 135).

Locking and unlocking from the inside

G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.You can lock or unlock the vehicle from theinside using the central locking or unlockingswitch. This can be useful, for example, if youwant to lock the vehicle before starting todrive.The central locking or unlocking switch doesnot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.When the front passenger door is closed,the vehicle locks.

X Unlocking: Press central unlockingswitch :.

You can open a locked front door from theinside. Open door only when conditions aresafe to do so.If the vehicle was previously locked with thecentral locking switchRand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,

the complete vehicle is unlocked when afront door is opened from the insideRand the SmartKey is set to selective

settings, only the front door opened fromthe inside is unlocked

Opening the trunk

G Warning!Make sure the trunk is closed when the engineis running and while driving. Among otherdangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gasesmay enter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

! When you open the trunk, the trunk lidswings open upwards. Always make surethere is sufficient overhead clearance.

You can open the trunk when the vehicle isstationary.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 75

Z

A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.80 m)is required to open the trunk lid.

Opening the trunk from the outside

X Press and hold button F (Y page 70) onthe SmartKey until the trunk unlocks andbegins to open.

orX Pull on handle :.

In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Thevehicle must be unlocked.

If the trunk does not open, it is still lockedseparately (Y page 77).

Opening the trunk from the inside

X Press remote trunk opening switch : untilthe trunk begins to open.

If the trunk does not open, it is still lockedseparately (Y page 77).

Closing the trunk

G Warning!Make sure the trunk is closed when the engineis running and while driving. Among otherdangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gasesmay enter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

G Warning!To prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the trunkopening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound.

G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.You may lock yourself out.If the vehicle was previously locked centrallywith the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunklid will lock automatically when closed. Allturn signal lamps flash three times and anacoustic signal sounds three times to confirmlocking.

X Lower the trunk lid using handle : or ;.X Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on

trunk lid.

Trunk lid emergency releaseThe trunk lid can be opened from inside thetrunk with the emergency release button.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 76

X Briefly press emergency releasebutton :.

The emergency release button unlocks andopens the trunk while the vehicle is standingstill or in motion.Illumination of the emergency release button:RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after

opening the trunk.RThe button flashes for 60 minutes after

closing the trunk.The emergency release button does not openthe trunk, if the vehicle battery is dischargedor disconnected.

Valet lockingYou can lock the trunk separately with themechanical key. This denies unauthorizedaccess to the trunk, e.g. when you valet parkthe vehicle.X Leave only the SmartKey less its

mechanical key with the vehicle.

X Valet locking: Close the trunk.X Remove the mechanical key from the

SmartKey (Y page 309).X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid

lock.X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to

position 2 and remove the mechanicalkey in that position to lock the trunk.

The trunk remains locked even when thevehicle is centrally unlocked.You can then only open the trunk with themechanical key.X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in

the trunk lid lock.X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise

to neutral position 1 and remove themechanical key in that position to unlockthe trunk.You can now open the trunk.

Starter switch positions

SmartKey


Starter switchg For removing SmartKey

Vehicles with automatic transmission:Gear selector lever must be in parkposition P.

1 Power supply for some electricalconsumers, e.g. wipers

Starter switch positions 77

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 77

Z

2 Ignition (power supply for all electricalconsumers) and driving position

3 Starting position

When you switch on the ignition, all lamps inthe instrument cluster come on. The low-beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beamheadlamp indicator lamp, turn signalindicator lamps, and the indicator lamps forthe fog lamps will only come on if activated.If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails tocome on when the ignition is switched on,have it checked and replaced if necessary. Ifa lamp in the instrument cluster remains onafter starting the engine or comes on whiledriving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster”(Y page 297).If the SmartKey is left in starter switchposition 0 for an extended period of time, itcan no longer be turned in the starter switch.In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,remove SmartKey from the starter switch andreinsert.The steering is locked when the SmartKey isremoved from the starter switch.X Always remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch when the engine is not inoperation.This will help to prevent accelerated vehiclebattery discharge or a completelydischarged vehicle battery.

If the SmartKey cannot be turned in thestarter switch, the vehicle battery may not besufficiently charged.X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if

necessary (Y page 323).orX Get a jump start (Y page 323).

i If the SmartKey does not belong to thevehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in thestarter switch. However, the ignition doesnot switch on and the engine does not start.

KEYLESS-GO

G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GOfeature are supplied with a SmartKey withintegrated KEYLESS-GO function and aremovable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must beinserted in the starter switch and theSmartKey present in the vehicle.Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonwithout depressing the brake pedalcorresponds to the various starter switchpositions (Y page 77).Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonwith the brake pedal firmly depressed willstart the engine (Y page 101).The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can bepulled out of the starter switch easily. You canthen insert the SmartKey into the starterswitch.

i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button doesnot need to be removed from the starterswitch when you leave the vehicle.However, always take the SmartKey withyou when you leave the vehicle. As long asthe SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’selectrical systems can be switched on orthe engine can be started using theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button; Starter switch

78 Starter switch positionsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 78

X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttoninto the starter switch (if not insertedalready).

i Allow for 2 seconds until the system hasdetected the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton.

X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shiftthe manual transmission into the neutralposition (no gear selected).

orX Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift

the automatic transmission into neutralposition N.

X Do not depress the brake pedal.

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button= USA only? Canada only

Position 0Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton, the vehicle’s on-board electronicshave status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).

Position 1X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

once.This supplies power for some electricalconsumers, e.g. wipers.

i When you now open the driver’s door, thepower supply is switched off.

Ignition (or position 2) X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

twice.This supplies power for all electricalconsumers.When you switch on the ignition, all lampsin the instrument cluster come on. The low-beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beamheadlamp indicator lamp, turn signalindicator lamps, and the indicator lamps forthe fog lamps will only come on if activated.If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails tocome on when the ignition is switched on,have it checked and replaced if necessary.If a lamp in the instrument cluster remainson after starting the engine or comes onwhile driving, refer to “Lamps in instrumentcluster” (Y page 297).

i When you now press the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button once and the driver’sdoor is open, the power supply is switchedoff.

Seats

Safety notes

G Warning!In order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol the following must be done before thevehicle is put into motion:Rseat adjustmentRhead restraint adjustmentRsteering wheel adjustmentRrear view mirror adjustmentRfastening of seat belts

G Warning!Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.Adjusting the seat while driving could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle.Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position as

Seats 79

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 79

Z

this can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seatbelts provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and seat belts are properlypositioned on the body.

G Warning!Your seat must be adjusted so that you cancorrectly fasten your seat belt.Observe the following points:RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are

slightly angled when holding the steeringwheel.RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely. Theposition should be as far back as possiblewith the driver still able to operate thecontrols properly.RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible. The center ofthe head restraint must support the back ofthe head at eye level.RNever place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while a seat is beingadjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G Warning!The power seats can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

G Warning!According to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seating

position. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child. For additionalinformation, see “Children in the vehicle”.A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

G Warning!For your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

Seat adjustment! When moving the seats, make sure there

are no items in the footwell or behind theseats. Otherwise, you could damage theseats and/or the items.

Semi-electrical seat adjustmentThis seat adjustment is only available onC 63 AMG.

80 SeatsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 80

i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seatwith an integrated head restraint. It istherefore not possible to set the height andangle of the head restraint.

X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switchforward or backward in direction ofarrow :.

X Seat height: Press the switch up or downin direction of arrow ;.

X Seat cushion tilt: Turn handwheel =forward or backward until your upper legsare lightly supported.

X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Lifthandle ?.

X Slide the seat to the desired position.X Allow handle ? to reengage with an

audible click.X Check for proper engagement before

driving.

Power seats The seat adjustment switch is located on theentry side of each front seat base. The seatadjustment switches for vehicles withmemory function are located on the frontdoors.

i Vehicles without memory function:

The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutesafter either front door has been opened.The counter resets each timeRyou open or close a front doorRyou insert the SmartKey into the starter

switchRyou remove the SmartKey from the

starter switchRyou switch the ignition on or offJust like in vehicles with memory function,the power seats can be operated at anytime when the ignition is switched on.

i Vehicles with memory function:The memory function (Y page 89) lets youstore the settings for the seat positiontogether with the settings for the steeringwheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.

Vehicles without memory function

i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seatwith an integrated head restraint. It istherefore not possible to set the height andangle of the head restraint.

Seats 81

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 81

Z

Vehicles with memory function

X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press theswitch forward or backward in direction ofarrow =.

X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switchforward or backward in direction ofarrow ?.

X Seat height: Press the switch up or downin direction of arrow ;.

X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up ordown in direction of arrow : until yourupper legs are lightly supported.

X Head restraint height (vehicles with memory function): Press the switch up ordown in direction of arrow A.

Head restraint height adjustment, manual This feature is only available in vehicleswithout memory function.

X Raising: Adjust the height of the headrestraint by pulling it upward.

X Lowering: Press release button : andpush down on the head restraint.

Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

X Push or pull on the lower edge of the headrestraint cushion to the desired position.

Lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seat’slumbar support to help enhance support toyour spine.

X Move adjustment lever : in direction ofthe arrows until you have reached acomfortable seating position.

Seat with adaptive backrestThis feature is only available on C 63 AMG.

82 SeatsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 82

The contour of the front seat backrests canbe individually adjusted to provide optimumsupport for your back.

X Switch on the ignition.X Upper back support: Use button : to

adjust the upper back support to thedesired position.

X Lumbar region support: Use button ; toadjust the lumbar region support to thedesired position.

X Lateral support: Use button = to adjustthe lateral support to the desired position.

i If, after a period of time, the seat no longerprovides the desired contour, then repeatthe adjustment procedure.

Rear seat head restraints

G Warning!For your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint in such a way that itis as close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports the backof the head at eye level. This will reduce thepotential for injury to the head and neck in theevent of an accident or similar situation.With a rear seat occupied, make sure to movethe respective head restraint up from thelowest non-use position and have theoccupant adjust the head restraint properly.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints installed when the rear seats areoccupied. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

Rear seat head restraint height adjustment

X Raising: Pull head restraint upward to thedesired position.

X Lowering: Press release button : andpush down on head restraint.

Rear seat head restraint fore and aft adjustment

X Adjust the head restraint to the desiredposition by pushing or pulling on the loweredge of the head restraint cushion.

Seats 83

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 83

Z

Rear seat head restraints, removing and installing (vehicles with split foldable rear seat backrest)i The rear seat head restraints cannot be

removed on vehicles which do not have thesplit foldable rear seat backrest.

X Removing: Unlock the rear seat backrest(Y page 204) and fold it slightly forward.

X Pull head restraint to its highest position.X Press release button : and pull out head

restraint.X Installing: Position the head restraints so

that the notches on the rod are on the leftwhen looking in the direction of travel.

X Insert head restraint and push it down untilit engages.

X Fold the rear seat backrest back until itengages.

Seat heating

The red indicator lamps in seat heatingswitch : come on to show which heatinglevel you have selected.The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.The seat heating switches from level 2 to level1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, theseat heating switches off automatically.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press seat heating

switch :.Three red indicator lamps in seat heatingswitch : come on.

X Press seat heating switch : repeatedlyuntil the desired seat heating level is set.

X Switching off: Press seat heatingswitch : repeatedly until all indicatorlamps go out.

If there is insufficient voltage the seat heatingswitches off automatically.The seat heating will switch back on againautomatically as soon as sufficient voltage isavailable.

Multifunction steering wheel

Safety notes

G Warning!Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, ordriving without the steering wheel adjustmentfeature locked could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.The electrical steering wheel adjustmentfeature can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

84 Multifunction steering wheelCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 84

Make sureRyou can reach the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent at the elbowsRyou can move your legs freelyRall displays (including malfunction and

indicator lamps) on the instrument clusterare clearly visible

Steering wheel adjustment, manual

: Release handle; Adjusting steering wheel, up or down= Adjusting steering wheel, in or out

X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out toits stop limit.

X Move steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Locking: Push release handle : all theway up until it engages.

X Make sure the steering wheel is securelylocked by trying to move it up and down aswell as in and out before driving off.

Steering wheel adjustment, electrical

X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:Move stalk in direction of arrows :.

X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Movestalk in direction of arrows ;.

i The memory function (Y page 89) letsyou store the settings for the steeringwheel together with the settings for theseat position and the exterior rear viewmirrors.

Easy-entry/exit featureThis feature allows the driver an easier entryinto and exit from the vehicle. When enteringand exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel isin its uppermost position.The easy-entry/exit feature can be activatedor deactivated in the Convenience submenuof the control system (Y page 135).

G Warning!You must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment stalk or press oneof the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver’s door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit

Multifunction steering wheel 85

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 85

Z

feature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,the steering wheel will return to its last setposition when you close the driver’s door withthe ignition switched on. The steering wheelwill also return to its last set position whenyou insert the SmartKey into the starterswitch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton once with the driver’s door closed.

i The last set steering wheel position isstored when the ignition is switched off orthe position is stored in memory(Y page 89).

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,the steering wheel tilts upwards when youremove the SmartKey from the starter switch.The steering wheel also tilts upwards whenyou open the driver’s door with the SmartKeyin starter switch position 0 or 1 or theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.

i When the current position for the steeringwheel is in the uppermost tilt position, thesteering wheel will no longer be able tomove upward when the easy-entry/exitfeature is activated.The adjustment procedure is brieflyinterrupted when the engine is started.

G Warning!Let the system complete the adjustmentprocedure before setting the vehicle inmotion. All steering wheel adjustment mustbe completed before setting the vehicle inmotion. Driving off with the steering wheelstill adjusting could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

Crash-responsive exit aidWhen you open the driver’s door after anaccident has occurred, the steering columnmoves up. The position of the SmartKey in thestarter switch is insignificant. This functionfacilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicleoccupants.

The crash-responsive exit aid can only betriggered when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated via the control system.

Mirrors

NotesAdjust the interior and exterior rear viewmirrors before driving so that you have a goodview of the road and traffic conditions.

Interior rear view mirrorX Adjust the interior rear view mirror

manually.

Interior rear view mirror, antiglare position

X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position bymoving lever : towards the windshield.The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.

Exterior rear view mirrors

G Warning!Exercise care when using the passenger-sideexterior rear view mirror. The mirror surfaceis convex (outwardly curved surface for awider field of view). Objects in mirror arecloser than they appear. Check your interiorrear view mirror and glance over yourshoulder before changing lanes.

86 MirrorsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 86

X Switch on the ignition.X Press button : for the driver’s side

exterior rear view mirror or button ; forthe passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror.The indicator lamp in the respective buttoncomes on.If you do not make adjustments to theselected exterior rear view mirror within15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.You will then have to select the desiredexterior rear view mirror again beforeadjustments can be made. Adjustmentscan only be made with the indicator lampfor the respective exterior rear view mirrorbutton illuminated.

X Press adjustment button = up, down, leftor right according to the desired setting.

! If an exterior rear view mirror was forciblyhit from the front, manually snap it backinto place.

i At low ambient temperatures, the exteriorrear view mirrors will be heatedautomatically.

Auto-dimming rear view mirrorsThe exterior rear view mirror on the driver’sside and the interior rear view mirror willrespond automatically to glare when theignition is switched on and incoming lightfrom headlamps falls on the sensor in theinterior rear view mirror.

The rear view mirrors will not react if theautomatic transmission is set to reverse gearR (manual transmission to reverse gear) orthe interior lighting is switched on.

G Warning!The auto dimming function does not react ifincoming light is not aimed directly at sensorsin the interior rear view mirror.The interior rear view mirror and the exteriorrear view mirror on the driver’s side do notreact, for example, if the rear windowsunshade is in raised position.Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles(incident light) could blind you. As a result,you may not be able to observe trafficconditions and could cause an accident.

Exterior rear view mirror parking position

To assist during parking maneuvers, you canset the passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror so that you can see the rear wheel andthe road curb.

Setting and storing the parking position

X Switch on the ignition.X Press button ;, to select the passenger-

side exterior rear view mirror.

Mirrors 87

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 87

Z

X Shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R (manual transmission toreverse gear).The passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror moves to the preset parkingposition.

X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rearview mirror with adjustment button = sothat you see the rear wheel and the roadcurb.The exterior rear view mirror parkingposition is stored.

Vehicles with memory function: You can alsostore the parking position using the memorybutton M ?:X Switch on the ignition.X Press button ;, to select the passenger-

side exterior rear view mirror.X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear

view mirror with adjustment button = sothat you see the rear wheel and the roadcurb.

X Press memory button M ? and within3 seconds, press one of the arrows ofadjustment button =.The parking position is stored if the exteriorrear view mirror does not move.

i If the exterior rear view mirror does move,repeat the above steps. After the setting isstored, you can move the exterior rear viewmirror again.

Calling up the parking positionX Switch on the ignition.X Press button ;, to select the passenger-

side exterior rear view mirror.X Shift the automatic transmission into

reverse gear R (manual transmission toreverse gear).The passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror moves to the stored parkingposition.

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirrorreturns to its previously stored drivingpositionR10 seconds after you have put the gear

selector lever out of reverse gear R (manualtransmission out of reverse)Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a

speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)Rimmediately when you press button : to

select the driver’s side exterior rear viewmirror

Power-folding exterior rear view mirrors

This feature is only available in Canadavehicles.

! Before you drive the vehicle through anautomatic car wash, fold in the exterior rearview mirrors. Otherwise they may getdamaged.

Folding in and out automatically The function must be activated in theConvenience submenu (Y page 136).The exterior rear view mirrors fold inautomatically as soon as the vehicle is lockedfrom the outside.The exterior rear view mirrors fold outautomatically as soon as the vehicle isunlocked and the driver’s or front passengerdoor is subsequently opened.

Resetting the automatic exterior rear view mirror fold-in functionYou need to reset the automatic exterior rearview mirror fold-in function whenever thebattery was disconnected or discharged.

88 MirrorsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 88

X Switch on the ignition.X Briefly press button :.

i You need to manually fold in the mirrorsonce, so that the automatic fold-in functionwill work, see “Setting fold-in function forexterior rear view mirrors” (Y page 136).

Folding in and out manuallyThe exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate ifthey are not folded out completely.X Switch on the ignition.X Folding in: Briefly press button :.

Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.

i At speeds above approximately 9 mph(15 km/h), you will not be able to fold theexterior mirrors in.

X Folding out: Briefly press button :.Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.

! If an exterior rear view mirror housing isforcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear),reposition it manually by applying firmpressure until it snaps back into place.If an exterior rear view mirror housing isforcibly pushed rearward (hit from thefront), press button : to fold mirrors in.Then press button : again to fold mirrorsout. Do not force mirrors by hand as thismay damage the adjustment mechanism.The mirror housing is then properlypositioned and you can adjust the mirror inthe usual manner.

Memory function

NotesWith the memory function you can store upto three different configurations per frontseat.Each memory position button on the driver’sside can store all of the following settings:RSeat positionRSteering wheel positionRExterior rear view mirrors’ position

G Warning!Do not activate the memory function whiledriving. Activating the memory function whiledriving could cause the driver to lose controlof the vehicle.

Each memory position button on the frontpassenger side can store the setting of theseat position.

Storing positions into memoryX Adjust the seats.X On the driver’s side, also adjust the

steering wheel and exterior rear viewmirrors to the desired positions.

X Press memory button M once and within3 seconds press memory position button1, 2 or 3.When the settings are stored to theselected position, an acknowledgementsignal sounds.

Memory function 89

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 89

Z

Recalling positions from memoryX Press and hold desired memory position

button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has movedto the stored position completely. On thedriver’s side, also wait for the steeringwheel and exterior rear view mirrors tomove to the stored position.

i Releasing the memory position buttonstops movement to the stored positionsimmediately.

Lighting

Notesi If you drive in countries with left-hand

driving, you must have the headlampsmodified for symmetrical low beams.Relevant information can be obtained atany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenonheadlamps:The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increaseusable illumination over conventionalheadlamps because they follow thecurvature of the road ahead. The beams ofthe active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift toeither side according to the vehicle’ssteering angle and speed.

Exterior lamp switch

1 W Standing lamps, left2 X Standing lamps, right3 $ Off

Daytime running lamp mode4 c Automatic headlamp mode

Daytime running lamp mode5 T Parking lamps (also tail lamps,

license plate lamps, side markerlamps and instrument panel lamps)

6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beamheadlamps

7 N Front fog lamps8 R Rear fog lamp

i The exterior lamps (except standinglamps or parking lamps) go outautomatically when you remove theSmartKey from the starter switch or openthe driver’s door with the ignition switchedoff.When the parking lamps or the rear foglamp are switched on and you remove theSmartKey from the starter switch and openthe driver’s door, an acoustic signalsounds.In addition the message Switch Off Lights appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Switch off the parking lamps or the rear foglamp manually.

90 LightingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 90

! Failure to switch off the parking lampswhen leaving the vehicle may result in adischarged battery.

Low-beam headlamps The low-beam headlamps can be switched onand off with the exterior lamp switch.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp

switch to position L.The following lamps come on:RLow-beam headlampsRTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsRInstrument panel lampsRGreen indicator lamp L in the

instrument clusterX Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp

switch to position $.

Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps come on and go outautomatically depending on the brightness ofthe ambient light:RLow-beam headlampsRTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lamps

G Warning!If the exterior lamp switch is set to c, theheadlamps will not automatically come onunder foggy conditions.To minimize risk to you and to others, activateheadlamps by turning exterior lamp switch toL when driving or when traffic and/or

ambient lighting conditions require you to doso.In low ambient lighting conditions, only switchfrom position c to L with the vehicleat a standstill in a safe location. Switchingfrom c to L will briefly switch off theheadlamps. Doing so while driving in lowambient lighting conditions may result in anaccident.The automatic headlamp feature is only an aidto the driver. The driver is responsible for theoperation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.

X Switching on: Turn the exterior lampswitch to position c.

The following lamps come on and go outdepending on the brightness of the ambientlight with the SmartKey in starter switchposition 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton pressed once:RTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsWhen the engine is running, the low-beamheadlamps will also come on and turn offautomatically.Canada only: High-beam headlamps are onlyavailable in low ambient lighting conditions.

Daytime running lamp mode In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode ismandatory and therefore in a constant mode.In the USA, the daytime running lamp modeis deactivated by default.X Activate the daytime running lamp mode

using the control system, see “Switchingdaytime running lamp mode on or off (USAonly)” (Y page 133).

X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position$ or c.When the engine is running, the low-beamheadlamps come on.

Lighting 91

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 91

Z

In low ambient lighting conditions, thefollowing lamps will come on additionally:RTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lamps

With the daytime running lamp modeactivated and the engine running, you cannotswitch off the low-beam headlamps manually.

Canada onlyYou can only switch on the high-beamheadlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.The high-beam flasher is available at all times.When the engine is running, and youRshift from a driving position to park

position P with the vehicle at a standstill(vehicles with automatic transmission) orthe parking brake is engaged, the low-beamheadlamps will go out with a delay of3 minutesRturn the exterior lamp switch to positionT, the low-beam headlamps, the tailand parking lamps, the license plate lampsand the side marker lamps come onRturn the exterior lamp switch to positionL, the manual headlamp mode haspriority over the daytime running lampmodeThe corresponding exterior lamps come on(Y page 90).

USA onlyYou can only switch on the high-beamheadlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.The high-beam flasher is available at all times.When the engine is running, and you turn theexterior lamp switch to position T orL, the manual headlamp mode haspriority over the daytime running lamp mode.The corresponding exterior lamps come on(Y page 90).

Fog lamps Fog lamps cannot be switched on with theexterior lamp switch in position c.

G Warning!In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,only switch from position c to L withthe vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.Switching from c to L will brieflyswitch off the headlamps. Doing so whiledriving in low ambient lighting conditions mayresult in an accident.

Fog lamps will operate with the parking lampsand/or the low-beam headlamps on. Foglamps should only be used in conjunction withlow-beam headlamps. Consult your State orProvince Motor Vehicle Regulationsregarding permissible lamp operation.X Switch on the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionT or L (Y page 90).

X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out theexterior lamp switch to first stop.The green indicator lamp N in theinstrument cluster comes on.

X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out theexterior lamp switch to second stop.The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, thegreen N and the yellow indicator lampR in the instrument cluster come on.

X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch toits stop.

Locator lightingThe locator lighting is described in the“Control system” section, see “Switchinglocator lighting on or off” (Y page 134).

92 LightingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 92

Combination switch

Turn signals X Press the combination switch in direction

of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal indicatorlamp ! or # in the instrumentcluster flashes.

The combination switch resets automaticallyafter major steering wheel movements.To signal minor directional changes:X Press the combination switch only to the

point of resistance in direction ofarrow ; or ? and release.The corresponding turn signal lamps willflash three times.

High beam X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionL (Y page 90).

X Switching on: Push the combinationswitch in direction of arrow :.The high-beam headlamp indicator lampK in the instrument cluster comes on.

X Switching off: Pull the combination switchin direction of arrow = to its originalposition.

i Also note the information on high-beamheadlamps with activated automaticheadlamp mode (Y page 91) or the daytimerunning lamp mode (Y page 91).

High-beam flasher X Switching on: Pull the combination switch

briefly in direction of arrow =.

Hazard warning flasherThe hazard warning flasher can be switchedon at all times, even with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch.The hazard warning flasher comes onautomatically when an air bag deploys.

X Switching on: Press hazard warningflasher switch :.All turn signal lamps are flashing.

i With the hazard warning flasher activatedand the combination switch set for eitherleft or right turn, only the respective left orright turn signals will operate when theignition is switched on.

X Switching off: Press hazard warningflasher switch : again.

i If the hazard warning flasher has beenactivated automatically, press hazardwarning flasher switch : to switch it off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps will be cleaned with a high-pressure water jet automatically when theengine is running and you haveRswitched on the headlamps

Lighting 93

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 93

Z

andRthe windshield wipers have wiped the

windshield with washer fluid for the firsttime

The headlamps are cleaned every tenth timethe windshield is washed with washer fluid.The counter resets when you switch off theignition.For information on filling up the washerreservoir, see “Washer system and headlampcleaning system” (Y page 228).

Corner-illuminating front fog lampsThe corner-illuminating front fog lampsimprove illumination of the area in thedirection into which you are turning.The corner-illuminating front fog lamps willonly operateRin low ambient lighting conditionsRat vehicle speeds below 25 mph

(40 km/h)Rwith the front fog lamps switched offRwhen the engine is running

Switching onX Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionL or c.

orX Activate the daytime running lamp mode

(Y page 91).X Switch on the left or right turn signal,

depending on whether you are turning leftor right.The respective front fog lamp comes on. Ifyou have switched on the turn signal forone side but turn the steering wheel in theother direction, the corner-illuminating

front fog lamp on the side of the turn signalcomes on.

orX Turn the steering wheel in the desired

direction.Driving forward: The front fog lamp on theside of your steering direction comes on.Driving in reverse: The front fog lampopposite to your steering direction comeson.

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps willcome on automatically depending on thesteering angle, even if you did not switch oneither turn signal. If the corner-illuminatingfront fog lamps came on automatically, theywill also go out automatically depending onthe steering angle and vehicle speed.The corner-illuminating front fog lampstemporarily come on on both sides of thevehicle if you turn the steering wheel in onedirection and then again in the other directionshortly thereafter.The corner-illuminating front fog lampremains lit for a short time only. It then goesout automatically.

Switching off

X Switch off the left or right turn signal.orX Steer straight ahead.

i There may be a brief delay before thecorner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.

94 LightingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 94

Interior lighting in the front

: v Rear interior lighting on/off; ~ Automatic control on/off= p Right front reading lamp on/off? c Front interior lighting on/off A p Left front reading lamp on/offB Front reading lamps C Front interior lighting

Automatic control X Activating: Press button ~.

Button ~ disengages and sits flush withthe other buttons.The interior lighting comes on, when youRunlock the vehicleRremove the SmartKey from the starter

switch (Interior Lighting Delay:must be switched on (Y page 135))Ropen a door

i If a door remains open, the interior lampsgo out automatically after approximately5 minutes.

X Deactivating: Press button ~.Button ~ engages.

Manual control ! An interior lamp switched on manually

does not go out automatically.Leaving an interior lamp switched on for anextended period of time with the engineturned off could result in a dischargedbattery.

X Switching front interior lighting on/off: Press switch c.

X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:Press switch v.

X Switching front reading lamps on/off:Press respective button p.

Emergency lighting When the interior lighting is set to automaticmode, the interior lighting comes onautomatically if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.Switching off: X Press hazard warning flasher switch

(Y page 93).orX Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

Interior lighting in the rear! An interior lamp switched on manually

does not go out automatically.Leaving an interior lamp switched on for anextended period of time with the engineturned off could result in a dischargedbattery.

Lighting 95

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 95

Z

: p Right rear reading lamp on/off; p Left rear reading lamp on/off= Left reading lamp? Rear interior lampA Right reading lamp

X Switching rear reading lamps on/off:Press respective reading lamp switchp.

Wipers

Notes! Do not operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates ona windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wipingoccurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessaryto operate the wipers in dry weatherconditions, always operate the wipers withwasher fluid.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the car has been driventhrough an automatic car wash, then waxor other residue is on the windshield.Shortly after washing the car in anautomatic car wash, clean the windshieldwith washer fluid.

Windshield wipersX Observe notes on page (Y page 96).

Switching on/off

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wipers off2Ä Slow intermittent wiping5

3Å Fast intermittent wiping6

4 ° Slow continuous wiping5 ¯ Fast continuous wipingB í Single wipe/ î Wiping with

washer fluid

X Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the desired

position, depending on the intensity of therain.

i When the windshield wipers are switchedon and you stop the vehicle, the wipersoperate more slowly.

Intermittent wiping Only switch on intermittent wiping under wetweather conditions or in the presence ofprecipitation.

! Vehicles with rain sensor: Do not leavewindshield wipers on an intermittentsetting when the vehicle is taken to anautomatic car wash or during windshieldcleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in

5 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.6 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.

96 WipersCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 96

the presence of water sprayed on thewindshield, and windshield wipers may bedamaged as a result.

! Vehicles with rain sensor: If you have setintermittent wiping, dirt on the surface ofthe rain sensor or optical effects may causethe windshield wipers to wipe in anundesired fashion. This could then damagethe windshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield. You should therefore switch offthe windshield wipers when weatherconditions are dry.

Vehicles with rain sensor: Intermittent wipinginterval is dependent on the wetness of thewindshield. After the initial wipe, pausesbetween wipes are controlled by the rainsensor automatically.X Turn the combination switch to positionÄ or Å.Intermittent wiping starts with selectedwiping interval.

Intermittent wiping is interrupted when thevehicle is at a standstill and a front door isopened. This protects persons getting into orout of the vehicle from being sprayed.Intermittent wiping will be continued when alldoors are closed andRthe clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with

manual transmission)orRthe automatic transmission is in drive

position D or reverse gear R (vehicles withautomatic transmission)orRthe wiper setting is changed using the

combination switch

Single wipeX Press the combination switch briefly in

direction of arrow B to the resistancepoint.The windshield wipers wipe one timewithout washer fluid.

Wiping with washer fluidX Press the combination switch in direction

of arrow B past the resistance point.The windshield wipers operate with washerfluid.

i To prevent smears on the windshield ornoisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe withwasher fluid every now and then even whenit is raining.

For information on filling up the washerreservoir, see “Washer system and headlampcleaning system” (Y page 228).For information on cleaning the headlampswith washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaningsystem” (Y page 93).

Problems with wipers! If anything blocks the windshield wipers

(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them offimmediately.For safety reasons, do the following beforeattempting to remove any blockage:RStop the vehicle in a safe location.RRemove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.orRTurn off the engine by pressing the

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button andopen the driver’s door (with the driver’sdoor open, starter switch is in position0, same as with SmartKey removed fromstarter switch).REngage the parking brake.RRemove blockage.RTurn the windshield wipers on again.

Wipers 97

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 97

Z

If the windshield wipers fail to function atall with the combination switch in positionÄ or Å,Rset the combination switch to the next

higher wiper speedRhave the windshield wipers checked at

the nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter

Power windows

Opening and closingThe door windows are opened and closedelectrically. The switches for all door windowsare located on the driver’s door control panel.The switches for the respective door windowsare located on the front passenger door andon the rear doors.

i Operating the rear door windows fromthe rear is not possible when you activatethe override switch (Y page 59).


G Warning!When opening or closing the door windows,make sure there is no danger of anyone beingharmed by the opening/closing procedure.The door windows are equipped with theexpress operation and automatic reversalfunction. If in express operation mode a doorwindow encounters an obstruction thatblocks its path, the automatic reversalfunction will stop the door window and openit slightly.The door windows operate differently whenthe switch is pulled and held. See the “Closingwhen a door window is blocked” section inthis chapter for details.The closing of the door windows can beimmediately halted by releasing the switch or,if the switch was pulled past the resistancepoint and released, by either pressing orpulling the respective switch.

If a door window encounters an obstructionthat blocks its path in a circumstance whereyou are closing the door windows by pressingand holding button & on the SmartKey orby pressing and holding the sensor surface(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outsidedoor handle, the automatic reversal functionwill not operate.Activate the override switch when childrenare riding in the back seats of the vehicle. Thechildren may otherwise injure themselves,e.g. by becoming trapped in the door windowopening.

G Warning!Do not keep any part of your body up againstthe window pane when opening a window. Thedownward motion of the pane may pull thatpart of your body down between the windowpane and the door frame and trap it there. Ifthere is a risk of entrapment, release theswitch and pull it to close the window.

i You can also open or close the doorwindows using the SmartKey, see“Summer opening feature” (Y page 99)and “Convenience closing feature”(Y page 100).

i After switching off the ignition orremoving the SmartKey from the starterswitch, you can operate the door windowsuntil you open the driver’s or frontpassenger door. If no door was opened youcan operate the door windows for up to5 minutes.

98 Power windowsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 98

X Switch on the ignition.X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold

switch : to ? to the resistance point.The corresponding door window movesdownward or upward until you release theswitch.

X Express operation: Press or pullswitch : to ? past the resistance pointand release.The corresponding door window opens orcloses completely.

X Stopping during express operation:Press or pull the respective switch again.

Closing when a door window is blocked

G Warning!Make sure that nobody can become trappedand be seriously or even fatally injured whenclosing a door window with greater force orwithout automatic reversal function.

If the upward movement of a door window isblocked during the closing procedure, thedoor window will stop and open slightly.X Immediately after the door window has

stopped because it was blocked, pull andhold the respective switch upward until thedoor window is fully closed.The door window closes with greater force.

If the door window is blocked again and opensslightly:X Immediately after the door window was

blocked, pull and hold the respectiveswitch upward until the door window is fullyclosed.The door window closes without automaticreversal function.

G Warning!Pulling and holding the switch to close thedoor window immediately after it had beenblocked two times will cause the door windowto close without any reversal function for aslong as you hold the switch.

Synchronizing door windowsThe door windows must be synchronized ifthey cannot be fully closed (expressoperation).Each door window must be synchronizedseparately.X Close all doors.X Switch on the ignition.X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?

(Y page 98) until the respective doorwindow is closed.The door window opens again slightly.

X Pull and hold the respective switch oncemore immediately until the door window isclosed completely.

X Hold the respective switch forapproximately 1 second.The door window is synchronized.

Summer opening featureWhen the weather is warm, you can ventilatethe vehicle before driving off bysimultaneouslyRopening the door windowsRopening the tilt/sliding sunroofRopening the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel and roller sunblindsThe summer opening feature can only beactivated via the remote control of theSmartKey. The SmartKey must be in closeproximity to the driver’s outside door handle.X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at

the driver’s outside door handle.

Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroofX Press and hold button % on the

SmartKey until the door windows and the

Power windows 99

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 99

Z

tilt/sliding sunroof have reached thedesired position.The vehicle unlocks.

X Release button % on the SmartKey tointerrupt the opening procedure.

Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelWhen roller sunblinds are extended:X Press and hold button % on the

SmartKey.The vehicle unlocks.The door windows open and the rollersunblinds begin to retract afterapproximately 1 second.

X With the door windows opened and theroller sunblinds fully retracted, press andhold button % on the SmartKey again.The tilt/sliding panel opens.


When roller sunblinds are retracted:X Press and hold button % on the

SmartKey.The door windows and the tilt/sliding panelopens after approximately 1 second.


Convenience closing featureWhen locking the vehicle, you cansimultaneously closeRthe door windowsRthe tilt/sliding sunroofRthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panelAfterward, you can extend the rollersunblinds of the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel.

G Warning!When closing the door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, make sure there is nodanger of anyone being harmed by the closingprocedure.If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:RRelease button & to stop the closing

procedure. To open, press and hold button%. To continue the closing procedureafter making sure that there is no danger ofanyone being harmed by the closingprocedure, press and hold button &.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:RRelease the sensor surface on the outside

door handle to stop the closing procedure.RImmediately pull on the same outside door

handle and hold firmly. The door windowsand the tilt/sliding sunroof or panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel will openfor as long as the door handle is held butthe door not opened.

With SmartKeyThe SmartKey must be in close proximity tothe driver’s outside door handle.X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the

driver’s outside door handle.X Press and hold button & on the

SmartKey until the door windows and thetilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closedcompletely.

X Release button & on the SmartKey tointerrupt the closing procedure.

X Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: Press and holdbutton & on the SmartKey once more.The roller sunblinds extend.

X Release button & on the SmartKey tointerrupt the extending procedure.

100 Power windowsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 100

With KEYLESS-GOThe SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must belocated outside the vehicle withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.X Close all doors.X Touch and hold the sensor surface on an

outside door handle (Y page 71) until thedoor windows and the tilt/sliding sunroofor panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are closed completely.

i Make sure you are only touching thesensor surface.

X Release the sensor surface to interrupt theclosing procedure.

X Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: Touch and holdthe sensor surface once more.The roller sunblinds extend.

X Release the sensor surface to interrupt theextending procedure.

Driving and parking

Safety notes

G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure the pedalsstill have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or braking maneuversthe objects could get caught between orunder the pedals. You could then no longerbrake or accelerate. This could lead toaccidents and injury.

G Warning!With the engine not running, there is no powerassistance for the brake and steeringsystems. In this case, it is important to keepin mind that a considerably higher degree of

effort is necessary to brake and steer thevehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

Starting the engine

G Warning!Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

Manual transmission

Gearshift pattern for manual transmissionk Reverse gear1 to 6 Forward gears

For more information, see “Manualtransmission” (Y page 107).X Depress the brake pedal.X Make sure the manual transmission is in

the neutral position (no gear selected).X Fully depress the clutch pedal.

Otherwise the engine cannot be starteddue to the integrated safety interlock.

Driving and parking 101

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 101

Z

Automatic transmission

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmissionj Park position with gear selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutral positionh Drive position

For more information, see “Automatictransmission” (Y page 108).X Make sure the automatic transmission is in

park position P.

With SmartKey X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 3 (Y page 77) and release it.The engine starts automatically.

With KEYLESS-GO

G Warning!As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, thevehicle can be started. Therefore, never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, as theycould otherwise accidentally start the engine.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Donot leave children unattended in the vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild’s unsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

You can start your vehicle without theSmartKey in the starter switch using theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button.The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button: USA only; Canada only

X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton is inserted in the starter switch(Y page 78).

i To start the engine with the SmartKeyinstead of the KEYLESS-GO function,remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonfrom the starter switch. Proceed asdescribed in “With SmartKey”(Y page 102).

X Depress the brake pedal during the startingprocedure.

X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

once.The engine starts automatically.

Starting difficulties ! Remember that extended starting

attempts can drain the battery.

The engine does not start. You can hear the starter.There could be a malfunction in the engineelectronics or in the fuel supply system.

102 Driving and parkingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 102

Carry out the following steps:X If you are starting the engine with the

SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 0 and repeat the startingprocedure.

X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that may be open toallow for better detection of the SmartKey.

orX Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop

button from the starter switch.X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio

signals from another source may beinterfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.

X Repeat the starting procedure.

If the engine does not start after severalstarting attempts:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center or call Roadside Assistance.

The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter.The battery may not be charged sufficiently.X Get a jump start (Y page 323).

If the engine will not start despite a jumpstart:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center or call Roadside Assistance.The starter has been exposed to excessivetemperatures.X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.X Repeat the starting procedure.

If the engine does not start after severalstarting attempts:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz


Driving off

G Warning!On slippery road surfaces, never downshift inorder to obtain braking action. This couldresult in drive wheel slip and reduced vehiclecontrol. Your vehicle’s ABS will not preventthis type of loss of control.

! Do not run a cold engine at high enginespeeds. Running a cold engine at highengine speeds may shorten the service lifeof the engine. This is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.C 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speedis restricted in order to protect it fromdamage. Avoid driving your vehicle at fullspeed when the engine is cold to preventpremature engine wear and/or diminishedcomfort.

! If an acoustic warning sounds and themessage Release Parking Brakeappears in the multifunction display whendriving off, you have forgotten to releasethe parking brake.Release the parking brake.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This maycause serious damage to the drivetrainwhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

! Simultaneously depressing theaccelerator pedal and applying the brakesreduces engine performance and causespremature brake and drivetrain wear whichis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

i Once the vehicle is in motion, theautomatic central locking function engagesand the locking knobs in the doors movedown.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 103

Z

The automatic central locking function canbe switched off (Y page 135).

Manual transmissionX Depress the brake pedal.X Fully depress the clutch pedal.

! Only shift the manual transmission intoreverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped.Otherwise the manual transmission couldbe damaged.

X Shift the manual transmission into 1st gearor reverse gear R.

X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Release the brake pedal.X Simultaneously slowly release the clutch

pedal and carefully depress the acceleratorpedal.

! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds.This may result in serious engine damagethat is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.Shift gear in a timely manner.

For more information on driving, see “Drivinginstructions” (Y page 254).


G Warning!It is dangerous to shift the automatictransmission out of park position P or neutralposition N if the engine speed is higher thanidle speed. If your foot is not firmly on thebrake pedal, the vehicle could acceleratequickly forward or in reverse. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and hit someone orsomething. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your rightfoot is firmly on the brake pedal.

! Only shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stopped. Otherwise theautomatic transmission could be damaged.

X Depress the brake pedal.The gear selector lever lock is released.

X Shift the automatic transmission into driveposition D or reverse gear R.

i Shifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position P is only possible with thebrake pedal depressed.Only depressing the brake pedal releasesthe gear selector lever lock.

X Wait for the gear selection process tocomplete before setting the vehicle inmotion.

X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.After a cold start, the automatic transmissionshifts at a higher engine speed. This allowsthe catalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature earlier.For more information on driving, see “Drivinginstructions” (Y page 254).

Problems while driving

The engine runs erratically and misfiresRAn ignition cable may be damaged.RThe engine electronics may not be

operating properly.RUnburned gasoline may have entered the

catalytic converter and damaged it.X Give very little gas.X Have the problem checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

The coolant temperature is above 248‡ (120†)The coolant is too hot and is no longer coolingthe engine.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon

as possible.X Turn off the engine immediately.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 104

X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.X Check the coolant level and add coolant if

necessary (Y page 227).

In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking fuel:X Do not start the engine under any

circumstances.X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the

roadway.X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.

If the extent of the damage cannot bedetermined:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz


If no damage on major assemblies, fuelsystem, and engine mount can bedetermined:X Start the engine in the usual manner.

Parking

G Warning!Do not park this vehicle in areas wherecombustible materials such as grass, hay orleaves can come into contact with the hotexhaust system. These materials could beignited and cause a vehicle fire.Vehicle movement can cause seriouspersonal injury or damage to the vehicle orthe vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always dothe following before turning off the engine andleaving the vehicle:RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.REngage the parking brake.RManual transmission: Shift the manual

transmission into 1st gear or reverse gearR.

RAutomatic transmission: Shift theautomatic transmission into park positionP.RSlowly release the brake pedal.RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the

front wheels towards the road curb.RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 0 and remove the SmartKey fromthe starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the

vehicle when leaving.

G Warning!Manual transmission:Wait until the vehicle is stationary beforeremoving the SmartKey from the starterswitch. The vehicle cannot be steered whenthe SmartKey is removed from the starterswitch.

Parking brake

G Warning!Engaging the parking brake while the vehicleis in motion can cause the rear wheels to lockup. You could lose control of the vehicle andcause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’sbrake lights do not light up when the parkingbrake is engaged.

G Warning!When leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the starter switch, take it withyou, and lock the vehicle. Do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Children couldrelease the parking brake and/or shift theautomatic transmission out of park positionP (manual transmission: shift into the neutralposition), either of which could result in anaccident and/or serious personal injury.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 105

Z

X Releasing: Pull on release handle :.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the brake warning lamp$ (USA only) or J (Canada only) inthe instrument cluster goes out.

X Engaging: Step on parking brakepedal ; firmly.When the engine is running, the brakewarning lamp $ (USA only) or J(Canada only) in the instrument clustercomes on.

Turning off the engine

G Warning!Do not turn off the engine before the vehiclehas come to a complete stop. With the enginenot running, there is no power assistance forthe brake and steering systems. In this case,it is important to keep in mind that aconsiderably higher degree of effort isnecessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

X Manual transmission: Shift the manualtransmission into 1st gear or reverse gearR.

X Automatic transmission: Shift theautomatic transmission into park positionP.

X Engage the parking brake.

i Always engage the parking brake inaddition to shifting the automatictransmission into park position P (manual

transmission: shifting into 1st gear orreverse gear R).

With SmartKey X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 0.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.Automatic transmission: The SmartKey canonly be removed from the starter switch withthe automatic transmission in park positionP.

With KEYLESS-GOX Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

With the driver’s door closed, the starterswitch is now in position 1. With the driver’sdoor opened, the starter switch is set toposition 0, same as the SmartKey removedfrom the starter switch (Y page 77).

If an acoustic warning sounds, you have triedto turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button while the automatictransmission was not in park position P.Read and observe messages that may appearin the multifunction display (Y page 276).

i In an emergency you can turn off theengine while driving by pressing andholding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonfor approximately 3 seconds.

If you have started the engine with theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannotturn it off as described above:X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop

button from the starter switch.X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.

The engine turns off. The starter switch isin position 0 (Y page 77).


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 106

Manual transmission

IntroductionFor information on driving with a manualtransmission, see “Driving and parking”(Y page 101).


G Warning!When working on the vehicle, engage theparking brake and shift the manualtransmission into 1st gear or reverse gear R.Otherwise the vehicle could roll away whichcould result in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury.

! Allow the engine to warm up under lowload use. Do not place full load on theengine until the operating temperature hasbeen reached.Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period when driving off onslippery road surfaces.This may cause serious damage to theengine and the drivetrain which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

Gearshift lever

Gearshift pattern for manual transmissionk Reverse gear1 to 6 Forward gears


! When you are shifting the manualtransmission into the 5th or 6th gear,make sure you move the gearshift lever tothe right. Otherwise, you could accidentallyshift into the 3rd or 4th gear and damagethe manual transmission.Downshifting gears leading to overrevvingthe engine can result in engine damage thatis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill byusing the clutch pedal. The clutch may bedamaged which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds.This may result in serious engine damagethat is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.Shift gear in a timely manner.

Manual transmission 107

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 107

Z

Shifting into reverse gear R! Only shift the manual transmission into

reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped.Otherwise the manual transmission couldbe damaged.

X Stop the vehicle completely.X Fully depress the clutch pedal.X Shift the manual transmission into the

neutral position (no gear selected).X Move the gearshift lever to the left until you

feel a certain resistance.X Push the gearshift lever past this resistance

and hold.X Move the gearshift lever forward to select

reverse gear R.


IntroductionFor information on driving with an automatictransmission, see “Driving and parking”(Y page 101).


! Allow the engine to warm up under lowload use. Do not place full load on theengine until the operating temperature hasbeen reached.Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period when driving off onslippery road surfaces.

This may cause serious damage to theengine and the drivetrain which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

i During the brief warm-up, transmissionupshifting is delayed. This allows thecatalytic converter to heat up more quicklyto operating temperature.

Gear selector lever

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmissionj Park position with gear selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutral positionh Drive position

G Warning!It is dangerous to shift the automatictransmission out of park position P or neutralposition N if the engine speed is higher thanidle speed. If your foot is not firmly on thebrake pedal, the vehicle could acceleratequickly forward or in reverse. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and hit someone orsomething. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your rightfoot is firmly on the brake pedal.

! Only shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stopped. Otherwise theautomatic transmission could be damaged.

108 Automatic transmissionCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 108

i Shifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position P is only possible with thebrake pedal depressed.Only depressing the brake pedal releasesthe gear selector lever lock.

i The current gear selector lever positioncorresponds with the current transmissionposition.The current transmission position P, R, N,or D appears in the multifunction display(Y page 109).

There are additional indicators on the coverof the shifting gate showing the current gearselector lever position.The indicators come on when you insert theSmartKey into the starter switch, and go outwhen you remove the SmartKey from thestarter switch.

Shifting procedureThe automatic transmission selects individualgears automatically, depending onRthe selected gear range (Y page 111)Rthe selected program mode:

C/S (Y page 111)orM (vehicles with dynamic handling packageand C 63 AMG only) (Y page 113)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe vehicle speedWith drive position D selected, you caninfluence transmission shifting byRlimiting the gear rangeRextending the gear rangeRchanging the gears manually (vehicles with

dynamic handling package and C 63 AMGonly)

C 63 AMG:Double-clutching is active when downshiftingin all program modes. Double-clutchingreduces load-alteration effects and supports

sporty driving. The degree to which youperceive double-clutching acoustically variesdepending on the selected program mode.

Transmission positionsThe current transmission position appears inthe multifunction display.

: Transmission position indicator

Automatic transmission 109

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 109

Z

Effect

B Park positionShift the automatic transmissioninto park position P only when thevehicle is stopped. The park positionis not intended to serve as a brakewhen the vehicle is parked. Rather,the driver should always engage theparking brake in addition to shiftingthe automatic transmission intopark position P to secure thevehicle.The SmartKey can only be removedfrom the starter switch with the gearselector lever in park position P.With the SmartKey removed fromthe starter switch, the gear selectorlever is locked in park position P.If the vehicle’s electrical system ismalfunctioning, the gear selectorlever could remain locked in parkposition P. To unlock the gearselector lever manually, see“Manually unlocking the gearselector lever” (Y page 311).

C Reverse gearShift the automatic transmissioninto reverse gear R only when thevehicle is stopped.

Effect

A Neutral positionNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive axle. When thebrakes are released, the vehicle canbe moved freely (pushed or towed).To avoid damage to thetransmission, never shift theautomatic transmission into neutralposition N while driving.Exception: If the ESP® is switchedoff or malfunctioning, shift theautomatic transmission into neutralposition N if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding.

! Coasting the vehicle, or drivingfor any other reason with theautomatic transmission in neutralposition N can result intransmission damage that is notcovered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

7 Drive positionThe automatic transmission shiftsautomatically. All forward gears areavailable.

Driving tips

Kickdown Use the kickdown when you want maximumacceleration.X U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles:

Fully depress the accelerator pedal.Depending on the engine speed theautomatic transmission shifts into a lowergear.

X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:Depress the accelerator pedal past thepoint of resistance.Depending on the engine speed theautomatic transmission shifts into a lowergear.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 110

Working on the vehicle

G Warning!When working on the vehicle, engage theparking brake and shift the automatictransmission into park position P. Otherwisethe vehicle could roll away which could resultin an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Gear rangesWith the automatic transmission in driveposition D and driving in automatic programmode C or S, you can limit or extend the gearrange, see “One-touch gearshifting”(Y page 112).The current gear range appears in themultifunction display.

: Gear range indicator

Effect

= With this selection you can use thebraking effect of the engine.

5 Allows the use of the engine’sbraking effect when drivingRon steep downgradesRin mountainous regionsRunder extreme operating

conditions

4 For maximum use of the engine’sbraking effect on very steep orlengthy downgrades.

Automatic shift program

Program mode selector switch

C Comfort For comfort driving

S Sport For sporty driving

Program mode selector switch on C 63 AMG

C Comfort For standard driving


M Manual For manual gearshifting


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 111

Z

The current program mode appears in themultifunction display.

: Program mode indicator

You should only change the program modewhen the automatic transmission is in parkposition P.Automatic program mode S will not be stored.When the engine is turned off with theautomatic program mode S selected, theautomatic transmission will go to theautomatic program mode C when the engineis restarted.X Press the program mode selector switch

repeatedly until the letter of the desiredprogram mode appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

For selecting automatic program mode (C orS) on vehicles with dynamic handlingpackage, see “Dynamic handling packagewith sport driving mode” (Y page 184).Selecting program mode C means:RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both

forward and reverse, except when drivingoff with full throttle.RTraction and driving stability are improved

on icy roads.RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give

more gas. The engine then operates atlower revolutions and the wheels are lesslikely to spin.

Selecting program mode S means thatupshifts occur later.

One-touch gearshiftingWith the automatic transmission in driveposition D and driving in automatic programmode C or S, you can limit or extend the gearrange using the gear selector lever or thesteering wheel gearshift control.Steering wheel gearshift control is availableon vehicles with dynamic handling packageand on C 63 AMG only.Vehicles with dynamic handling package andC 63 AMG: For information on using the gearselector lever or the steering wheel gearshiftcontrol in manual program mode M, see“Manual shift program” (Y page 113).

Steering wheel gearshift control (exampleillustration)

i You cannot shift with the steering wheelgearshift control when the automatictransmission is in park position P, neutralposition N, or reverse gear R.

Limiting gear range



ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 112

X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theleft in the D- direction.

orX Briefly pull left gearshift control :.

The automatic transmission will shift intothe next lower gear as permitted by theshift program. This action simultaneouslylimits the gear range of the automatictransmission.

i To avoid overrevving the engine whendownshifting, the automatic transmissionwill not shift into a lower gear if the engine’smaximum speed would be exceeded.

Extending gear rangeX Briefly press the gear selector lever to the

right in the D+ direction.orX Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.

The automatic transmission will shift intothe next higher gear as permitted by theshift program. This action simultaneouslyextends the gear range of the automatictransmission.

i If you press on the accelerator pedalwhen the engine has reached therevolution limit of the current gear range,the automatic transmission will upshiftbeyond any gear range limit selected.

Canceling gear range limitX Press and hold the gear selector lever to

the right in the D+ direction until the gearrange indicator disappears from themultifunction display.

orX Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until

the gear range indicator disappears fromthe multifunction display.The automatic transmission will shift fromthe current gear range directly into driveposition D.

Shifting into optimal gear range X Press and hold the gear selector lever to

the left in the D- direction.orX Pull and hold left gearshift control :.

The automatic transmission will select thegear range suited for optimal accelerationand deceleration automatically. This willinvolve shifting down one or more gears.

Manual shift programThe manual shift program is available onvehicles with dynamic handling package andon C 63 AMG only.Manual program mode M differs with regardto spontaneity, response time, and shiftingsmoothness from automatic program modeS.In manual program mode M, system-controlled automatic gearshifting is switchedoff. You need to change the gears by manuallyupshifting or downshifting using the gearselector lever or the steering wheel gearshiftcontrol.

Program mode selector switch on vehicles withdynamic handling package



Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 113

Z

Program mode selector switch on C 63 AMG

C Comfort For standard driving



The current program mode appears in themultifunction display (Y page 112).For information on automatic program mode(C or S), see “Automatic shift program”(Y page 111) and “One-touch gearshifting”(Y page 112).

Activating manual shift programX Vehicles with dynamic handling package:

Press the program mode selector switchonce.M appears in the multifunction display.The automatic transmission switches tomanual program mode M. Automaticshifting is switched off. The gear range isnot limited.

X C 63 AMG: Press the program modeselector switch repeatedly until M appearsin the multifunction display.The automatic transmission switches tomanual program mode M. Automaticshifting is switched off. The gear range isnot limited.

You can change the gears manually with driveposition D selected. You can upshift ordownshift through the gears in succession.

i Vehicles with dynamic handling package:Manual program mode M will not be stored.When the engine is turned off with manualprogram mode M selected, the automatictransmission will go to automatic programmode C when the engine is restarted.

i C 63 AMG: Manual program mode M willnot be stored. When the engine is turnedoff with manual program mode M selected,the automatic transmission will go toautomatic program mode (C or S) when theengine is restarted.

Upshiftingi Vehicles with dynamic handling package:

If you press on the accelerator pedal whenthe engine has reached the revolution limitof the current gear, the automatictransmission will upshift beyond manualprogram mode M selected.

! C 63 AMG:In manual program mode M, the automatictransmission will not upshift, even if theengine has reached its overrevving range.Shift up into the next gear before theengine has reached its overrevving range.Make absolutely certain that the enginespeed does not reach the red marking onthe tachometer. Otherwise the enginecould be damaged which is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theright in the D+ direction.

orX Briefly pull right gearshift control ;

(Y page 112).The automatic transmission shifts into thenext higher gear.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 114

Upshift indicator (C 63 AMG only)

In manual program mode M, upshiftindicator ; in the multifunction displayadvises you to upshift before the enginereaches the overspeed range. Thus you candrive at the maximum engine speed for eachgear without overrevving the engine.X Shift the automatic transmission from

current gear : into the next higher gear.The fuel supply will otherwise beinterrupted to prevent the engine fromoverrevving.

Downshifting


X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theleft in the D- direction.

orX Briefly pull left gearshift control :

(Y page 112).The automatic transmission shifts into thenext lower gear.

i Vehicles with dynamic handling package:To avoid overrevving the engine whendownshifting, the automatic transmissionwill not shift into a lower gear if the engine’smaximum speed would be exceeded.

i For maximum acceleration, press andhold the gear selector lever to the left in theD- direction or pull and hold the leftgearshift control. Depending on the enginespeed the automatic transmission selectsthe optimal gear for maximumacceleration.

i When you brake or stop, the automatictransmission shifts down into a gear fromwhich you can easily accelerate or take off.

Kickdown AMG vehicles: Using the kickdown whiledriving in manual program mode M is notpossible.All vehicles except AMG vehicles: You canalso use the kickdown while driving in manualprogram mode M when you want maximumacceleration.X U.S. vehicles: Fully depress the

accelerator pedal.Depending on the engine speed theautomatic transmission shifts into a lowergear.

X Canada vehicles: Depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance.Depending on the engine speed theautomatic transmission shifts into a lowergear.

i You cannot shift with the gear selectorlever or the steering wheel gearshift controlwhen using the kickdown.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 115

Z

Deactivating manual shift programX Vehicles with dynamic handling package:

Press the program mode selector switchonce more.The last selected automatic program modeC or S appears in the multifunction display.

orX Restart the engine.

The automatic transmission will go to thelast selected automatic program mode (Cor S).

X C 63 AMG: Press the program modeselector switch repeatedly until C or Sappears in the multifunction display.

orX Restart the engine.

The automatic transmission will go toautomatic program mode (C or S).

Manual program mode M is not stored.

Emergency operation (limp-home mode)

If vehicle acceleration becomes lessresponsive or sluggish or the automatictransmission no longer shifts, the automatictransmission is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In thismode only second gear and reverse gear Rcan be selected.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.X Shift the automatic transmission into park

position P.X Turn off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.X Restart the engine.X Shift the automatic transmission into drive

position D (for second gear) or reverse gearR.

X Have the automatic transmission checkedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center assoon as possible.

Transfer case

This section applies to vehicles equipped withall-wheel drive (4MATIC) only. Both the frontand rear axles are powered at all times whenthe vehicle is being operated.

! Only conduct operational or performancetests on a two-axle dynamometer. If suchtests are necessary, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You couldotherwise seriously damage the brakesystem or the transfer case which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

! Because the ESP® operatesautomatically, the engine and ignition mustbe shut off (SmartKey in starter switchposition 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton in position 0 or 1) when the parkingbrake is being tested on a brake testdynamometer.Active braking action through the ESP®


Instrument cluster

IntroductionFor a full view illustration of the instrumentcluster, see “Instrument cluster”(Y page 28).

G Warning!No messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lamps

116 Instrument clusterCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 116

Rmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systems

Driving characteristics may be impaired.If you must continue to drive, do so with addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

The language setting for the multifunctiondisplay can be changed with the audio system(Y page 148) or with the COMAND system.Vehicles with COMAND system: Refer toseparate operating instructions.

Activating the instrument clusterThe instrument cluster is activated when youRopen the driver’s doorRswitch on the ignition

Adjusting the instrument cluster illumination

X To brighten illumination: Turndimmer : clockwise.

X To dim illumination: Turn dimmer :counterclockwise.

i The instrument cluster illumination isdimmed or brightened automatically to suitambient light conditions.The instrument cluster illumination will alsobe adjusted automatically when you switchon the vehicle’s exterior lamps.

Coolant temperature gaugeThe coolant temperature gauge is located onthe left side in the instrument cluster(Y page 28).

G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature mayrise close to 248‡ (120†), i.e close to thered zone of the temperature gauge.

! Excessive coolant temperature triggers awarning in the multifunction display.The engine should not be operated with acoolant temperature above 248‡ (120†),i.e. in the red zone of the coolanttemperature gauge. Doing so may causeserious engine damage which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

TachometerThe red marking on the tachometer(Y page 28) denotes excessive engine speed.

! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,as it may result in serious engine damagethat is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply isinterrupted if the engine is operated withinthe red marking.

Instrument cluster 117

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 117

Z

Outside temperature indicatorThe outside temperature indicator isdisplayed in the multifunction display(Y page 120).

G Warning!The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of theinstrument cluster (Y page 28). Once the fuellevel has fallen below the reserve mark, theyellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp 8for the fuel reserve comes on.

Control system

IntroductionThe control system is activated as soon as thestarter switch is in position 2.The control system enables you to call upinformation about your vehicle and to changevehicle settings.For example, you can use the control systemto find out when your vehicle is next due formaintenance service, to call up statisticaldata on your vehicle, and much more.

G Warning!A driver’s attention to the road and trafficconditions must always be his/her primaryfocus when driving.For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through the multifunctionsteering wheel should only be done by the

driver when traffic and road conditions permitit to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

The control system relays information to themultifunction display.

Multifunction steering wheelThe displays in the multifunction display andthe settings in the control system arecontrolled by using the buttons on themultifunction steering wheel.

: Multifunction display

; Press button~ to end a call

to reject an incoming call6 to answer a call

to dial7

to redial78 to mute

7 Function only available in telephone menu.

118 Control systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 118

Press buttonWX

to set the volumeto operate the RACETIMER8

= Press button? to activate the Voice Control

System9

? Press button briefly% to cancel the Voice Control

System9

to go backto confirm messages

Press and hold button% to select the standard display

A Press button;=

to call up line for menus and toselect menus

Press button briefly9:

to select submenu or scrollthrough listswithin Audio menu to selectprevious or next track, scene orstored stationwithin Tel menu to switch tothe phone book and select aname or number

Press and hold button9:

within Audio menu to select atrack or scene with quicksearch or to select previous ornext station in station list orwave bandwithin Tel menu to start thequick search in the phone book

Press buttona to confirm selection or

messages

Depending on the selected menu, pressingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel will alter what appears in themultifunction display.The information available in the multifunctiondisplay is arranged in menus andaccompanying functions and submenus.The individual functions are then found withinthe relevant menu (radio or CD operationsunder Audio, for example). These functionsserve to call up relevant information or tocustomize the settings for your vehicle.It is helpful to think of the menus, and thefunctions within each menu, as beingarranged in a circular pattern.In the Settings menu, instead of functions,you will find a number of submenus for callingup and changing settings. For instructions onusing these submenus, see “Settings menu”(Y page 130).The number of menus available in the systemdepends on which optional equipment isinstalled in your vehicle.

8 AMG vehicles only.9 The Voice Control System is only available with the COMAND system. Refer to separate operating

instructions.

Control system 119

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 119

Z

Using the control systemX To select a menu: Press button =

or ;.X To select a submenu: Press button :

or 9.X To go to the next higher menu level:

Press button %.X To select the standard display: Press

button % repeatedly until the standarddisplay featuring the odometer andspeedometer appears.

orX Press and hold button % until the

standard display featuring the tripodometer and the main odometer appears.

X To confirm selection: Press button a.X To confirm display message: Press

button a or %.The control system saves certain displaymessages. Calling up display messages(Y page 129).

For information about warning andmalfunction messages appearing in themultifunction display (Y page 270).

Multifunction display

: Text field; Line for main menus

= Outside temperature indicator? Automatic transmission program mode

indicatorA Transmission position/gear range

indicator (automatic transmission)Additional speedometer (manualtransmission)

B Digital clock

Settings, functions, submenus as well as anymalfunctions appear in the text field.For more information on menus displayed inthe multifunction display, see “Menus andsubmenus” (Y page 121).


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 120

Menus and submenus

Function

: Trip menu (Y page 121)

; AMG10 menu (Y page 123)

= Navi menu (Y page 126)

? Audio menu (Y page 126)

A Tel menu (Y page 128)

B Service menu (Y page 129)

C Settings menu (Y page 130)

Trip menuIn the Trip menu, you can show an additionaldisplay for the speedometer and call up orreset your vehicle’s statistical data.The following information is available:RStandard display (Y page 121)RFuel consumption statistics since start

(Y page 122)

RFuel consumption statistics since last reset(Y page 122)RResetting values (Y page 122)RRemaining driving range and current fuel

consumption (Y page 123)RDigital Speedometer (Y page 123)

Standard display

In the standard display, the tripodometer : and the main odometer ;appear in the multifunction display.If another display appears instead of thestandard display:X Press button = or ; to select theTrip menu.

or

10 AMG vehicles only.

Control system 121

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 121

Z

X Press button % repeatedly until thestandard display appears.

orX Press and hold button % until the

standard display appears.

Fuel consumption statistics since start X Press button = or ; to select theTrip menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select From Start.

: Distance driven since start; Time elapsed since start= Average speed since start? Average fuel consumption since start

All statistics stored since the last engine startwill be reset approximately 4 hours after theSmartKey in the starter switch is turned toposition 0 or removed from the starter switch.Resetting will not occur if you turn theSmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within thistime period.

Fuel consumption statistics since last resetX Press button = or ; to select theTrip menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select From Reset.

: Distance driven since last reset; Time elapsed since last reset= Average speed since last reset? Average fuel consumption since last reset

Resetting valuesYou can reset the values for the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerRFuel consumption statistics since startRFuel consumption statistics since last resetX Press button = or ; to select theTrip menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select thefunction you wish to reset.

X Press button a.

Example illustration: Reset fuel consumptionstatistics since start

X Press button : to select Yes.X Press button a to confirm.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 122

Remaining driving range and current fuel consumptionX Press button = or ; to select theTrip menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theestimated remaining driving range andcurrent fuel consumption display.Note that the values are calculated basedon the current fuel tank level and thecurrent driving style. Make sure to refuel intime.If only very little fuel is left in the tank, avehicle at the fuel pump C appearsinstead of the estimated remaining drivingrange.

: Current fuel consumption11

; Estimated remaining driving range

Digital speedometerX Press button = or ; to select theTrip menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select thedigital speedometer.

Example illustration for upshift indicator: Upshift indicator12

; Digital speedometer

The shift indicator is meant as arecommendation for an economical drivingstyle. Always observe traffic conditions, asyour driving style is determined in the firstinstance by the traffic situation.

AMG menuThis function is only available in AMGvehicles.X Press button = or ; to select theAMG menu.

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperature indicatorA Coolant temperature indicator

The engine oil temperature flashes if theengine oil temperature has not yet reached176‡ (80†). During this time, avoid drivingat full engine speed.The upshift indicator = indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving range.The upshift indicator = blocks othermessages in the multifunction display untilyou have shifted up.Use buttons : or 9 to select thefollowing functions in the AMG menu:

11 Not available on AMG vehicles.12 Vehicles with manual transmission only

Control system 123

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 123

Z

RSETUP (Y page 124)RRACETIMER (Y page 124)ROverall analysis (Y page 125)RLap analysis (Y page 126)

SETUPX Press button = or ; to select theAMG menu.

X Press button 9 to select SETUP.

: Automatic transmission program modeindicator

; ESP mode indicator

RACETIMER

G Warning!The RACETIMER feature is only for use onroads and in conditions where high speeddriving is permitted. Racing on public roads isprohibited under all circumstances. The driveris and must always remain responsible forfollowing posted speed limits.

The RACETIMER allows you to time and savedriving stretches.X Press button = or ; to select theAMG menu.

X Press button 9 repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= RACETIMER? Lap number

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or the starter switch is inposition 2 (Y page 77).While the RACETIMER is being displayed, youcannot adjust the audio volume using buttonsW or X.X Starting: Press button W.X Displaying intermediate time: Press

button X while the timer is running.The intermediate time is shown for5 seconds.

X Stopping: Press button W.When you stop the vehicle and turn theSmartKey to position 1 (Y page 77) or, invehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off theengine and do not open the driver’s door, theRACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumedwhen you press button W after switchingthe ignition back on or restarting the engine.

Saving lap time and starting a new lapYou can save up to 16 laps.X Press button X while the timer is

running.The intermediate time will be shown for5 seconds.

X Press button X within 5 seconds.The intermediate time shown will be savedas a lap time.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 124

The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.The new lap begins to be timed as soon asthe intermediate time is called up.

: Gear indicator; RACETIMER= Best lap time? Lap number

Resetting current lapX Press button W while the timer is

running.The timer stops.

X Press button X.The lap time is reset to “0”.

Deleting all lapsIt is not possible to delete a single saved lap.X Press button W while the timer is

running.The timer stops.

X Press button a.The reset menu appears in themultifunction display.

X Press button : to select Yes andconfirm with button a.The saved laps are deleted.

Overall analysisThis function is only available if you havesaved at least one lap and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press button = or ; to select theAMG menu.

X Press button 9 repeatedly until theoverall analysis appears in themultifunction display.

: Overall analysis of RACETIMER; Overall driving time= Average speed? Overall distance drivenA Maximum speed

Control system 125

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 125

Z

Lap analysisThis function is only available if you havesaved at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press button = or ; to select theAMG menu.

X Press button 9 repeatedly until the lapanalysis appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Each lap is shown in its own submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol :.

: Lap number; Lap time= Average speed during lap? Lap lengthA Maximum speed during lap

X Press button : or 9 to see other lapanalyses.

Navi menuThe Navi menu contains the functionsneeded to operate your navigation system.X Press button = or ; to select theNavi menu.The message shown in the multifunctiondisplay depends on the status of thenavigation system:RWith the COMAND system switched on

or off and route guidance not activated,the direction of travel and, if applicable,

the name of the street currently traveledon appear in the multifunction display.RWith the COMAND system switched on

and route guidance activated, maneuverinstructions appear in the multifunctiondisplay.

Please refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions for instructions on howto activate the route guidance system.

Audio menuThe functions in the Audio menu operate theaudio equipment which you have currentlyswitched on.The following functions are available:RSelecting radio station (Y page 126)ROperating audio devices/audio media

(Y page 127)ROperating video DVD (Y page 127)If the audio system or the COMAND systemis currently switched off, the message Audio Off appears in the multifunction display.X To adjust the volume: Press buttonW or X on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Selecting radio station i The SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio is treated

as a radio application.Additional optional satellite radioequipment and a subscription to a satelliteradio service provider are required forsatellite radio operation. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails and availability for your vehicle.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see “Satellite radio”(Y page 152).Vehicles with COMAND system:Refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 126

X Switch on the audio system (Y page 144)and select radio mode.Vehicles with COMAND system:Refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.

X Press button = or ; to select theAudio menu.The currently tuned station appears in themultifunction display.

Example illustration for FM radio: Stored memory position; Station frequency= Wave band setting

X Selecting next or previous stored station: Press button : or 9 brieflyto select a stored station.

X Selecting next or previous station in wave band: Press and hold button : or9 to select a station.

You can only store new stations using thecorresponding feature on the radio(Y page 151).Vehicles with COMAND system:Refer to separate COMAND system operatinginstructions.You can also operate the radio in the usualmanner.

Operating audio devices/audio mediaX Switch on the audio system and select the

CD or MP3 mode (Y page 158).Vehicles with COMAND system:Refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.

X Press button = or ; to select theAudio menu. The settings for the currently

being played audio device/audio mediaappear in the multifunction display.

Example illustration: Disc number; Current track

X Selecting next or previous track: Pressbutton : or 9 briefly.

X Selecting a track from the track list (quick search): Press and holdbutton : or 9.

The current track does not appear duringAudio AUX mode operation.

Operating video DVDThis function is only available if your vehicleis equipped with the COMAND system.X Switch on the COMAND system and select

DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMANDsystem operating instructions.

X Press button = or ; to select theAudio menu.

: Disc number; Current scene

X Selecting next or previous scene: Pressbutton : or 9 briefly.

X Selecting a scene from the scene list (quick search): Press and holdbutton : or 9.

Control system 127

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 127

Z

Tel menu

G Warning!A driver’s attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenweather, road and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

You can connect your telephone to the audiosystem (Y page 167) or to the COMANDsystem via Bluetooth®, see separateCOMAND system operating instructions.X Switch on the audio system (Y page 144)

or the COMAND system, see separateCOMAND system operating instructions.

X Press button = or ; to select theTel menu.One of the following messages will appearin the multifunction display:RNo Service: No network is available.RReady for Bluetooth Telephony...:

The telephone has not been connectedto the audio system or COMAND systemvia Bluetooth® yet.X Connect the telephone to the audio

system or COMAND system viaBluetooth®.

RPhone READY or name of the networkprovider (if available): The telephone hasfound a network and is ready for use. Youcan operate it using the control system.

Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls,you can answer a call at any time. In themultifunction display you will then see thefollowing message:

Example illustration

X Press button 6.You have answered the call.

The caller’s number appears only if it istransmitted.The caller’s name appears only if the numberand the name are stored in the phone book.

Ending a call or rejecting an incoming callX Press button ~.

Dialing a number from the phone book When your telephone is ready to receive calls,you may select and dial a number from thephone book at any time.

i To use the phone book of the audiosystem you can import business cards(vCards) from external Bluetooth® phonesinto your audio system’s phone book(Y page 174). Vehicles with COMAND, seeseparate operating instructions.

X Press button = or ; to select theTel menu.

X Press button : or 9 or a toswitch to the phone book.The stored names are displayed inascending alphabetical order.

X Press button : or 9 to select thedesired entry.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 128

If you press and hold button : or9 the system scrolls rapidly through thelist of names (quick search). After holdingbutton : or 9 for a short while thescrolling speed increases. Release thebutton to stop the quick search. The searchstops automatically at the end of the list.

Example illustration: Selected name from the phone book

X If the Symbol G appears on the right-handside of the name several entries arepresent for the same name: Press button6 or a and select the desired entry.

X Press button 6 or a.The control system dials the selectedphone number.If the connection is successful and thisfeature is supported by your networkprovider, the name of the party (if stored inyour phone book) you are calling willappear in the multifunction display.The control system stores the dialednumber in the redial memory.

orX Press button ~ or % if you do not

want to make the call.

Redialing The control system stores the most recentlydialed phone numbers. This eliminates theneed to search through your entire phonebook.X Press button = or ; to select theTel menu.

X Press button 6.X Press button : or 9 to select the

desired number or name.X Press button 6 or a.

The control system dials the selectedphone number.

Service menuIn the Service menu the following functionsare available:RVehicle status message memory

(Y page 129)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning

system (Canada only) (Y page 234)RChecking tire inflation pressure

electronically with the Advanced TPMS(USA only) (Y page 234)RCalling up the maintenance service

indicator display (Y page 259)

Vehicle status message memory Use the vehicle status message memoryfunction to scan malfunction and warningmessages that may be stored in the system.Such messages appear in the multifunctiondisplay and are based on conditions orsystem status the vehicle’s system hasrecorded.

G Warning!Malfunction and warning messages are onlyindicated for certain systems and areintentionally not very detailed. Themalfunction and warning messages aresimply a reminder with respect to the

Control system 129

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 129

Z

operation of certain systems. They do notreplace the owner’s and/or driver’sresponsibility to maintain the vehicle’soperating safety. Have all requiredmaintenance and safety checks performed onthe vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to address themalfunction and warning messages.

X Press button = or ; to select theService menu.If conditions have occurred causing statusmessages to be recorded, the number ofmessages appears in the multifunctiondisplay:

X Press button : or 9 to select themessages function.

X Press button a to confirm.The stored messages will now be displayedin the order in which they have occurred.For malfunction and warning messages,see “Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display” (Y page 270).

X Use button : or 9 to scroll throughthe messages.

If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switchto position 0 and then back to position 2, allmessages will be deleted from the messagememory.

Settings menu

IntroductionIn the Settings menu there are twofunctions: The function Factory Setting(Y page 130), with which you can reset thesettings to the original factory settings and a

collection of submenus (Y page 130) withwhich you can make individual settings foryour vehicle.

Resetting to factory settingsYou can reset most of the settings of thesubmenus to the factory settings.For safety reasons, the function Daytime Running Lamps in the Lights submenucannot be reset while driving.X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theFactory Setting function.

X Press button a.The function Reset All Settings?appears in the multifunction display.

X Press button : or 9 to select Yes orNo. Select Yes if you want to reset tofactory settings.

X Press button a to confirm.The confirmation message appears in themultifunction display.

Submenus in the Settings menuX Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 130

X Press button : or 9 to select asubmenu.

Scroll down with button :, scroll up withbutton 9.With the selection marker on the desiredsubmenu, use the button a to access theindividual functions within that submenu.Once within the submenu, you can use button9 to move to the next function orbutton : to move to the previous functionwithin that submenu.The following lists show what settings can bechanged within the various menus. Detailedinstructions on making individual settings canbe found on the following pages.

Instrument cluster submenuRSelecting speedometer display mode

(Y page 131)RShowing or hiding additional

speedometer13 (Y page 132)RPermanent display14 (speed display or

outside temperature) (Y page 132)

Time/Date submenuRSetting the time (Y page 132)RSetting the date (Y page 133)

Lights submenuRSwitching daytime running lamp mode on

or off (USA only) (Y page 133)RSwitching locator lighting on or off

(Y page 134)RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off

on or off (Y page 135)

Vehicle submenuRSwitching automatic central locking on or

off (Y page 135)

Convenience submenuRActivating easy-entry/exit feature

(Y page 136)RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear

view mirrors on or off (Canada only)(Y page 136)

Instrument cluster submenuAccess the Instr. Cluster submenu viathe Settings menu. Use the Instr. Cluster submenu to change the instrumentcluster display settings.The following functions are available:RSelecting speedometer display mode

(Y page 131)RShowing or hiding additional

speedometer15 (Y page 132)RPermanent display16 (speed display or

outside temperature) (Y page 132)

Selecting speedometer display mode X Press = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theInstr. Cluster submenu.

X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.The current setting is shown.

13 Vehicles with manual transmission14 Vehicles with automatic transmission15 Vehicles with manual transmission16 Vehicles with automatic transmission

Control system 131

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 131

Z

X Press button a to change the setting.Depending on the previous setting theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer: will beset to miles or km.

The selected display unit is valid for:ROdometer and trip odometerRTrip computerRDigital speedometer in the trip menuRCruise controlRNavigation displays

Showing or hiding additional speedometer (vehicles with manual transmission)You can have an additional digitalspeedometer shown on the multifunctiondisplay. The speed is shown in the unit ofkilometers/hour (USA) or miles/hour(Canada).X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.


X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theAdditional Speedometer function.The current setting is shown.

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, theadditional speedometer will be switchedOn or Off.

Permanent display (vehicles with automatic transmission)You can use the Permanent Display:function to choose to display either theoutside temperature or the speed inkilometers (USA) or miles (Canada)permanently.X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.


X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select thePermanent Display: function.The current setting is shown.

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, thePermanent Display: will be switchedbetween Outside temperature orSpeedometer (km/h) (USA)/Speedometer (miles) (Canada).

Time/Date submenuAccess the Time/Date submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Time/Datesubmenu to change the time and date displaysettings.The following functions are available:RSetting the time (Y page 132)RSetting the date (Y page 133)

Setting the time This function is not available if your vehicle isequipped with the COMAND system andnavigation module.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 132

Vehicles with COMAND system:For information on setting the time in theCOMAND system, refer to the separateCOMAND system operating instructions.X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theTime/date submenu.

X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theTime function.

X Press button a.The current time appears in themultifunction display.

X To set a new time press button a again.X Press button = or ; to select the

setting you wish to change: hours orminutes.

X Press button : or 9 to change thesetting which is highlighted.

X Press button a to store the entry.

Setting the date This function is not available if your vehicle isequipped with the COMAND system andnavigation module.Vehicles with COMAND system:For information on setting the date in theCOMAND system, refer to the separateCOMAND system operating instructions.X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theTime/date submenu.

X Press button a.

X Press button : or 9 to select theDate function.

X Press button a.The current date appears in themultifunction display.

X To set a new date press button a again.X Press button = or ; to select the

setting you wish to change: month, day oryear.

X Press button : or 9 to change thesetting which is highlighted.

X Press button a to store the entry.

Lights submenuAccess the Lights submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Lights submenu tochange the lamp and lighting settings on yourvehicle.The following functions are available:RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on

or off (USA only) (Y page 133)RSwitching locator lighting function on or off

(Y page 134)RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off

on or off (Y page 135)

Switching daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA only) X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theLights submenu.

Control system 133

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 133

Z

X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theDaytime Running Lamps: function.The current setting Enabled or Disabledis shown.

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, theDaytime Running Lamps: mode will beEnabled or Disabled.

With Daytime Running Lamps modeenabled and the exterior lamp switch atposition $ or c, the low-beamheadlamps are switched on when the engineis running.In low ambient light conditions the followinglamps will come on additionally:RParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsFor more information on the daytime runninglamp mode, see (Y page 91).

i Make sure the exterior lamp switch is setto M or c when you switch off thedaytime running lamps while driving atnight.

For safety reasons, resetting all the functionsof all submenus to the factory settings whiledriving (Y page 130) will not deactivate thedaytime running lamp mode.The following message appears in themultifunction display:Cannot Be Completely Reset to Factory Settings while Driving..

Switching locator lighting on or off With the Locator Lighting: functionactivated and the exterior lamp switch inposition cRthe exterior lamps will come on during

darkness when the vehicle is unlocked withthe SmartKey.The lamps will go out when the driver’s dooris opened.If you do not open the driver’s door afterunlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey,the lamps will go out automatically afterapproximately 40 seconds.Rthe exterior lamps will remain on for

15 seconds during darkness after exitingthe vehicle and closing all doors.If, after turning off the engine, you do notopen or close a door, the lamps willautomatically go out after 60 seconds.

The following lamps will come onRParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsRFront fog lampsX Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.


X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theLocator Lighting: function.The current setting Enabled or Disabledis shown.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 134

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, theLocator Lighting: function will beEnabled or Disabled.

You can temporarily deactivate theheadlamps delayed shut-off feature:X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 0.

X Then turn it to position 2 and back toposition 0.The headlamps delayed shut-off feature isdeactivated. It will reactivate as soon asyou start the engine.

Switching interior lighting delayed shut-off on or off Use this function to set whether you wouldlike the interior lighting to remain on for10 seconds during darkness after you haveremoved the SmartKey from the starterswitch.X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.


X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theInterior Lighting Delay: function.The current setting Enabled or Disabledis shown.

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, theinterior lighting delayed shut-off featurewill be Enabled or Disabled.

Vehicle submenuAccess the Vehicle submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Vehicle submenuto set the automatic central locking.

Switching automatic central locking on or off Use this function to switch the automaticcentral locking on or off. With the automaticcentral locking activated, the vehicle islocked centrally at a vehicle speed ofapproximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theAutomatic Door Lock: function.The current setting Enabled or Disabledis shown.

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, theAutomatic Door Lock: feature will beEnabled or Disabled.

Convenience submenuAccess the Convenience submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Conveniencesubmenu to activate the easy-entry/exitfeature (Y page 136), or to set the fold-infunction for exterior rear view mirrors(Y page 136).

Control system 135

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 135

Z

Activating easy-entry/exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivatethe easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 85).

G Warning!You must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment stalk or press oneof the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver’s door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press button a.X Press button : or 9 to select theEasy Entry/Exit: function.The current setting Enabled or Disabledis shown.

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, theEasy Entry/Exit: feature will beEnabled or Disabled.

Switching fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors on or off This feature is only available in Canadavehicles.

Use this function to set the exterior rear viewmirrors to be folded in automatically whenyou lock your vehicle.With this function set to Enabled and theexterior rear view mirrors folded in using thebutton on the door control panel(Y page 88), the exterior rear view mirrors willnot fold out when you switch on the ignition.You will then have to fold out the exterior rearview mirrors using the button on the doorcontrol panel (Y page 88).Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors arefolded out completely before driving off.X Press button = or ; to select theSettings menu.

X Press button : or 9 to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a.X Press button : or 9 to select theFold Mirrors in when Locking:function.The current setting Enabled or Disabledis shown.

X Press button a to change the currentstatus.Depending on the previous status, theautomatic fold-in function for exterior rearview mirrors will be Enabled or Disabled.

Audio system

Audio and telephone operationThese instructions are intended to help youbecome familiar with your Mercedes-Benzaudio system. They contain useful tips and adetailed description of the user functions.

136 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 136

G Warning!In order to avoid distraction which could leadto an accident, the driver should enter systemsettings with the vehicle at a standstill andoperate the system only when road and trafficconditions permit. Always pay full attention totraffic conditions first before operatingsystem controls while driving.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

Audio system overview

Item

: Audio display (Y page 139)

; Opening button (Y page 139)

= Audio control unit (Y page 138)

Item

? Clear button (Y page 142)

A Audio controller (Y page 140)

B Back button (Y page 141)

Operating safety

G Warning!Any alterations made to electroniccomponents can cause malfunctions.The radio, amplifier, CD changer, satelliteradio, and telephone are interconnected.When one of the components is notoperational or has not been removed/replaced properly, the function of othercomponents may be impaired.This condition might seriously impair theoperating safety of your vehicle.We recommend that you have any servicework on electronic components carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Audio system componentsWith the audio system you can operate thefollowing main functions:RAudio function with the radio, Satellite

radio, disc (CD audio or MP3 mode) andAudio AUXRthe mobile phone with the phone bookRvarious system settings

Audio system 137

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 137

Z

The audio system consists of the following:RAudio control unitRAudio displayRAudio controller with buttons k and2

In addition, the audio system can also beoperated with the multifunction steeringwheel (Y page 118).In these instructions, the keypad (right sideof audio control unit) and the function buttonsare referred to as “buttons”.

Audio control unitWith the audio control unit you canRswitch the audio system on/offRadjust the volumeRselect the operating modesRenter telephone numbers and accept,

reject, initiate and end telephone callsRload and eject CDs

Audio control unit overview

Item

: Switching to radio mode(Y page 149)Calling up wave bands(Y page 149)Switching on Sat mode(Y page 154)

; Switching to CD audio or MP3 mode(Y page 158)

= Disc slot

? Load/eject button (Y page 161)

A Clear button for deleting digits orentire entries (Y page 178)Entering a passcode (Y page 171)Entering a telephone number(Y page 177)

138 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 138

B KeypadTuning to a station via the stationmemory (Y page 150)Storing stations manually(Y page 151)Entering a passcode (Y page 171)Entering a phone number(Y page 177)Sending DTMF tones (Y page 180)CD changer: Selecting a CD(Y page 162)CD: Entering a track number directly(Y page 164)

C Tuning to a station via station search(Y page 150)Fast forward (Y page 165)Skipping forwards to a track(Y page 165)

D Switching audio system on/off(Y page 144)

E Adjusting the volume (Y page 144)

F Tuning to a station via station search(Y page 150)Fast rewind (Y page 165)Skipping backwards to a track(Y page 165)

G Confirming a passcode(Y page 171)Accepting a call (Y page 179)Initiating a call (Y page 177)Redial (Y page 178)

H Rejecting a call (Y page 179)Ending an active call (Y page 179)

I Opening system settings menu(Y page 147)

J Switching sound on/off(Y page 145)Switching hands-free microphoneon/off (Y page 179)

K Switching to telephone mode(Y page 167)

L Sound settings (Y page 145)

Audio displayThe audio display has a protective cover.

! Do not place any objects on the cover ofthe audio display. This may obstruct themovement when the cover is beingopened/closed. The cover could bedamaged. Do not place any objects in frontof the audio display and/or secure anyobjects to the audio display itself. Theaudio display could be damaged.Avoid touching the audio display at alltimes. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface, there is a risk of it beingscratched. Do not press directly in thedisplay face. Otherwise, the audio displaywill be damaged.

i For information about cleaning and careof the audio display, see “Audio orCOMAND display” (Y page 265).

Audio display cover

Audio system 139

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 139

Z

X Opening: Press opening button :.Audio display cover ; opens, the audiodisplay is visible, and the audio systemswitched on.

X Closing: Press audio display cover ;down until it engages.If the audio system is still switched on, youcan continue to listen to the radio or a CDand operate the device via the buttons onthe audio control panel as well as thebuttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

i You cannot operate the audio system viathe audio controller when audio displaycover ; is closed.

DisplayThe currently selected mode and theassociated menus are shown on the audiodisplay. The audio display is divided intoseveral areas.

Example illustration: Radio selected

Status line = displays the time and thecurrent settings for radio and telephonemode.You can request the required function usingmenu bar :.The selection is made using the audiocontroller.Mobile phone readiness is indicated byadditional information being shown in thestatus line:RIn the telephone main menu: Name of the

Bluetooth® device (calls made and

received via the Bluetooth® interface)(Y page 172).RMobile phone network signal strengthr. This information will only be shownwith suitable mobile phones.RThe receiver symbol indicates whether a

call is active or not.¢ No active callö Active call

In this example, the audio main function is setto the FM radio mode and main area ; isactive.

i The layout of the menus may varydepending on your vehicle’s equipment.This manual shows the menus for a fullyequipped vehicle.

Instrument cluster multifunction displayPlease refer to the “Control system” sectionof this manual (Y page 118) for functiondescriptions and operation of the instrumentcluster multifunction display andmultifunction steering wheel buttons as theyrelate to audio functions described in thissection.

Audio controller

The menu functions are selected on the audiodisplay using audio controller :. For thispurpose, a selected item is highlighted.In this way, you can open menus or lists, movewithin menus or lists, and quit menus or lists.

140 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 140

Operating audio controllerAudio controller : features the followingoptions:Rpress briefly or press and hold WRrotate to the left or right cVd

Rslide to the left or right XVY

Rslide up or down ZVÆ

i You cannot operate the audio system viaaudio controller : when the display coveris closed.

Symbol How to use the audiocontroller

W X Press brieflyRto confirm the selection of a

menu item or list entry

X Press and hold until theselected action has beencarried outRto save a station

cVd X RotateRto move through vertical or

horizontal menus or throughlistsRto select program settings

ZVÆ X SlideRto move through vertical

menus or listsRto exit horizontal menus

Symbol How to use the audiocontroller

XVY X SlideRto move through horizontal

menusRto exit vertical menus

X Slide and holdRfor fast forward or reverse for

audio CD playback

Back button

X Switching to the next highest menu:Press button k briefly.The audio system switches to the nexthighest menu level within the currentlyactive mode.

i You can also exit a menu or list by slidingthe audio controller XVY or ZVÆ.

X Switching to the main menu: Press andhold button k.The audio system switches to the basicmenu of the currently active mode.

Audio system 141

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 141

Z

Clear button

X Deleting an individual digit: Briefly pressbutton 2.

X Deleting an entire entry: Press and holdbutton 2 until the entry is deleted.

MenuThe table below shows the structure of themodes and their menus. Each mode has abasic menu. Each menu item in turn hasseveral submenu items.

Button Mode/Menu

$ Radio mode

Radio (FM/AM) (Y page 148)

Weather Band (Y page 149)

Satellite radio (Y page 152)

Presets (Y page 151)

Sound (Y page 145)

h Disc mode

CD/MP3 (Y page 158)

Track list/folder list(Y page 165)

CD Changer (Y page 162)

Sound (Y page 145)

% Telephone mode

Button Mode/Menu

Telephone (Y page 167)

Name (Y page 174)

Call lists (Y page 176)

i System settings menu

System (Y page 147)

Language (Y page 148)

Calling up an operating modeX Press the respective button ($, h,%, or i) on the audio control unit.The basic menu of the selected modeappears in the audio display. The main areais active. The active area is highlighted.

i The following screens show the audiodisplay’s day design. The appearance of thehighlighted items in the menu will varydepending on the display design.

Illustration: Radio function basic menu

X Moving to the menu bar: Slide VÆ.

Horizontal menus

142 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 142

X Moving through the menu bar: SlideXVY or rotate cVd.The currently selected item is highlighted.

X Confirming the selected menu item:Press W.

X Exiting the menu bar without confirming a selection: Slide ZV in theopposite direction of the list orientation.

orX Press button k.

Vertical submenus

X Moving through the submenu: SlideZVÆ or rotate cVd.The currently selected item is highlighted.

X Confirming the selected submenu item: Press W.

X Exiting the submenu without confirming a selection: Slide XVY in theopposite direction of the list orientation.

orX Press button k.

Example of how to use the audio systemExample: direct frequency input,FM 104.5 MHz.$ Q Radio Q Enter FrequencyThe individual steps for the above-mentionedexample are described below.X Press button $ on audio control unit

repeatedly until desired wave band FM hasbeen selected.

X Switching to the menu bar: Slide VÆ.

X Selecting Radio in the menu bar: SlideXV or rotate cVd.

X Confirming selection: Press W.The Radio menu is selected and a list ofsubmenus appears.

X Enter Frequency is selected.X Confirming selection: Press W.

The Enter Frequency submenu appears.

i It is not possible to enter a frequency inthe respective wave band which is outside

Audio system 143

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 143

Z

the frequency range. Frequencies withinthe current frequency range, but outsidethe current frequency step width arerounded to the next lower allowedfrequency.

X Enter 1045 with the keypad on the audiocontrol unit.The audio system tunes in to the frequencyentered.

OperationIn the following description, an operation stepis described as in the example below.X$ Q Radio Q Enter Frequencyis the short forX Press button $ on audio control unit

repeatedly until desired wave band hasbeen selected.

X Slide VÆ.X Slide XV or rotate cVd the audio

controller to select Radio.X Press the audio controller W.

The Radio menu is selected and a list ofsubmenus appears.

X Slide ZV or rotate cVd the audiocontroller to select Enter Frequency.

X Press the audio controller W.The Enter Frequency submenu appearsin the audio display.

Switching audio system on or off

X Switching on: Press push button q.orX Open the audio display cover.orX If the audio system was on as you switched

off the ignition, turn the SmartKey in thestarter switch to position 1.The audio system will come back on withthe last selected function.

i If the audio system is switched on withoutthe SmartKey in the starter switch, it willautomatically switch off again afterapproximately 30 minutes.

X Switching off: Press push button q.orX Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 0 and remove SmartKey fromstarter switch.

i Should excessively high temperaturesoccur while the audio system is beingoperated, Temperature Too High - Device switching off now. will appearin the audio display, after which the audiosystem will be switched off for a cooling-down period.

i When you switch off the audio system,you also switch off the currently playingaudio source. Also, telephone operation viathe audio control unit is not possible.

Adjusting volume

144 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 144

X Adjusting: Turn rotary control :.The volume will increase or decreasedepending on the direction turned.

Adjusting volume for telephone callsIn hands-free mode, you can adjust thevolume of a telephone call while the call iscurrently active.During a telephone call:X Turn rotary control :.

The volume will increase or decreasedepending on the direction turned.

i The volume of the audio system or atelephone call can also be adjusted bypressing the button W or X on themultifunction steering wheel (Y page 118).

SoundX Switching on/off: Press button 8 on

the audio control unit (Y page 138).The sound of the current audio source isswitched on or off.

i When the sound is switched off, thesymbol 8 appears in the status line.If you change the audio source, or alter thevolume, the sound is automaticallyswitched on again.

Selecting sound settingsYou can select different bass and treblesettings for each individual audio source. Theparticular Sound menu can be opened fromthe basic menu for the desired operatingmode, or by pressing the button J on theaudio control unit.Example:$ Q Sound Q Bass

Adjusting bass or trebleX Press button J and select Bass orTreble.

orX Select Sound Q Bass or Treble.

A longer and brighter bar indicates thepreviously stored setting. The red pointerindicates the currently selected setting.

Example for adjusting bass

X Changing setting: Slide ÆVZ or rotatecVd until desired treble or bass setting isreached.

X Exiting menu: Press button k or slideXVY.The setting is stored.

Adjusting balance or faderBalance is used to determine whether thesound focus should be shifted toward thedriver’s side or the passenger side.Fader is used to determine whether the soundfocus should be shifted toward the front orrear of the vehicle.X Press button J repeatedly until Bal/Fad appears in the audio display.

orX Select Sound Q Bal/Fad.

The current setting is indicated by a redcross hair symbol.

Audio system 145

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 145

Z

Adjusting balance and fader

X Changing setting: Slide ÆVZ or XVY untildesired balance/fader setting is achieved.

X Exiting menu: Press W or button k.The balance/fader setting is stored for allaudio sources.

Surround soundIf your vehicle is equipped with the harman/kardon Logic 7® Surround Sound system, youcan choose between Logic7® On andLogic7® Off for surround sound.harman/kardon Logic 7® Surround Sound isavailable for the following operating modes:RRadio (FM only)RSatellite radioRCD audioRMP3RAUX

i By selecting Logic7® Off, all compatibleformats are played back as they arepresent on the medium.

Adjusting surround soundWith surround sound, you can choosebetween Logic7® On and Logic7® Off.X Press button J repeatedly until Sound

appears in the audio display.orX Select Sound Q Sound.

A dot # indicates the current setting.

X Selecting setting: Slide ÆVZ or rotatecVd.

X Saving setting: Press W.The setting is stored and the menu isexited.

X Exiting menu without saving: Pressbutton k or slide XVY.

i Balance and fader will be set to the defaultvalue (0/0) automatically by activating ordeactivating Logic 7®.

i Please note the following:RFor an optimal sound experience from all

seats, the balance and fader should beadjusted to the center of the passengercompartment with Logic 7® switched on.RThe best sound results are achieved

when playing high-quality audio CDs.RFor MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at

least 128 kbit/s.RSurround playback cannot be activated

in mono-signal sources as AM orWeatherband. It will not function formono-signal sources as, e.g. mono audiotracks on some specific audio CDs.RIn the case of poor radio reception

quality, e.g. during long tunnel passages,Logic 7® should be switched off, asotherwise a dynamic switchover fromstereo to mono and thus temporarysound characteristic shifts can occur.RWith certain stereo recordings, the

resulting sound characteristic may

146 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 146

deviate from conventional stereoplayback.

SYS menu

System settings menu overview

Menu

System

Display (Y page 147)

Brightness

Day Mode

Night Mode

Automatic

Activate Bluetooth®

(Y page 147)

Reset (Y page 147)

Language (Y page 148)

Display settingsYou can adapt the brightness of the audiodisplay to the prevailing light conditions.

Setting the display designXi Q System Q Display.X Select Brightness, Day Mode, Night Mode or Automatic.

i When you select Brightness, a scaleappears on which you can set thebrightness manually.In the Automatic setting, the audio systemanalyzes the automatic vehicle light sensorand switches between the display designsautomatically.

Bluetooth® settings

General information about Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology is the standard forshort-range wireless technologies, suitablefor transmitting voice and data. It is possibleto connect Bluetooth® devices wirelessly.Bluetooth® can be used to exchange vCardsor to make calls using a hands-free device.Bluetooth® technology uses the freelyavailable ISM (Industrial Scientific Medical)wave band that works at 2.45 GHz.Bluetooth® works within a range of up to 33 ft(10 m).

Activate or deactivate Bluetooth®

Xi Q System Q Activate Bluetooth.

You have activated or deactivatedBluetooth®. A checkmark O appears whenBluetooth® is activated.

Reseti You can reset the audio system back to

its factory settings. In this case, all personaldata (e.g. address book entries, call lists,paired mobile phones, and presets) aredeleted. We recommend that you reset thevalues before selling your vehicle.

Audio system 147

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 147

Z

Xi Q System Q Reset.A prompt appears asking whether youreally want to reset.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes another prompt willappear asking whether you really want toreset.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, the audio system will bereset and restarted.

Setting the system languageXi Q Language.

The language list appears. A dot # in frontof an entry indicates the current setting.X Changing setting: Slide ÆVZ or rotatecVd and select desired language.

X Saving setting: Press W.The setting is stored and the menu isexited.

X Exiting menu without saving: Pressbutton k or slide XVY.

i The language selected in the Audiosystem is also used for the displays andmessages in the multifunction display.

Radio operation

G Warning!Please devote your attention first andforemost to the traffic situation you are in.Before your journey, please familiarizeyourself with the radio functions.

Only use the audio system when road andtraffic conditions permit you to do so.Otherwise you could be involved in anaccident in which you or others could beinjured.

! Do not attach metallic window tinting filmto the inside or outside of windows whichare fitted with an aerial. Obstructing themetallic aerial structure on the window willinterfere with radio reception. Cutting thefilm on the window can permanentlydamage the aerial wires.

i The radio mode is interrupted by anincoming call on the mobile phone(Y page 167).

Menu overviewi The components and operating principles

of the audio system can be found on(Y page 137) and (Y page 143). Informationabout sound settings can be found on(Y page 145).

Menu Function

Radio(except WeatherBand/satelliteradio)

Enter frequency

Station information(in FM wave bandonly)

Presets(except WeatherBand)

Autostore (exceptsatellite radio)

List of storedstations

Info Information menu (ifavailable)

Channel(only Weather Band)

List of channels

Sound Treble

Bass

148 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 148

Menu Function

Balance/Fader

Surround Sound

Switching to radio modeX Press button $ on audio control unit.

The radio basic menu appears in the audiodisplay. The radio switches to the laststation you have listened to.Weather Band will automatically tune to thestrongest station in the area.

Illustration: Radio mode in FM wave band: Status line; Station name or other information from

the station= Station frequency and stored position? Main area with wave band

i Station name or other information ;,available for the FM wave band, can only beseen when the station transmits the nameor other information and the function Show Station Info in the Radio menu isactivated.X$ Q Radio Q Show Station Info

In the WB wave band, the audio systemdisplays the channel number, e.g.Channel 6, instead of the station namesand/or frequency.

Information displayed in the status line (example)The following information is displayed in thestatus line:RTime (04:38)RStation name (WNYC)Mobile phone readiness is indicated byadditional information being shown:RMobile phone network signal strengthr

RReceiver symbol ¢ ö

Calling up wave bandsYou can select FM, AM, and WB wave bandsas well as the Sat mode (Y page 152). Whenyou have selected the Sat mode, pressingbutton $ will switch back to FM radiomode.

Wave band Frequency

FM 87.7......107.9 MHz

AM 530.......1710 KHz

WB (Weather Band) Weather channels

Satellite radio Satellite radiochannels

X Press button $ on audio control unitrepeatedly until the desired wave band hasbeen selected.The FM, AM, and WB wave bands and thesatellite radio mode are called up one afteranother.The wave band currently selected appearsin the main area of the audio display. Thelast selected station in the selected waveband is heard.

Audio system 149

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 149

Z

Selecting a station/channelThe following functions are available:RStation search functionRChannel list (Weather Band/satellite radio)RStation memory (except Weather Band)RManual frequency entry (except Weather

Band/satellite radio)For using satellite radio see (Y page 152).The station search proceeds in the followingfrequency increments:R200 kHz in FM rangeR10 kHz in AM range

Tuning to a station/channel via station/channel search functioni The search function searches for the next

receivable station in the FM or AM waveband. In Weather Band (WB) the searchfunction switches to the next channel in thechannel list. For tuning to a station/channel you can also use the buttons onthe multifunction steering wheel, seeAudio menu (Y page 126).

X Press button $ on audio control unitrepeatedly until the FM/AM/WB waveband is selected.

X Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the mainarea in the basic menu is active.Depending on the direction in which thecontroller is being slid or rotated, thesystem searches upward or downward andstops at the next station/channel.

orX Press button E or F on audio control

unit.Depending on the pressed button, thesystem searches downward or upward andstops at the next station/channel.

Selecting a station using station memoryi This function is not available for Weather

Band.

X Press button $ on audio control unitrepeatedly until desired wave band hasbeen selected.

X Select Presets.orX Press W when the main area is selected.

The memory menu appears. The dot # infront of a memory position indicates thatthe currently selected station is savedthere.

X Select a station in the memory menu byrotating cVd or sliding ZVÆ and pressW.

orX Press desired station button k tox, with the keypad in audio control unitbriefly.

Tuning to a station by entering the frequency manuallyi This function is not available for Weather

Band/satellite radio.

X$ Q Radio Q Enter FrequencyThe menu for manual frequency entryappears.

orX Press button l on the keypad in audio

control unit briefly.The Enter Frequency submenu appears.

150 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 150

X Entering frequency with keypad: Enterdesired frequency with buttons k tox on the keypad in audio control unit.The audio system tunes in to the frequencyentered.

i It is not possible to enter a frequency inthe respective wave band which is outsidethe frequency range.

X Exiting menu without making an entry:Press button k in the center console(Y page 141).

Storing stationsYou can store ten AM and ten FM stations inthe memory.

i If you select a memory preset which isalready in use, it will be overwritten by thenew station.

Storing stations manually with keypadX Tune in desired station.

The basic menu appears in the audiodisplay.

X Press and hold desired station buttonk to x until a brief signal tonesounds.The station is stored.

Storing stations manually with station memory menuX Tune in desired station.

The basic menu appears in the audiodisplay.

X Press W when the main area is active.orX Select Presets.

The station memory display appears in theaudio display.

The dot # in front of a memory positionindicates that the currently tuned station isstored there.X Selecting a memory position: SlideZVÆ or rotate cVd.

X Storing a station to a selected memory position: Press and hold W until a briefsignal tone sounds.

orX Press and hold desired station buttonk to x on keypad, until a brief signaltone sounds.The station is stored.

Autostore – automatic station memoryi This function is not available for Weather

Band/satellite radio. The autostorefunction automatically assigns receivablestations to the memory. The stations aresorted according to reception quality at themoment of performing the autostore. Thestations which were stored in the stationmemory manually are overwritten in thisprocess. If less than ten stations are found,the remaining entries are left empty.

Audio system 151

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 151

Z

X Press button $ on audio control unitrepeatedly until desired wave band hasbeen selected.The basic menu appears in the audiodisplay.

X Press W when the main area is active.orX Select Presets.

The station memory display appears in theaudio display.

X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd to selectAutostore.

X Press W.The audio system searches for receivablestations. A corresponding message isdisplayed. The available stations areautomatically stored in the stationmemory. The first received station will beautomatically played.

X Canceling storage procedure: SelectCancel and press W while the messageRewriting Memory... is being displayed.

Displaying informationYou can display program information or otheradditional information when provided by theradio station you are listening to.X$ Q Info (if available).

The available information appears. Thecontent and scope of the informationdepends on the radio station.

X Closing screen: Slide XVY, rotate cVd,press W or press button k.

Satellite radio

G Warning!Please devote your attention first andforemost to the traffic situation you are in.Before your journey, please familiarizeyourself with the radio functions.

Only use the audio system when road andtraffic conditions permit you to do so.Otherwise you could be involved in anaccident in which you or others could beinjured.

Submenu overviewi The components and operating principles

of the audio system can be found on(Y page 137) and (Y page 143).

Menu Submenu

Sat Channel List

Enter Channel

Service

Presets Station presets

Info Information menu (ifavailable)

Category (Cat.) All channels

Select category

Sound Treble

Bass

Balance/Fader

Surround Sound

Satellite radioi Additional satellite radio equipment and a

subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radioservice provider are required for thesatellite radio operation described in thischapter.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for details and availability for yourvehicle.

SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio provides over130 channels of digital-quality radio,including 100 % commercial-free music,sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS XMSatellite Radio uses a fleet of high-power

152 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 152

satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day,coast to coast, in the contiguous U. S. andCanada.This diverse, satellite-delivered programmingis available for a monthly subscription fee.For more information and service availabilitycall the SIRIUS XM Service Center at1-888-539-7474 (Y page 157), or visitwww.sirius.com (USA) orwww.siriuscanada.ca (Canada).

i Note that categories and channels shownin illustrations are dependent onprogramming content delivered by theservice provider. Programming content issubject to change. Therefore, channels andcategories shown in illustrations anddescriptions contained in this manual maydiffer from the channels and categoriesdelivered by the service provider.

i Satellite radio service may be unavailableor interrupted from time to time for avariety of reasons, such as environmentalor topographic conditions and other thingswe cannot control. Service might also notbe available in certain places (e.g. intunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,or within or next to buildings) or near otherobstructions. In such situations, thesatellite radio’s main menu shows the No Service screen. At this point, the radio’sfunctions are restricted.

Subscribing to satellite radioX Press button $ on audio control unit

repeatedly until Sat is selected.The following conditions are possible:RSatellite radio service is not activated

(only the preview channel is displayed).RSatellite radio service is activated.

i If a satellite receiver is not installed or notproperly installed:The message Device Unavailable willappear.

If the satellite radio service is not activated,the “SIRIUS Preview” display appears.

Satellite radio service is not activatedThe telephone number of the SIRIUS XMService Center and the twelve-digit electronicserial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particularreceiver are required when calling the SIRIUSXM Service Center for an activation request.X$ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q SatQ Service.

X Closing screen: Press W or button kor slide XVY.

X Activating satellite radio service:Contact satellite radio service provider atthe telephone number displayed in theservice display.

After the connection is made:X Follow the instructions given by the

operator.The activation process may take up to10 minutes. If it is successful, you will seethe display with the message Updating Channels... followed by the satelliteradio basic menu.

i Activating the satellite radio service mightnot be available in certain places (e.g. intunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,or within or next to buildings). If asubscription is not included with systempurchase, credit card information isrequired to activate your account.The activation process takesapproximately 5 to 10 minutes after callingthe SIRIUS XM Service Center.

Audio system 153

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 153

Z

If a satellite receiver is not installed or notproperly installed: The message Device Unavailable will appear.

i It is also possible to activate the satelliteradio service online. To do so please visitSIRIUS XM Satellite Radio’s website atwww.sirius.com (USA) orwww.siriuscanada.ca (Canada).

Preview Channel

i If the satellite radio service has not beensubscribed to, only the preview channel isavailable. You cannot tune in anotherchannel. If you try to do this, the messageCall SIRIUS to activate: appears.

Satellite radio service is activatedThe basic satellite radio menu appears. Youwill hear the last tuned channel, provided thatit can be received.

Switching on Sat modeFor important subscription information see“Subscribing to satellite radio” (Y page 153).X Press button $ on audio control unit

repeatedly until Sat is selected.The message No Service will appear whenthe signal is not available. After the audiosystem acquires the signal, the satelliteradio basic menu will appear. The lasttuned station will begin to play.

Main satellite radio menu

: Main area with channel display; Selected program category= Number of selected channel? Selected channelA Sound settingsB Selecting program categoryC Current artist and titleD Channel informationE Preset optionsF Satellite radio options

i Main area : displays only channels thatyou have subscribed to. Which channelsare shown depends on the selectedprogram category ;. Only the currentlyselected channel ? is displayed.Note that categories and channels shownin illustrations are dependent onprogramming content delivered by theservice provider. Programming content issubject to change.Therefore, channel and categories shownin illustrations and descriptions containedin this manual may differ from the channelsand categories delivered by the serviceprovider.

Selecting program categoryi The channels are categorized. Categories

allow you to tune to stations broadcastinga certain type of program.

Satellite radio channels are split up intocategories such as News, Sports, Rock, orCountry, if available. The category list issorted alphabetically.

154 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 154

X Calling up category list: $(repeatedly, if necessary) Q Cat.

orX In Sat mode, slide XVY or rotate cVd untilCat. is highlighted and press W.The category list appears.

X Selecting a category: Slide ZVÆ or rotatecVd.

X Setting the selected category: Press W.The selected program category(alphabetical order) will appear in the audiodisplay. The last tuned channel in the newcategory will begin to play.When searching, tuning in, or selectingfrom the channel list, the All Channelsoption accesses all of your subscribedchannels.

i When you select the category All Channels, you have access to all thechannels you subscribed to, regardless ofcategory.

Tuning in channelsYou have the following selection options:Rthe channel search functionRthe manual channel number entryRthe channel listRthe channel presets

Tuning in channels using channel search functionX Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the main

area in the basic menu is active.Depending on the direction in which thecontroller is being slid or rotated, thesystem searches upward or downward andstops at the next subscribed channel.

orX Press button E or F on audio control

unit.Depending on the pressed button, thesystem searches upward or downward andstops at the next subscribed channel.

i Which channels are available depends onwhich channels you have subscribed to andthe program category you have selected(Y page 154). For tuning in channels youcan also use the buttons on themultifunction steering wheel, see “Audiomenu” (Y page 126).

Tuning in channels using manual channel number entryX$ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q SatQ Enter Channel.The menu for manual channel number entryappears.

orX In Sat mode, press button l on the

keypad in audio control unit briefly.X Channel number entry with keypad:

Enter desired channel number with buttonsk to x with the keypad in audiocontrol unit briefly.

Further operation depends on whether theselected channel number is valid or if thechannel is included in your subscription.X Exiting menu without making an entry:

Press button k in the center console(Y page 141).

Channel number is valid and channel is included in subscription: The audio systemtunes in the channel entered.Channel number is invalid: The messageInvalid Channel appears in the audiodisplay.X The message disappears automatically or

press W to close the message.Channel number is valid, but channel is not included in subscription: The messageCall SIRIUS to activate: appears(Y page 153).X Press W to close the message in the audio

display.

Audio system 155

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 155

Z

Tuning in channels using the satellite radio channel listX$ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q SatQ Channel List.The channel list appears. The dot # infront of a list entry indicates the currentlyselected channel.

X Select channel by rotating cVd or slidingZVÆ.

X Press W to confirm.

i The contents of the channel list dependson which channels are included in yoursubscription and which program categoryyou have selected (Y page 154). Thechannel list contains only the previewchannel if the satellite radio service has notbeen subscribed to.

Tuning in channels using satellite radio channel presetsX$ (repeatedly, if necessary) QPresets.

orX Press W when the main area is selected in

Sat mode.The preset menu appears. The dot # infront of a preset position indicates that thisis the channel currently selected and beinglistened to.

X Select station in memory by rotating cVdor sliding ZVÆ.

X Press W to confirm.orX Press desired station button k tox, with the keypad in audio control unitbriefly.

The audio system tunes in the correspondingchannel as long as it is included in yoursubscription and is still available.If the channel is not included in yoursubscription, the message Call SIRIUS to activate: appears.If the channel is no longer available, themessage Invalid Channel appears.X Closing message: Press W.

Storing channelsi There are ten preset positions available.

X Press W when the main area is selected.orX$ (repeatedly, if necessary) QPresets.

In both cases, the preset menu will appear inthe audio display. The dot # in front of apreset position indicates that the channelcurrently selected is stored there.

156 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 156

X Selecting a preset position: Slide ZVÆ orrotate cVd.

X Storing a preset position: Press and holdW until you hear a signal.The channel is stored.

orX Press and hold desired channel buttonk to x on keypad, until a brief signaltone sounds.The channel is stored.

Displaying informationX$ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Info (if

available).

i If the program provider does not offer anyinformation, the Info menu item cannot beselected.

You will see a screen that may contain thefollowing information:Rthe selected program categoryRthe selected channelRthe artist of the track currently being playedRthe name of the current track

i SIRIUS XM determines what informationis displayed on the screen. If theinformation is too long, the audio systemshortens it.

With the telephone keypad button m youcan call up a popup screen, if provided bySIRIUS XM, that shows the artist and title ofthe current track being played on the selectedchannel.The popup screen disappears automatically.X Closing screen manually: Slide XVY,

rotate cVd, press W or press buttonk.

Calling SIRIUS XM Service Centeri It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS XM

Service Center if, for example:RYou want to cancel the subscription or

re-subscribe at a later date.RYou have questions regarding billing.RYou sell the car.

X$ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q SatQ Service.The telephone number of the SIRIUS XMService Center and the twelve-digitelectronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of theparticular receiver are displayed.

X Closing screen: Slide XVY, press W orpress button k.

Channel updateThe service provider may conduct a channelupdate.During the update, the message Updating Channels... will appear on the audiodisplay.The last tuned channel will be muted until theupdate is completed. You cannot operate thesatellite radio during the update.After completion of the update, the satelliteradio basic menu will appear. The last tunedstation will begin to play. If not available, thenext subscribed channel starts beginningwith channel 1.

Sound settingsFor sound adjustment see:RVolume (Y page 144)RBalance control and fader (Y page 145)RBass and treble control (Y page 145)RSurround sound (Y page 146)

Audio system 157

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 157

Z

CD and MP3 mode

Submenu overview

Menu Submenu

CD or MP3 Normal TrackSequence

Random Tracks

Random Folders(MP3 mode only)

AUX

Track list (Audio CD) or Folder (MP3)

Select track (CDmode only)

Select folder and/ortracks (MP3 modeonly)

Changer(with CD-changeronly)

Select medium

Eject all

Fill empty slots

Sound Treble

Bass

Balance/Fader

Surround sound

i The components and operating principlesof the audio system can be found on(Y page 137) and (Y page 143).

The audio system is fitted with either a singleCD drive or a CD changer.The single CD player and the CD changer canplay audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 orWMA files.The available menu options will varydepending on the equipment and the type ofCD.

Safety precautions

G Warning!The single CD player and the CD changer areclassified as a Class 1 laser product. You mustnot open the casing. There is a risk ofexposure to invisible laser radiation if youopen the casing, or if the casing is faulty ordamaged.The single CD player and the CD changer donot contain any parts that you are able tomaintain yourself. For safety reasons, allmaintenance work must be carried out byqualified technicians.

G Warning!In order to avoid distraction which could leadto an accident, the driver should insert oreject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill andoperate the audio system only if permitted byroad, weather and traffic conditions.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

General notesi Audio CDs with copy protection are not

compatible with the CD audio standard andtherefore may not be able to be played bythe single CD player and/or the CDchanger. There may be playback problemswhen playing copied discs.There is a large variety of discs, disc-writingsoftware and writers available. This varietymeans that there is no guarantee that thesystem will be able to play discs that youhave written/copied yourself.There may be playback problems if you useCD-R or CD-RW type discs you havecompiled yourself with a storage capacityof more than 700 MB. These CDs are notcompatible with currently applicablestandards.

158 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 158

! Do not affix stickers or labels to the CDs,they can become warped due to the heatthat develops in the CD drive or CDchanger.In certain situations, the CDs can then nolonger be ejected and cause damage to thedrive. Such damage is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Your CD drive or CD changer has beendesigned to play CDs which correspond tothe IEC 60908 standard. You can thereforeonly use CDs with a maximum thickness of1.3 mm.If you insert thicker discs, e.g. ones thathave data on both sides (one side with DVDdata, the other side with audio data), theycannot be ejected and will damage thedrive.

Do not use CDs with a diameter of 8 cm.Attempting to play CDs with a diameter of8 cm or playing such CDs with an adapter maycause damage to the CD drive. Such damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.Only use round discs with a diameter of12 cm.Should excessively high or low temperaturesoccur while in CD changer mode, a messagewill appear in the display, and the CD will bemuted until the temperature has reached anacceptable level for the system to continueoperation.

Tips on handling CDsROnly touch the CDs at the edges.RHandle CDs carefully to prevent

interference during playback.RAvoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on

the CDs.RThe CDs must only be labeled using pens

specially designed for this purpose.RClean CDs from time to time with a

commercially available cleaning cloth.Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;

instead, wipe it in a straight line starting inthe center and moving outward. Do not usesolvents, anti-static sprays, etc. forcleaning.RReplace the CD in its case after use.RProtect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.

Notes about MP3 modeThe single CD player and the CD changer canplay audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3/WMA files.

i Due to the branched data structure,playback of the first track may be delayedslightly.

Permissible media for MP3/WMA filesRCD-RRCD-RW

Permissible file systemsRISO9660/Joliet for CDs

Multisession CDsFor multisession CDs, the first session typeof the CD determines how the audio systemwill process the CD.For example, if the first session type isaccording to the audio CD standard and thesecond session type is according to the dataCD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks,the audio system will treat the CD as aconventional audio CD. This means that it isonly possible to access the audio CD tracks.Access to the MP3/WMA tracks is notpossible.Similarly, if the first session type is accordingto the data CD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks and the second session type isaccording to the audio CD standard, the audiosystem will treat the CD as a data CD. Thismeans that it is only possible to access theMP3/WMA tracks. Access to the audio CDtracks is not possible.

Audio system 159

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 159

Z

File structure on a discWhen you create an MP3/WMA disc, theMP3/WMA tracks can be organized infolders.A folder can also contain other folders.A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders.A folder can contain a maximum of 255 tracksand 255 subfolders.A data medium may contain a maximum of500 tracks.The directory depth may not exceed amaximum of 8 levels. The system will ignorefiles in lower levels.

Track and folder namesWhen you create an MP3/WMA disc, you canassign names to the MP3/WMA tracks andfolders.The audio system uses these names for thecorresponding display in MP3 mode. Emptyfolders or folders which contain data otherthan MP3/WMA tracks are not displayed bythe audio system.If MP3/WMA files are saved in the rootdirectory itself (uppermost directory onstorage medium), the root directory will alsobe treated as a folder. The audio system willthen show the name of the root directory asthe folder name.You must observe the following whenassigning track names:RTrack names must have at least one

character.RTrack names must have the extension

“mp3” or “wma”.RThere must be a period between the track

name and the extension.Example of a correct track name:Track1.mp3

The audio system is unable to recognize anMP3/WMA track ifRthere is no period between the track title

and the extensionRthere is no extension

i The audio system does not support ID3tags.

Supported file formatsSupported file formats are:RMP3RWMA

i If music files of file formats other thanMP3 are stored together with MP3 files onone disc, the loading process may takelonger.

Permissible MP3 formatsThe audio system supports the MPEG1 AudioLayer 3 format.

i This format is generally known as “MP3”.Permissible bit and sampling rates are:Rfixed and variable bit rates up to

320 kbit/sRSampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz

i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of atleast 128 kbit/s or higher and a samplingrate of at least 44.1 kHz or higher. Smallerrates can cause a noticeable deteriorationin sound quality. This is especially the caseif you have the surround sound functionactivated.

WMA (Windows Media® Audio)Windows Media® Audio (WMA) is an audiodata compression technology developed byMicrosoft®.The audio system supports the followingtypes of audio files:Rfixed bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to

384 kbit/sRSampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHzThe audio system does not support thefollowing WMA files:RDRM (Digital Rights Management) coded

filesRvariable bit rates

160 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 160

RWMA ProR5.1 Surround

Notes on copyrightThe music tracks that you create and playback in the MP3 and WMA format aregenerally subject to copyright protection inaccordance with the applicable internationaland national regulations.In many countries, reproductions are notpermitted without the prior consent of thecopyright holder, not even for private use.Make sure you know the applicable copyrightregulations and that you comply with these.If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for yourown compositions and recordings, or thecopyright holder has granted you permission,these restrictions do not apply.

Operating the CD playerThe single CD drive and the CD changer havethe same controls.

: CD slot; Load/eject button= Forward? Rewind

Single CD playerX Switching to CD mode: Press buttonh on the audio control unit.The CD display appears when you switch toCD mode. CDs start to play automaticallywhen they are inserted. The followingmessage will appear if no CD is inserted.


! If a CD is already loaded, it must beejected before inserting a new CD.Inserting a second CD in the slot withanother CD still loaded will cause damageto the CD drive which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

X Ejecting a CD: Press load/ejectbutton ;.The system ejects the CD.The message Please Remove Discappears in the display.

X Remove CD from CD slot :.The message NO Disc appears in thedisplay.

i If you do not take the CD out of the CDslot : within approximately 15 seconds,the system automatically pulls the CD backin and plays it.If you change modes (e.g. Radio) when theCD is being ejected, the CD will bereinserted automatically as well.If a CD is pulled back in, press load/ejectbutton ; again; the CD will then beejected.

Audio system 161

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 161

Z

i If the audio CD is printed on one side, thisside must face upwards when loaded. Ifneither side is printed, the side to be playedmust face downwards.If a CD has been inserted incorrectly orcannot be read, Disc Unreadableappears in the display.

X Loading a CD: Insert CD into CD slot :.The system automatically pulls the CD intothe CD slot : and starts to play the audioCD if it has been inserted correctly and ispermissible.

CD changerThe CD changer can hold up to a total of sixaudio CDs.X Switching to CD mode: Press buttonh on the audio control unit.The CD changer display appears when youswitch to CD changer mode. If there is a CDin one of the magazine trays, it will start toplay automatically. The following messagewill appear if no CDs are inserted.


i If the audio CD is printed on one side, thisside must face upwards when loaded. If

neither side is printed, the side to be playedmust face downwards.If a CD has been inserted incorrectly orcannot be read, Disc Unreadableappears in the display.

X Loading an individual magazine compartment: Press load/ejectbutton ;.A menu indicates which magazinecompartments are currently loaded. Thefirst available magazine compartment isindicated by a red number.

X Press desired button k to p in thekeypad to select a magazine compartment.

orX Slide XVY or rotate cVd to select a

magazine compartment.X Press W to confirm.

The CD changer will switch to the selectedmagazine compartment. The messagePlease Wait... appears in the display.

i Only insert a CD after the audio systemhas prompted you to do so with themessage Please Insert Disc <X>. Onlyinsert one CD per magazine compartment.

X Insert CD into CD slot : (Y page 161).The CD changer automatically pulls the CDinto CD slot : and places it in the selectedmagazine compartment. The messageLoading Disc <X> appears in the display.

i The loading process may take a while,depending on the type of disc. If you do notinsert a disc, the display will switch back tothe CD changer menu after approximately20 seconds.

162 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 162

X Press button h, or load/ejectbutton ; (Y page 161) on the audiocontrol unit to finish the loading process.The CD changer plays the disc if it has beeninserted correctly and is permissible.

X Interrupting loading procedure: Pressload/eject button ; again.

orX Press button k in the center console

(Y page 141).X Filling an empty magazine

compartment: Press load/ejectbutton ;.A menu indicates which magazinecompartments are currently loaded. Thefirst available magazine compartment isindicated by a red number.

X Slide VÆ to select the menu bar.X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio

controller to select Fill Empty Slots.X Press the audio controller W.

The message Please Insert Disc <X>appears in the display.

i Only insert a CD after the audio systemhas prompted you to do so with themessage Please Insert Disc <X>. Onlyinsert one CD per magazine compartment.

X Insert CD into CD slot :.The CD changer automatically pulls the CDinto CD slot : and places it in an emptymagazine compartment. The messagePlease Wait... appears in the display. Ifthe CD is loaded, the CD changer willswitch to the next empty magazine

compartment. The message Please Insert Disc <X> appears in the display.

X Repeat the steps until all compartmentshave been loaded.

X Press load/eject button ; on the audiocontrol unit to finish the loading process.The CD changer plays the last loaded discif it has been inserted correctly and ispermissible.

X Interrupting loading procedure: Pressload/eject button ; again.

orX Press button k in the center console

(Y page 141).The loading process has not beencompleted, the audio system will play thelast inserted CD.

Ejecting CDs from CD changer


i If you eject a CD while another is beingplayed, the audio system interruptsplayback.

X Ejecting one CD: Press load/ejectbutton ;.The magazine menu with active main areaappears in the audio display. The magazinecompartment with the current CD ishighlighted.

Audio system 163

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 163

Z

X Press desired button k to p in thekeypad to select a magazine compartment.

orX Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio

controller to select the desired CD.X Press W to confirm.

The CD is ejected.X Remove the CD from CD slot :.

If you do not remove the CD from the CDslot, the CD changer will automatically pullthe CD back in after a short while.

i If audio source is changed during ejectprocedure (e.g. pressing button $) theeject procedure will be aborted and anyCDs being ejected will be drawn back intothe unit.

X Ejecting all CDs: Press load/ejectbutton ;.The magazine menu with active main areaappears in the audio display. The magazinecompartment with the current CD ishighlighted.

X Slide VÆ to select the menu bar.X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio

controller to select Eject All.X Press W to confirm.

The CDs are ejected one after the other.

X Remove the CD from CD slot :.The CD changer switches to the nextoccupied magazine compartment andejects the CD.If you do not remove the CD from CDslot :, the CD changer will automaticallypull the CD back in after a short while.

i If audio source is changed during ejectprocedure (e.g. pressing button $) theeject procedure will be aborted and anyCDs being ejected will be drawn back intothe unit.

X Repeat the last step until the magazine isempty.

Selecting a CDXh Q Changer

The list with the magazine compartmentsappears in the audio display. The magazinecompartment with the current CD ishighlighted.

X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audiocontroller to select the desired CD.


Playing CDsi The following section is valid for the single

CD player and the CD changer. Theillustrations show the audio display of theCD changer.

Additional button functionsIn CD mode, you can use two additionalbuttons on the telephone keypad:m displays information about the track, if

it has been saved with the track on theCD.

l enables you to enter the track numberdirectly.

164 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 164

Example display in audio CD mode

: Track number; Track name (only if saved on the disc)= Elapsed track time? Disc name (only if saved on the disc)A Disc number (CD changer only)B Disc type

Example display in MP3 mode

: Track number; File name= Elapsed track time? Current playback option (visible if

activated)A Folder name (only if saved on the disc)B Disc number (CD changer only)C Disc type

Pause functionX Pausing playback: Press button 8

briefly.X Continuing playback: Press button 8

again briefly.

Selecting a trackX Skipping forwards or backwards to a

track: Rotate cVd or slide XVY.orX Briefly press button E or F on audio

control unit.

i Skipping forwards through the tracksskips to the next track. Skipping backwardsthrough the tracks skips to the beginningof the current track if the track has beenplaying for more than 8 seconds. If thetrack has been playing for less than8 seconds, it skips to the previous track. Ifyou have switched on the Random Tracksplayback option, the order of the tracks israndom.

X Selecting from the track list: h QTrack List.

orX Press W when the main area is selected.

The track list appears. In MP3 mode, thetrack list of the current folder appears. Thedot # indicates the current track.

X Select a track by rotating cVd or slidingZVÆ.


i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracksin alphabetical order.

Fast forward/rewindX Select main area.X Slide and hold XVY until desired position

is reached.orX Press and hold button E or F on

audio control unit.

Selecting a folderi This function is only available in audio

MP3 mode.

Audio system 165

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 165

Z

Xh Q Folder.orX Press W when the main area is selected.

The track list of the current folder appears.X Move to the superordinate folder: Select

the U symbol.The display now shows the next higherfolder level.

X Selecting a folder: Slide ZVÆ or rotatecVd the audio controller, to select thedesired folder.

X Press W to confirm.You will see the tracks in the folder.

i Due to the large amount of information onan MP3 disc it may take a while before allfolder and track information becomesavailable. During this time the folder listmay be unavailable or slow.

X Select a track by sliding ZVÆ or rotatingcVd the audio controller.

X Press W to confirm.The track is played and the correspondingfolder is now the active folder.

Playback optionsThe following options are available:RNormal Track Sequence

Tracks playback in the order on the disc(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).RRandom Tracks

Tracks playback in a random order (e.g.track 3, 8, 5, etc.).RRandom Folder (in MP3 mode only)

Tracks in the active folder and anysubfolders playback in random order.

X Selecting an option: h Q CD/MP3.The option list appears. A dot # indicateswhich option is switched on.

X Select an option and press W.The option is switched on. For all optionsexcept Normal Track Sequence, you willsee a corresponding indicator in the mainarea.

i The Normal Track Sequence option isautomatically activated when you select adifferent medium. If an option is activated,it remains activated after the audio systemis switched on/off.

Audio AUX modeAn external audio source can be connectedto the AUX socket of the audio system. Pleasecontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor more information.

AUX socket : is designed for a 3.5 mmstereo jack (3-pin), for devices with dedicatedanalog audio output or connection viaheadphone port, e.g. MP3 or tape player.

G Warning!Operating an external audio source while thevehicle is in motion will distract you. You maynot notice changing road and/or trafficconditions which may cause an accident.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.For your safety and the safety of others, pullover to a safe location and stop beforeoperating an external audio source.

Calling up AUX mode

G Warning!Due to the different volumes of the externalaudio sources, system messages of the

166 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 166

vehicle may be much louder. You may need todisable these system messages or adjust thevolume of these messages manually.

X Selecting audio AUX mode:Press button h repeatedly until themain menu for AUX operation appears.

orX In CD mode: Select CD/MP3 Q Aux.The audio AUX menu appears. The medium inthe external audio source is heard, providedit is connected and switched to playback.

i Please refer to the relevant operatingguide for operation of the external audiosource.

The following settings can be made in theaudio AUX mode:RVolume (Y page 144)RBalance control and fader (Y page 145)RBass and treble control (Y page 145)RSurround sound (Y page 146)

i The volume of external audio sources isextremely variable. It is possible that adevice connected as an external audiosource will sound quieter or louder in thevehicle or that the usual maximum volumecannot be achieved. On certain devices thevolume can be set separately. In this case,start at a moderate volume and increase itslowly. In this way, you can determinewhether the system is capable of playbackwithout distortion, even at high volume.

Volume adjustment for the audio deviceYou can increase the volume for the AUXsocket in case the internal volume of theconnected audio device is too low. Use thesetting Boost for such devices.You should set the system back toStandard before connecting a different audiodevice to the AUX socket.

X Select Volume in AUX mode.The selection list appears. The dot #indicates the currently selected setting.

: Default setting; Volume boost

Switch back to CD modeX Press button h.orX Select Back To Disc in the audio AUX

menu.

Telephone

Safety precautions

G Warning!Please do not forget that your primaryresponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’sattention to the road must always be his/herprimary focus when driving. For your safetyand the safety of others, we recommend thatyou pull over to a safe location and stopbefore placing or taking a telephone call.If you choose to use the mobile phone17 whiledriving, please use the hands-free device andonly use the mobile phone when road,weather and traffic conditions permit. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

17 Observe all legal requirements.

Audio system 167

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 167

Z

i The functions and services available toyou while using the mobile phone dependon your service provider and the type ofmobile phone you are using. Also seeseparate operating manual of your mobilephone for instructions on how to use yourmobile phone.

When the mobile phone is connected via theBluetooth® interface to the audio system, youcan operate the mobile phone using thefollowing devices:RAudio system (Y page 177)

- Audio controller- Audio control unit

RButtons 6 and ~ on themultifunction steering wheel (Y page 118)RMobile phone keypad or similar input

devicePlease note that these functions are onlyavailable with Mercedes-Benz approvedmobile phones.

TEL Menu

Menu Function

Telephone Bluetooth® Phones

Receive BusinessCard(s) (vCards)

Delete external data

Name Phone book

Call listsMicrophone off/on

Call Lists or Mic On/Mic Off

Delete Call Lists

General notes

Making calls via Bluetooth® interfaceThe audio system telephone function via theBluetooth® interface is available inconjunction with a Bluetooth® enabledmobile phone.

With a suitable mobile phone, you can use thehands-free device and receive electronicbusiness cards (vCards) via the Bluetooth®

interface.

Calls disconnected while the vehicle is in motionInterruptions to the connection may occur ifRthere is insufficient mobile network

coverageRyou move from one mobile network

transmitter/receiver area (mobile networkcell) into another and no channels are freeor the cell is fullRyou are using a SIM card that is not

compatible with the available networkRwhen using a mobile phone with

“Twincard”, the mobile phone issimultaneously logged into the networkwith the second SIM card

Operating optionsi The components and operating principles

of the audio system can be found on(Y page 137) and (Y page 143).

When the mobile phone is connected via theBluetooth® interface to the audio system, youcan operate the mobile phone using thefollowing devices:RButtons 6 and ~ and keypad on

audio control unit (Y page 138)RAudio controller in center console

(Y page 140)RMultifunction steering wheel (Y page 118)Please note that these functions are onlyavailable with Mercedes-Benz approvedmobile phones. Please contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for information onfeatures available for your mobile phone ofchoice.

i In order for the functions described in thissection to work correctly, the Bluetooth®

telephone must be linked to the audio

168 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 168

system. Please make sure any otherBluetooth® device linked with the mobilephone is switched off before you use thetelephone functions with the audio system.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.The head unit internal Bluetooth® transmittermust not be co-located or operated inconjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.This equipment complies with FCC/ICradiation exposure limits set forth foruncontrolled equipment and meets the FCCradio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines inSupplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of theIC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Thisequipment has very low levels of RF energythat it is deemed to comply without testing ofspecific absorption ratio (SAR).Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptionsand illustrations in this section refer to theaudio system.

Caller IDThe audio system can display the telephonenumber and the name of the caller, e.g. for anincoming call and also in other menus ordisplays.For the telephone number to be displayed,the caller must transmit their telephonenumber. Otherwise Unknown will be shown onthe audio display.This is also the case for name displays. Forthis, the telephone number and the name ofthe caller must also be saved in the telephonebook.

Functional restrictionsYou will not be able to use the mobile phone,or you may have to wait a while, in thefollowing situations:RIf the mobile phone is switched off.RIf the mobile phone is not connected via the

Bluetooth® interface to the audio system.

RIf the mobile phone is locked.RIf the mobile phone has not yet acquired a

network signal.The mobile phone automatically tries to loginto a network. If no network is available,you will also not be able to make a “911”emergency call. If you attempt to make anoutgoing call, the No Service message willappear for a short while.RIf you switch off the audio system in the

middle of a call, e.g. by switching off theignition, that call will be cut off. You canprevent this from happening as follows:- Switch the mobile phone to “private

mode” before switching the audiosystem off (see mobile phone operatinginstructions).

Activating the mobile phone

Prerequisites for the mobile phoneFor making calls using the audio system viathe Bluetooth® interface, you will need aBluetooth® enabled mobile phone.Your mobile phone must support theBluetooth® hands-free profile 1.0 or higher tomake or receive calls (see mobile phoneoperating instructions).

i For further information on suitable mobilephones and connecting Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phones to the audio systemRvisit www.mbusa-mobile.comRcall the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (in the USA)Rcall Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)

Activating Bluetooth®

X Switch on the mobile phone (see mobilephone operating instructions).

X Enter the PIN (not necessary with somemobile phones or network).

Audio system 169

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 169

Z

X Activate Bluetooth® connection on themobile phone (see mobile phone operatinginstructions).

X Press button % on the audio control unitto call up the telephone mode.

i On certain mobile phones, not only youwill have to activate the Bluetooth®

function but in addition, your own devicemust be made "visible" for other devices.Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®

device name. It is recommended to giveyour mobile phone a personal name, bywhich you can clearly recognize yourmobile phone.

i If the Bluetooth® function on the audiosystem is disabled, the messageBluetooth not activated in system settings appears.

X Activate Bluetooth® connection on theaudio system (Y page 147).

Xi Q System Q Activate Bluetooth.You have activated or deactivatedBluetooth®. A checkmark appears whenBluetooth® is activated.

Registering a mobile phone (authorizing)When you use your mobile phone inconjunction with the audio system for the firsttime, you must register (authorize) it.It is possible to register up to 15 mobilephones. The connection is always establishedto the last activated mobile phones in signalrange. When you authorize a new mobilephone, it is activated automatically. You canswitch between the authorized mobilephones.

Searching for a mobile phoneX% Q Tel Q Bluetooth PhonesQ Update.The audio system searches for up to 10suitable Bluetooth® telephones withinrange and enters them into the telephonelist.Authorized Bluetooth® telephones will beidentified by a telephone-symbol L in frontof the list entry once the telephone list hasbeen updated. The symbol will be grayedout if the authorized mobile phone is notlocated within the Bluetooth® range.

i The duration of the search proceduredepends on the number and type ofBluetooth® telephones. The search maytake a few minutes.

i If the telephone list is already full(15 entries), you must de-authorize one ofthe authorized devices (Y page 172), andstart the search again. Otherwise a newdevice you are looking for will not appearin the list.If the audio system does not find yourmobile phone, external authorization maybe necessary (Y page 171).

Authorizing a Bluetooth® deviceX Select the desired unauthorized device

from the telephone list by pushing theaudio controller.

orX Select Options Q Authorize.

The input menu for the passcode appears.

170 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 170

i The passcode is any one- to sixteen-digitnumber, which you can set yourself. For thequality of coding of the connection it isrecommend to use a passcode of at leastfour digits. You must enter the samepasscode into the audio system and thedevice to be authorized. Also refer to theoperating instructions of the mobile phone.

On the audio system, you can enter thepasscode via the digits in the on-screen menubar or via the telephone keypad in the audiocontrol unit.With the audio controller:X Entering passcode: Select the digits in the

menu bar one by one, by sliding XVY orrotating cVd the audio controller.

X Press W to confirm each digit.X Confirming passcode: Select ¬ in the

menu bar and press W to confirm.X Deleting digits: Select 2 in the menu

bar and briefly press W to delete one digit,or press and hold W to delete all entereddigits.

X Canceling entry: Press button k in thecenter console (Y page 141).

With keypad on audio control unit:X Entering passcode: Press the desired

numbers on the keypad.X Confirming passcode: Press button6 or button m in the audio controlunit to confirm.

X Deleting digits: Briefly press button2 in the audio control unit to delete onenumber, or press and hold button 2 todelete all entered numbers.

X Canceling entry: Press button k in thecenter console (Y page 141).

Entering passcode into the mobile phoneIf a Bluetooth® connection is establishedsuccessfully, you will be prompted to enter acode into the mobile phone (see mobilephone operating instructions).

X Enter the same passcode on the mobilephone as you did on the audio system.

i You may need to confirm the authorizingon the mobile phone. Check your mobilephone display.If the message Authorization Procedure Unsuccessful appears on theaudio system display, you may haveexceeded the preset period forauthorization. Repeat the process.

The device is authorized. You can now makecalls via the audio system hands-free deviceusing the authorized mobile phone.

External authorizationIf the audio system cannot find your mobilephone, this may be due to special securitysettings on your mobile phone. In this case,you can check whether, conversely, yourmobile phone can find the audio system. Theaudio system’s Bluetooth® device name is“MB Bluetooth”.X% Q Tel Q Bluetooth PhonesQ Update Q Options Q External Authorization.The message Ready for External Authorization appears.

X Start Bluetooth® search procedure on themobile phone (see mobile phone operatinginstructions).

X Select the audio system (“MB Bluetooth”)at your mobile phone.

X When prompted to do so, enter thepasscode on the mobile phone and then onthe audio system.

Displaying details on a mobile phoneX% Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.X Select the mobile phone from the list.

Audio system 171

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 171

Z

X Select Options Q Details.The details screen for the device is shownin the audio display.

X Closing details screen: Slide XVY, rotatecVd or press W, or press button k.

De-authorizing a Bluetooth® deviceX% Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.X Select authorized device.X Select Options Q De-Authorize.

A prompt appears asking whether youreally want to de-authorize this device.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, the device will be de-authorized.

i If you de-authorize a device which hasbeen authorized in the past and which is notdetected in the search, this device will nolonger be displayed in the device list.Devices which have been authorized in thepast but which are not detected in thesearch are either not switched on or not inthe vehicle.

Activating another mobile phoneIf you have several authorized mobile phones,you can switch between the individual mobilephones.

i You cannot switch to another authorizedmobile phone during a call.

When you authorize a new mobile phone, it isautomatically activated. Only one mobilephone can be active at a time.X% Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.X Select an authorized mobile phone from

the list.X Press W to confirm.

The selected mobile phone will be searchedfor and connected if it is located in theBluetooth® range and Bluetooth® isactivated on the corresponding device.The selected mobile phone is activated.

A dot # in front of the entry, indicates thecurrent active mobile phone in the phonelist.

Receiving business cardsYou can import business cards (vCards) intothe address book from external Bluetooth®

devices (Y page 174).

TEL-Basic displayX Press button % on the audio control unit

to call up the telephone mode.When the connected mobile phone is readyfor operation, the display will look similar likethis:

The following information is displayed in thestatus bar:RActual time: 04:38RBluetooth® device name of the connected

mobile phone, in this case: blue_mobile.RMobile phone network signal strengthr. This information will only be shownwith suitable mobile phones.The bars indicate the current signalstrength of the mobile phone network forreception. Optimum reception is indicatedby all bars full. All bars empty indicates verypoor or no reception.RReceiver symbol 6 or ~. The

receiver symbol indicates whether a call isbeing connected or is in progress:~ - not active

172 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 172

RREADY indicates that a call is possible.RNO SERVICE indicates that the mobile

network is not available.

Setting transmit and receive volumei These settings should normally not be

changed as the factory settings arematched to most mobile phones. Find outabout the optimum settings for your mobilephone at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

i Changes may result in significantimpairments to the transmission quality.These settings may not be changed duringan active phone call.

X% Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.X Select a mobile phone from the list.X Select Options Q Reception Volume orTransmission Volume.

X Setting the volume: Slide ZVÆ or rotatecVd the audio controller.The volume bar moves up or down.

X Exiting menu: Press W or slide XVY theaudio controller or press button k.

Emergency calls “911”i The “911” emergency call system is a

public service. Using it without due causeis a criminal offense.

i This function places a call to the local“911” provider. It does not initiate a TeleAid call.

The following describes how to dial a “911”emergency call using the audio system headunit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobilephone is connected via the Bluetooth®

interface to the audio system. Unlessotherwise specified, the descriptions refer tothe audio system head unit.

Consult the separate mobile phone operatinginstructions that came with your mobilephone for information on how to place a“911” emergency call on the mobile phone.The following conditions must be met for a“911” emergency call via the audio system:RMobile phone must be switched on.RThe corresponding mobile

communications network must beavailable.

i Emergency calls may not be possible withall telephone networks or if certain networkservices and/or telephone functions areactive. Check with your local serviceproviders and mobile phone instructions.

If you cannot make an emergency call, youwill have to initiate rescue measures yourself.

Placing a “911” emergency call using audio control unit with the mobile phone unlockedX Press button % to switch to telephone

mode.X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the

audio control unit.X Press button 6.orX Press W for dialing to begin.Connecting... appears in the audiodisplay while the mobile phone establishesthe connection.

X Wait until the emergency call centeranswers, then describe the emergency.

i Depending on the phone type, if no SIMcard is inserted in a GSM mobile phone orif there is no service on a CDMA mobilephone, NO SERVICE may appear in theaudio display. In that case, you only canmake an emergency call on the mobilephone itself, without the use of the audiocontrol unit.

Audio system 173

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 173

Z

Placing a “911” emergency call with the mobile phone lockedi If the mobile phone is locked, you only can

make an emergency call on the mobilephone itself, without the use of the audiocontrol unit.

Phone bookYou can save telephone numbers in the audiosystem’s phone book.

i These entries are retained even if you usethe audio system with another mobilephone. You should delete these entriesbefore handing over or selling your vehicle.

Receiving business cards (vCards)You can import business cards (vCards) fromexternal Bluetooth® phones into your audiosystem’s phone book. To do this:RBluetooth® must be activated on the audio

system and on the external Bluetooth®

phone (see the operating instructions ofthe mobile phone).RThe external Bluetooth® phone must be

able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (see theoperating instructions of the mobilephone).RThe external Bluetooth® phone in the

vehicle must be switched on andauthorized.

i If you switch to a different mode whilevCards are being received (e.g., pressbutton $), reception of vCards will beaborted.

X% Q Tel Q Receive Business Card(s).

X Press W to confirm.X Wait until the message Ready to Receive - Received: 0 appears.

X Importing: Start the data transfer on theexternal Bluetooth® phone (“Export

business cards (vCards)”, see the operatinginstructions of the mobile phone).The audio system imports the data for thebusiness cards and displays the number ofbusiness cards received.

i Select Back or switch to a different modeto abort reception.

X Ending reception: Press W.orX Press button k in the center console

(Y page 141).

Deleting external DataX% Q Tel Q Delete External Data.A prompt appears asking whether the datashould be deleted.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes all personal data are thendeleted from the phone book.

Opening the phone bookX% Q Name.

Entries in the phone book are displayed inalphabetical order. The search speller isactive when more multiple entries areavailable. The search speller appears onthe lower edge of the display.

You can use the search speller to reduce thenumber of entries you need to make.

Symbol G indicates that an entry containsmore than one phone number. You can selectthese subentries (Y page 176).

174 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 174

X Switching from the search speller to the list: Slide ZV repeatedly.

orX Select ¬.X Switching from the list to the search

speller: Press button k.

Selecting an entry

Selecting via search spellerX If necessary, switch from the list to the

search speller.X Switching search speller character

set: Select C.Depending on the previous setting, thisswitches the search speller to letters withspecial characters or numbers with specialcharacters.

X Entering characters: Slide XVY or rotatecVd the audio controller to select thecharacters for the required entry.The first letters you enter determine thefirst letters of the name you are looking for.

X Press W to confirm.The first entry containing the selectedinitial letters is highlighted in the list. Ifthere are a number of similar entries, thenext different character is displayed.

Example:

In the example, the first letters of the namesFisher, Bob and Fisher, Kim are thesame. The first possible distinct letter is theB or the K.Therefore, B and K are offered as possibilities.

X Select the characters for the required entryone after another.As soon as the selection has beennarrowed down to a single entry, the audiosystem will switch to the list automatically.

X Deleting an individual character: Select2 and briefly press W.

orX Press button 2 next to the audio

controller.After entering each character or after eachdeletion of a character, the closestmatching entry is given at the top of the list.

X Deleting an entire entry: Select 2 andpress and hold W until the entire entry hasbeen deleted.

orX Press and hold button 2 until the entire

entry has been deleted.X Ending search: Switch from the search

speller to the list.The top list entry is highlightedautomatically.

Selecting via listX If necessary, switch from the search speller

to the list.

Phone book list

Entries with symbol :G have additionaloptions available, e.g. more phone numbers.X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audio

controller until the desired entry ishighlighted.

X Press W to confirm and a call will beinitiated.

Audio system 175

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 175

Z

Selecting subentriesX Select an entry with the symbol G from

the list and press W.Symbol G changes to I and thesubentries appear.

: Phone book entry with subentries

X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audiocontroller until the desired subentry ishighlighted.

X Press W to confirm and a call will beinitiated.

Depending on the mobile phone and theentries in the mobile phone book, the phonenumbers are assigned to categories. Thecategories are indicated by categorysymbols.

Number category Display

Not classified °

Home @

Work \

Phone category Display

Not classified °

Mobile ¢

Car ^

Pager ï

Displaying details on an entryThe audio system can also fully display anabbreviated entry.X Select entry.X Slide VY to select Options.X Press W to confirm.X Select Details.

A popup screen with the details of theselected entry appears.

X Closing popup screen: Slide ZVÆ, XVY,rotate cVd, press W, or press button2 or k.

Deleting entryX Select entry.X Slide VY to select Options.X Press W to confirm.X Select Delete.

You will be prompted to confirm that youreally want to delete the entry.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes the actual entry is deletedfrom the phone book.

Call listsThe audio system displays the calls received(including missed calls) or made during phonemode in their own lists.

i The particular menu item can only beselected if calls have already been receivedor made from audio system.Displaying missed calls in the audio systemdisplay is not possible with all mobilephones.The control system displays the list ofdialed numbers in the multifunctiondisplay.

i The audio system’s call lists are notsynchronized with the call lists on yourmobile phone. If you make a call from your

176 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 176

mobile phone and only use the audiosystem’s hands-free device, these calls willnot be listed.

Calling up the listX% Q Call Lists.X Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed.The appropriate list appears.

i If there is a symbol with a telephonereceiver in front of the phone number or thename, then you have missed this call (e.g.in the highlighted line of the followingfigure).

X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audiocontroller until the desired entry ishighlighted.

X Initiating call: Press button W or 6.X To close the lists: Press button k.

Deleting call listsi The saved call lists are retained in the

audio system, even if you use the audiosystem with another mobile phone. For thisreason you should delete any call listsbefore handing over or selling the vehicle.

X In the phone main menu select Call Lists.

X Select Delete Call Lists.You will be prompted to confirm that youreally want to delete the entry. Thequestion Do you want to delete the call lists appears in the display.

X Select Yes or No.X Press W to confirm.

If you select Yes both lists are deleted.

Making callsX Press button % on the audio control unit

to call up the telephone mode.When the mobile phone is ready foroperation, the display will look similar likethis:

Initiating an outgoing call

Entering phone number via the audio control unitYou can enter numbers and specialcharacters via the telephone keypad.X Entering: Use x to s, m andl to enter characters.You can enter the * character by pressingbutton l once. You can enter the +character by pressing button l onceand then again within approx. 1.5 seconds.

X Initiating a call: Press button 6.X Deleting individual digits: Briefly press

button 2 in the audio control unit.

Audio system 177

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 177

Z

X Deleting an entire entry: Press and holdbutton 2 until the entire entry has beendeleted.

orX Press button ~.

Entering phone number via the audio controllerIn addition to the actual menu bar, thetelephone main menu features a second barcontaining numbers, the number menu.When the bar is active (highlighted), you canselect elements.

X Entering digits: Slide XVY or rotatecVd the audio controller to select therequired digit.

X Press W to confirm.X Repeat the procedure, until you have select

all digits for the necessary phone number.X Deleting individual digits: Slide XVY or

rotate cVd to select 2 and briefly pressW.

orX Press button 2 next to the audio

controller.X Deleting entire phone number: SlideXVY or rotate cVd to select 2, pressand hold W until the phone number hasbeen deleted.

orX Press and hold button 2 until the entire

entry has been deleted.

orX Press button ~.X Initiating a call: Slide XVY or rotatecVd the audio controller to select ö.

X Press W to confirm.orX Press button 6.

Initiating a call to a phone book entryX% Q Name.X Select entry (Y page 175).X Press button 6 or W.

Initiating a call to a call list entryX% Q Call Lists.X Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed.The appropriate list appears.

X Select entry (Y page 176).X Press button 6 or W.

Redialing

i In order to use the redial function, nonumbers may have been entered.

X Press button 6.orX Select ö and press W.

The dialed calls list appears. The call dialedlast will be at the top of the list.

X Selecting a call: Slide ZVÆ or rotatecVd the audio controller until the desiredentry is highlighted.

X Initiating call: Press button 6 or W.

178 Audio systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 178

Aborting dial or ending a callX% Q ¢ and press W.orX Press button ~ on the audio control unit

or on the multifunction steering wheel.

Rejecting or accepting callsYou will be notified of an incoming call by theringing tone and a message on the display.

i Depending on the mobile phone you areusing, the audio system’s ringing tone maydiffer from the one you have set on yourmobile phone. You may hearRthe ringing tone set on the mobile phoneRthe audio system’s preset ringing toneRthe audio system’s preset ringing tone

and the ringing tone set on the mobilephone

If the caller’s name and number are amongthe entries in the audio system’s phone bookand the caller has not withheld thisinformation, it will appear on the display. Ifthe caller withholds this information, you willsee:

X Accepting: Press button 6 on audiocontrol unit or on the multifunction steeringwheel.

orX Press W.

X Rejecting: Press button ~ on audiocontrol unit.

orX Slide XV or rotate cVd the audio

controller to select Reject, and press Wto confirm.The call is rejected.

If you have accepted the call using the audiocontrol unit, audio controller, or themultifunction steering wheel, the call will beconducted via the hands-free system. Thevolume of the call can be adjusted(Y page 144).Further operating functions can be found inthe “Functions during a single-call” section(Y page 179).You can also accept a call if the audio displayis showing a screen other than the telephonemode screen. After accepting the call, thedisplay switches to the phone display. Oncethe call is over, the display for the previousmode will appear again.

Functions during a single call

Switching hands-free microphone on or offThe menu bar changes when you make orreceive a call. Instead of the Call Listsmenu item, Mic Off or Mic On will appear.X Switching off: Select Mic Off.

The following message will flash up on thedisplay: The microphone is off.When the microphone is switched off thesymbol Q appears in the main area.

X Switching on: Select Mic On.The following message will flash up on thedisplay: The microphone is on.The microphone is switched on and thesymbol Q disappears in the main area.

i You can also switch the microphone on oroff by pressing button 8.

Audio system 179

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 179

Z

Sending DTMF tonesi This function is not possible with all

mobile phones.Answering machines or other devices can becontrolled via DTMF tones, e.g. for remotequery functions.X Transmitting individual characters:

During a call select the requiredcharacters.

orX Press the corresponding button on the

audio control unit.Every selected character is transmittedimmediately.

X Transmitting a phone number of a phone book entry as a sequence of characters: Select Name.

X Select the desired phone book entry.The entry is transmitted immediately as asequence of characters.

X Switching back to call display: SelectBack.

Driving systems

IntroductionThis section describes the following drivingsystems of your vehicle:RCruise controlRHill-start assist systemRAll-wheel drive (4MATIC)RDynamic handling package with sport

driving modeRParktronic system, Canada onlyRRear view cameraThe driving safety systems ABS, AdaptiveBrake, BAS, EBP and ESP® are described inthe “Safety and security” section(Y page 60).

Cruise controlThe cruise control maintains the speed youset for your vehicle automatically.The use of the cruise control is recommendedfor driving at a constant speed for extendedperiods of time.

The currently set speed or last set speed(“Resume” function) appears in themultifunction display for approximately5 seconds. The corresponding cruise controlspeed segments : from the selected speedto the vehicle maximum speed in themultifunction display are illuminated.

G Warning!The cruise control is a convenience systemdesigned to assist the driver during vehicleoperation. The driver is and must alwaysremain responsible for the vehicle’s speedand for safe brake operation.Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,and weather conditions make it advisable totravel at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be

dangerous on winding roads or in heavytraffic because conditions do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be

dangerous on slippery roads. Rapidchanges in tire traction can result in wheelspin and loss of control.RDeactivate the cruise control when driving

in fog.

180 Driving systemsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 180

The “Resume” function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.

G Warning!The cruise control brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.

: Setting current or higher speed ; Setting current or lower speed= Canceling the cruise control? Activating the cruise control or resuming

to last set speed

Activating cruise control You can activate the cruise control at avehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).You cannot activate the cruise controlRwhen you brakeRwhen you have engaged the parking brakeRwhen the automatic transmission is in park

position P, reverse gear R, or neutralposition NRthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off

due to a malfunctionThe vehicle speed displayed in thespeedometer can briefly vary from the speedsetting for the cruise control system.

Setting current speed X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired

speed.X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in

direction of arrow : or press in directionof arrow ;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.

i On uphill grades, the cruise control maynot be able to maintain the set speed. Oncethe grade eases, the set speed will beresumed.On downhill grades, the cruise controlmaintains the set speed by braking with thevehicle’s brake system.Vehicles with automatic transmission:In addition, on longer downhill grades theautomatic transmission will downshiftautomatically.

i Vehicles with manual transmission:If you depress the clutch pedal whenshifting into another gear, the engine speedmay increase.RAlways drive with sufficient, but not

excessive, engine speed.RShift the gear in a timely manner.RAvoid shifting down more than one gear

if at all possible.

Canceling cruise control X Depress the brake pedal.orX Briefly push the cruise control lever in

direction of arrow =.The last set speed is stored for later use.

The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.The cruise control switches off automaticallywhen you depress the brake pedal or youengage the parking brake. In this case, thecruise control speed segments in themultifunction display will go out.

Driving systems 181

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 181

Z

The cruise control also switches offautomatically whenRthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph

(30 km/h)Rthe ESP® is in operationRthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®

switchRthe ESP® has switched off due to a

malfunctionRVehicles with manual transmission: you

engage neutral or depress the clutch pedalfor more than 6 seconds during shifting intoanother gearRVehicles with manual transmission: you

engage a gear too high for the currentspeed and thus the engine speed is too lowRVehicles with automatic transmission: you

shift the automatic transmission intoneutral position N while driving

The cruise control speed segments in themultifunction display goes out and anacoustic warning will sound. Observeadditional messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.Depressing the accelerator pedal does notdeactivate the cruise control. After a briefacceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruisecontrol will resume the last set speed.

Changing the set speed

G Warning!Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

You can increase or decrease the set speedin 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.When you use the cruise control lever todecelerate, the brake system will brake thevehicle automatically if the engine’s brakingpower does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) incrementsi The set speed value is increased or

decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)increments each time you lift or press thecruise control lever up or down to theresistance point.

X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise controllever up to the resistance point in directionof arrow :.

X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruisecontrol lever down to the resistance pointin direction of arrow ;.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is set and the vehicle willaccelerate or decelerate.

Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) incrementsi The set speed value is increased or

decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)increments each time you lift or press thecruise control lever up or down past theresistance point.

X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise controllever up past the resistance point indirection of arrow :.

X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruisecontrol lever down past the resistancepoint in direction of arrow ;.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is set and the vehicle willaccelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind thatit may take a brief moment until the vehiclehas reached the set speed.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 182

Setting stored speed (Resume function)

G Warning!The set speed stored in memory should onlybe set again if prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Possibleacceleration or deceleration differencesarising from returning to the preset speedcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you and others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever indirection of arrow ?.If no speed is stored, the current speed isset and stored.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.

The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.

Hill-start assist systemOn uphill grades, the hill-start assist systemmaintains the pressure in the brake systemfor approximately 1 second after you havereleased the brake pedal. Therefore, you canstart off smoothly without the vehicle movingimmediately after releasing the brake pedal.

G Warning!The hill-start assist system is not designed tofunction as a parking brake. It does notprevent the vehicle from moving when parkedon an incline.Always engage the parking brake in additionto shifting the automatic transmission intopark position P (manual transmission: shiftinto 1st gear or reverse gear R).

X Depress the brake pedal.X Manual transmission: Shift into 1st gear

or reverse gear R.X Slowly release the clutch pedal, removing

your foot from the brake pedal at the same

time, and carefully depress the acceleratorpedal.

X Automatic transmission: Shift into driveposition D or reverse position R.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The hill-start assist system is inactiveRwhen starting off on a level road or downhill

gradesRwith the automatic transmission in neutral

position NRwith the parking brake engagedRif the ESP® has switched off due to a

malfunction

All-wheel drive (4MATIC)In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC),both axles are powered at all times when thevehicle is being operated. The 4MATICimproves traction in conjunction with theESP® (Y page 62) and the Electronic TractionSystem (ETS/4-ETS) (Y page 63).

G Warning!If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficienttraction:RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as

possible.RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator

pedal.RAdapt your speed and driving style to the

prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid.The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidentsresulting from excessive speed.

! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing socould damage the transfer case, which isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty. All wheels must be on or off the

Driving systems 183

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 183

Z

ground. Observe instructions for towing thevehicle with all wheels on the ground.

! Only conduct operational or performancetests on a two-axle dynamometer. If suchtests are necessary, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You couldotherwise seriously damage the brakesystem and/or the transfer case which isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

i In winter operation, the maximumeffectiveness of the 4MATIC is onlyachieved with winter tires (Y page 252) orsnow chains as required.

Dynamic handling package with sport driving mode

The most important part of the dynamichandling package with sport driving mode isthe variable damping system. It adjusts thedamping to the respective driving conditionautomatically.The damping adjustment depends onRyour driving styleRthe road conditionRyour individual selection, see the following

descriptionVehicles with automatic transmission: Thesport driving mode button selects theautomatic shift programs C/S. Forinformation on the automatic shift programs,see “Automatic shift programs”(Y page 111). The automatic transmissionwith dynamic handling package with sportdriving mode contains additional steeringwheel gearshift controls, see “One-touchgearshifting” (Y page 112).

X Start the engine.

Sport driving modeThe firmer suspension tuning in sport drivingmode provides enhanced road contact.Select this mode for example, on windinghighways.The setting remains stored until you turn offthe engine.X Press button ;.

Indicator lamp : comes on. The sportdriving mode is selected. Depending onengine version, the accelerator pedal mayrespond more immediate. In vehicles withautomatic transmission, automaticprogram mode S is selected and will bedisplayed in the multifunction display(Y page 112).

Comfort driving modeVehicle handling in comfort driving mode issofter. Select this mode when you prefer amore comfortable driving style on straightfreeways.X Press button ;.

Indicator lamp : goes out. The comfortdriving mode is selected. In vehicles withautomatic transmission, automaticprogram mode C is selected and will bedisplayed in the multifunction display(Y page 112).


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 184

Parktronic system (Parking assist)This feature is only available in Canadavehicles.The Parktronic system is an electronicparking aid with ultrasonic sensors designedto assist the driver during parking maneuvers.The Parktronic system indicates the relativedistance between the vehicle and an obstaclevisually and audibly.The Parktronic system is activatedautomatically whenRyou switch on the ignition

andRyou release the parking brake

andRvehicles with automatic transmission: the

automatic transmission is in drive positionD, reverse gear R, or neutral position N

The Parktronic system deactivates at speedsabove approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). Atlower speeds, the Parktronic systemactivates again.The Parktronic system also deactivates whenyou shift the automatic transmission intopark position P or engage the parking brake.The Parktronic system monitors thesurroundings of your vehicle with six sensorsin the front bumper and four sensors in therear bumper.

Example illustration, sensors in the front bumper

To function properly, sensors : must be freeof dirt, ice, snow and slush. Cleansensors : regularly. Be careful not to

scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaningthe driving systems sensors” (Y page 263).

G Warning!The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It isnot intended to, nor does it replace, the needfor extreme care. The responsibility duringparking and other critical maneuvers alwaysremains with the driver.

G Warning!Make sure no persons or animals are in ornear the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could beinjured.

! Special attention must be paid to objectswith smooth surfaces or low silhouettes(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,elevated crossbars or road curbs). Suchobjects may not be detected by the systemand can damage the vehicle.During parking maneuvers, pay specialattention to objects located above or belowthe height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). TheParktronic system will not detect suchobjects at close range and damage to yourvehicle or the object may result.

! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, orjackhammers) may impair the operation ofthe Parktronic system.

Range of the sensors

Driving systems 185

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 185

Z

Front sensors

Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)

Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)

Rear sensors



Minimum distance



If the Parktronic system detects an obstaclein this range, all the distance warningsegments illuminate and you hear a warningsignal. If the obstacle is closer than theminimum distance, the actual distance mayno longer be indicated by the Parktronicsystem.

Warning indicators Visual signals indicate the relative distancebetween the sensors and an obstacle.

Front area warning indicators

Rear area warning indicators

Each warning indicator is divided into fiveyellow and two red distance segments for leftside : and right side ; of the vehicle. TheParktronic system is ready to measure whenthe yellow readiness indicators = areilluminated.The current transmission position determineswhich warning indicator will be activated.Manual transmission:

Currenttransmissionposition

Warning indicator

Forward gear orneutral position

Front area activated

Reverse gear Front and rear areaactivated


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 186

Automatic transmission:

Currenttransmissionposition

Warning indicator

D Front area activated

R or N Front and rear areaactivated

As your vehicle approaches an object, one ormore distance segments will illuminate,depending on the distance. When the seventhdistance segment illuminates, you havereached the minimum distance.RFront area: An intermittent acoustic

warning will sound as the first red distancesegment illuminates and a constantacoustic warning lasting a maximum of2 seconds will sound for the second reddistance segment. Vehicles with automatictransmission: The signal is canceled whenthe automatic transmission is shifted intopark position P or the parking brake isengaged. Vehicles with manualtransmission: The signal is canceled whenthe parking brake is engaged.RRear area: An intermittent acoustic

warning will sound as the first red distancesegment illuminates and a constantacoustic warning lasting a maximum of2 seconds will sound for the second reddistance segment. Vehicles with automatictransmission: The signal is canceled whenthe automatic transmission is shifted intodrive position D, or park position P, or theparking brake is engaged. Vehicles withmanual transmission: The signal iscanceled when the manual transmission isshifted into neutral position, or in a forwardgear, or the parking brake is engaged.

Switching the Parktronic system on/off The Parktronic system switches onautomatically when the ignition is switchedon.

X Switching off: Press Parktronicswitch :.Indicator lamp ; comes on.

X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch :again.

Parktronic system malfunction There is a malfunction in the Parktronicsystem, if only the red distance segmentsilluminate and an acoustic warning sounds.The Parktronic system will switch offautomatically after 20 seconds and indicatorlamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.X Have the Parktronic system checked at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soonas possible.

If only the red distance segments illuminateand no acoustic warning sounds, theParktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,ice, snow and slush). Another cause could beinterference from other radio or ultrasonicsignals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, orjackhammers). The Parktronic system willswitch off automatically after 20 seconds andindicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :comes on.

Driving systems 187

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 187

Z

X Switch off the ignition.X Clean the Parktronic system sensors

(Y page 263).X Switch on the ignition.

orX Check the Parktronic system operation at

another location to rule out interferencefrom outside radio or ultrasonic signals.

Rear view cameraThe rear view camera is an optical parking aid.The area behind the vehicle appears in theCOMAND system display as a mirror image,like in the rear view mirror.

G Warning!Make sure no persons or animals are in ornear the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could beinjured.

G Warning!The rear view camera is only an aid and maydisplay obstaclesRfrom a distorted perspectiveRinaccuratelyRmay not display obstacles at all

The rear view camera does not relieve you ofthe responsibility to be cautious. Take careand pay careful attention. The rear viewcamera may not show objects which areRvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRabove the trunk handle

You are responsible for safety at all times andmust continue to pay attention to theimmediate surroundings when parking andmaneuvering. This includes the area behind,in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwiseyou could endanger yourself and/or others.

G Warning!The rear view camera either will not functionor will not function to its full capability ifRthe trunk lid is openRit is raining very hard, snowing or foggyRit is night or you are parking/maneuvering

your vehicle in an area where it is very darkRthe camera is exposed to a very bright white

lightRthe immediate surroundings are

illuminated with fluorescent light (theCOMAND system display can flicker)Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,

e.g. if you drive into a heated garage fromthe cold (lens condensation)Rthe camera lens is dirty or coveredRthe rear of your vehicle is damaged

In this case, have the position and settingof the camera checked by a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you contact a Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Do not use the rear view camera in thesesituations. Otherwise you could injureyourself or others and/or damage propertyincluding your vehicle while parking/maneuvering.

Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,snow, and slush to function properly. Cleanthe camera lens regularly. Being careful notto scratch or damage the camera lens, see


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 188

“Cleaning the rear view camera lens”(Y page 263).

Switching on or offX Switching on: Switch on the ignition.X Make sure the rear view camera is switched

on in the COMAND system. For moreinformation refer to separate COMANDoperating instructions.

X Switch on the COMAND system.X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse

gear R.The area behind the vehicle appears in theCOMAND system display.

i The image from the rear view camera willno longer be displayed if you select anotherfunction on the COMAND system whilereverse gear R is engaged. To display theimage again, disengage and reengagereverse gear R.

X Switching off: Shift the automatictransmission into park position P, neutralposition N, or drive position D.

Climate control system

Control panel

Dual-zone automatic climate control

Function Recommendation/Notes

: Temperaturecontrol, driver’s side

i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 192)

; Climate control on/off

i Switch on/off the climate controlsystem.

(Y page 191)

Climate control system 189

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 189

Z

Function Recommendation/Notes

= Ù on/off (USAonly)

(Y page 195)

º Adoptingdriver’s side settingsfor all zones (Canadaonly)

(Y page 196)

? AC cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 191)

A Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until thewindshield or the side windows are clearagain.

(Y page 194)

B Temperaturecontrol, passengerside

i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 192)

C Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time,e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windowscan fog up due to lack of fresh air.

(Y page 195)

D Rear windowdefroster

(Y page 196)

E Increasing airvolume

(Y page 194)

F Decreasing airvolume

(Y page 194)

G Display

H Air distribution (Y page 194)

I Air distribution andair volume(automatic mode)

i Switch on the automatic mode. Theindicator lamp in button Ã comes on.

(Y page 192)

Notes on climate control systemThe climate control system is operationalwhenever the engine is running. You canoperate the climate control system in eitherthe automatic or manual mode. The systemcools or heats the interior depending on theselected interior temperature.

It can only function optimally when you aredriving with the windows, the tilt/slidingsunroof or tilt/sliding panel closed.Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odorsare filtered out before outside air enters thepassenger compartment through the airdistribution system.

190 Climate control systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 190

G Warning!Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)may require replacement of the filter beforeits scheduled replacement interval. A cloggedfilter will reduce the air volume to the interiorand the windows could fog up, impairingvisibility and endangering you and others.Have a clogged filter replaced as soon aspossible at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

The air conditioning will not engage (nocooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 191) isdeactivated.

G Warning!Follow the recommended settings for heatingand cooling given on the following pages.Otherwise the windows could fog up,impairing visibility and endangering you andothers.

X Keep the air intake grille in front of thewindshield free of snow and debris.

Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects onthe air flow-through exhaust slots below therear window.

i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate theinterior before driving off, see “Summeropening feature” (Y page 99). The climatecontrol will then adjust the interiortemperature to the set value much faster.

Deactivating the climate control system

G Warning!When the climate control system isdeactivated, the outside air supply andcirculation are also deactivated. Only choosethis setting for a short time. Otherwise thewindows could fog up, impairing visibility andendangering you and others.

X Deactivating: Press button ^.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

X Reactivating: Press button ^.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previous settings are once again ineffect.

orX Press button Ã.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.Air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.

Air conditioningThe air conditioning is operational while theengine is running and cools the interior air tothe temperature set by the operator. Inaddition, the air conditioning dehumidifiesthe interior air and helps prevent windowfogging.

G Warning!If you deactivate the air conditioning, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

i Condensated water may drip out fromunderneath the vehicle. This is normal andnot an indication of a malfunction.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerantR134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs whichare harmful to the ozone layer.

DeactivatingIt is possible to deactivate the airconditioning. The interior air will then nolonger be cooled or dehumidified.X Press button ¿.

The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The cooling function switches off after ashort delay.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 191

Z

ActivatingMoist air can fog up the windows. You candehumidify the interior air with the airconditioning.X Press button ¿.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

i The evaporator will be vented when theair conditioning has been in use.Approximately 1 hour after locking thevehicle, the blower switches onautomatically. The blower will run for30 minutes at its lowest level. The blowernoise is normal and not an indication of amalfunction. When you unlock the vehiclein the meantime, venting will beinterrupted. If the vehicle battery is low,automatic evaporator venting will not occurin order to preserve the battery.

Automatic modeWhen operating the climate control system inautomatic mode, the interior air temperature,air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.In automatic mode, cooling withdehumidification is switched on. This functioncan be switched off if necessary.

G Warning!If you deactivate the air conditioning, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

X Set the desired temperature(Y page 192).

X Activating: Press button Ã.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The air volume and air distribution areadjusted automatically.

X Deactivating: Press button I, K or_.The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.The automatic operation of air volume andair distribution switches off. The symbols ofair distribution or air volume appear indisplay G (Y page 189).

X Adjust air distribution (Y page 194).X Adjust air volume (Y page 194).

Setting temperatureYou can adjust the air temperature on eachside of the passenger compartment. Youshould raise or lower the temperature settingin small increments, preferably starting at72‡ (22†).

You can adjust the air temperature on eachside of the passenger compartment. Youshould raise or lower the temperature settingin small increments, preferably starting at72‡ (22†).X Increasing/decreasing: Turn

temperature controls : and B(Y page 189) slightly clockwise orcounterclockwise.

Adjusting air vents

G Warning!When operating the climate control, the airthat enters the passenger compartmentthrough the air vents can be very hot or verycold (depending on the set temperature). Thismay cause burns or frostbite to unprotectedskin in the immediate area of the air vents.Always keep sufficient distance betweenunprotected parts of the body and the airvents. If necessary, use the air distributionadjustment to direct the air to air vents in thevehicle interior that are not in the immediatearea of unprotected skin.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 192

For best possible performance of the climatecontrol:X Keep the air intake grille in front of the

windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, andany other debris.

X Always keep all air vents and grilles in thepassenger compartment free fromobstruction.

i For draft-free ventilation, move theadjustable center and side air vents to themiddle position.

Center air vents

: Left center air vent, adjustable; Right center air vent, adjustable= Thumbwheel for air volume control for

adjustable right center air vent? Thumbwheel for air volume control for

adjustable left center air vent

X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =and ? upward or downward.

Side air vents

Example illustration driver’s side: Left side defroster air vent, fixed; Left side air vent, adjustable= Thumbwheel for air volume control for

adjustable left side air vent

X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =upward or downward.

Ventilated glove boxThe glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents, when the climate controlsystem is activated. The level of airflow to theglove box depends on the airflow and airdistribution settings. The temperature of theair is approximately the same as that of theair flowing from the center air vents.

! Close the glove box air vent when heatingthe vehicle interior. Activate the airconditioning (cooling function) when theoutside temperature is high. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove box could be damaged.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 193

Z

: Thumbwheel; Air vent

X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :clockwise or counterclockwise.

Rear center console air vents

: Thumbwheel for air volume control forrear center air vents

; Right rear center air vent, adjustable= Left rear center air vent, adjustable

X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :upward or downward.

Adjusting air distributionThe symbols shown in display G(Y page 189) on the climate control panelrepresent the following functions:

Symbol Function

¯ Directs air through thedefroster air vents to thewindshield and front doorwindows

P Directs air through the centerand side air vents

O Directs air to the footwells

N Directs air through the centerand side air vents and to thefootwells

_ Directs air into the entirevehicle interior (Canada only)

b Directs air through the center,side and defroster air vents tothe windshield and front doorwindows (Canada only)

a Directs air through thedefroster air vents to thewindshield and front doorwindows and to the footwells

X Press button _ repeatedly until youhave select the desired setting and thecorresponding symbol is shown in displayG.

Adjusting air volumeX Decreasing/increasing: Press buttonI or K.

Front defrosterYou can use this setting to defrost thewindshield, for example if it is iced up.You can also defog the windshield and thefront door windows.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 194

i Keep this setting selected only until thewindshield or the front door windows areclear again.

X Activating: Press button ¬.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

The climate control switches to the followingfunctions automatically:Rcooling on to dehumidifyRmost efficient blower speed and heating

power, depending on outside temperatureRair flows onto the windshield and the front

door windowsRthe air recirculation mode is switched off

i You can adjust the air volume when thefront defroster is switched on.

X Deactivating: Press button ¬ again.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previous settings are once again ineffect. The cooling remains switched on.The air recirculation remains switched off.

orX Press button Ã.

The indicator lamp in button ¬ goes out.Air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.

i To deactivate defrosting, you can alsopress button ^ or turn temperaturecontrols.

Windshield fogged on the outside X Switch the windshield wipers on

(Y page 96).If the automatic mode of the climate controlis switched off:X Press button _ repeatedly until one of

the following symbols appears in displayG (Y page 189) P or O.

Maximum cooling MAX COOLMAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles.

MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.You can use this setting to provide the fastestpossible cooling of the vehicle interior (whenwindows and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel are closed).X Activating: Press button Ù.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The climate control switches automatically tothe following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum blowing powerRthe air recirculation mode is switched onX Deactivating: Press button Ù again.

The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previous settings are once again ineffect.

i To switch the maximum cooling functionoff, you can also press button ^, Ãor ¬.

Air recirculation modeSwitch to air recirculation mode to preventunpleasant odors from entering the vehiclefrom the outside (e. g. before driving througha tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake ofoutside air and recirculates the air in thepassenger compartment.

G Warning!Fogged windows impair visibility,endangering you and others. If the windowsbegin to fog on the inside, switching off theair recirculation mode immediately shouldclear interior window fogging. If interiorwindow fogging persists, make sure the airconditioning is activated, or press button¬.

X Activating: Press button g.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 195

Z

i The air recirculation mode is activatedautomatically at high outsidetemperatures.The indicator lamp in button g is not litwhen the air recirculation mode is switchedon automatically.A quantity of outside air is added afterapproximately 30 minutes.

X Deactivating: Press button g again.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

i The manually selected air recirculationmode is deactivated automatically:Rafter 5 minutes if the outside

temperature is below approximately41‡ (5†)Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is

turned offRafter 30 minutes if the outside

temperature is above approximately41‡ (5†)

Using driver-side settings for passenger side

This feature is only available in Canadavehicles.You can use the settings of the driver’s side,such as temperature, air volume and airdistribution, for the passenger side.X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air

volume and air distribution.X Press button ¸.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The driver-side settings are used for thepassenger side.

X Deactivating: Press button ¸ again.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

Rear window defroster

G Warning!Any accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the rear window before driving.Visibility could otherwise be impaired,endangering you and others.

The rear window defroster uses a largeamount of power. To keep the battery drainto a minimum, switch off the defroster assoon as the rear window is clear. Thedefroster is switched off automatically aftersome time of operation depending on theoutside temperature.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press button ¤ on the

respective climate control panel.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

X Switching off: Press button ¤ again.The rear window defroster switches off whenthe battery voltage is too low. Too manyelectrical consumers may be operatingsimultaneously.X Switch off consumers that are currently not

needed if required.

Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Opening and closing


G Warning!When opening or closing the tilt/slidingsunroof, make sure there is no danger ofanyone being harmed by the opening/closingprocedure.The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with theexpress operation and automatic reversalfunction. If the movement of the tilt/slidingsunroof is blocked during the closingprocedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stopand open slightly.

196 Power tilt/sliding sunroofCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 196

The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differentlywhen the sunroof switch is pressed and held.See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroofis blocked” section for details.The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted byreleasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroofswitch was moved past the resistance pointand released, by moving the sunroof switch inany direction.

G Warning!The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.In the event of an accident, the glass mayshatter. This may result in an opening in theroof.In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearingtheir seat belts or not wearing them properlymay be thrown out of the opening. Such anopening also presents a potential for injury foroccupants wearing their seat belts properly asentire body parts or portions of them mayprotrude from the passenger compartment.

! To avoid damaging the seals, do nottransport any objects with sharp edgeswhich can stick out of the tilt/slidingsunroof.Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if thereis snow or ice on the roof, as this couldresult in malfunctions.If you cannot open or close the tilt/slidingsunroof due to a malfunction contactRoadside Assistance or an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Please keep in mind that weatherconditions can sometimes change rapidly.Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroofwhen leaving the vehicle. If water entersthe vehicle interior, vehicle electronicscould be damaged which is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i You can also open or close the tilt/slidingsunroof using the SmartKey or theKEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer

opening feature” (Y page 99) and“Convenience closing feature”(Y page 100).

i After switching off the ignition orremoving the SmartKey from the starterswitch, you can operate the tilt/slidingsunroof until you open the driver’s or frontpassenger door. If no door was opened youcan operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for upto 5 minutes.

Sunroof switch: Raising; Opening= Closing

Sunroof screen

X Switch on the ignition.

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 197

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 197

Z

OpeningX Opening manually: Press and hold the

sunroof switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow ;.

X Release the sunroof switch when thedesired position is reached.

X Express operation: To open the tilt/sliding sunroof completely, press thesunroof switch past the resistance point indirection of arrow ; and release.

X Stopping during express operation:Move the sunroof switch in any direction.

i Express opening is not available when thetilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/sliding sunroof must be closed first.

i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,resonance noises may result in addition tothe usual wind noises. They are caused byminimal pressure changes in the passengercompartment. To reduce or eliminate thesenoises, change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.

RaisingX Raising manually: Press and hold the

sunroof switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow :.


X Express operation: To raise the tilt/sliding sunroof completely, press thesunroof switch past the resistance point indirection of arrow : and release.


i Express raising is not available when thetilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/slidingsunroof must be closed first.

ClosingX Closing manually: Pull and hold the

sunroof switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow =.


X Express operation: To close the tilt/sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroofswitch past the resistance point indirection of arrow = and release.


Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is blockedG Warning!Make sure that nobody can become trappedand be seriously or even fatally injured whenclosing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greaterforce or without automatic reversal function.

If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof isblocked during the closing procedure (e.g. byice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof willstop and open slightly.X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof

has stopped and opened because it wasblocked, pull and hold the sunroof switchin direction of arrow = until the tilt/slidingsunroof is fully closed.The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greaterforce.

If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again andopens slightly:X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof

was blocked and has opened, pull and holdthe sunroof switch in direction of arrow= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fullyclosed.The tilt/sliding sunroof closes withoutautomatic reversal function.

G Warning!Pulling and holding the sunroof switch toclose the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately

198 Power tilt/sliding sunroofCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 198

after it had been blocked two times will causethe tilt/sliding sunroof to close without anyreversal function for as long as you hold thesunroof switch.

SynchronizingThe tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronizedafter a malfunction or if it does not opensmoothly.

! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closedor synchronized, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call RoadsideAssistance.

X Switch on the ignition.X Press and hold the sunroof switch in

direction of arrow : (Y page 197) until thetilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at therear.

X Keep holding the sunroof switch indirection of arrow : for approximately1 second.

X Check the express operation feature(Y page 198).If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closescompletely, the roof is synchronized.Otherwise repeat the above steps.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Extending and retracting the roller sunblinds

The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and rear rollersunblind cannot be operated individually.

G Warning!When extending the roller sunblinds, makesure no one is in danger of being injured bythe extending procedure.The roller sunblinds are equipped with theexpress operation and automatic reversal

function. If the movement of the rollersunblinds is blocked during the extendingprocedure, the roller sunblinds will stop andretract slightly.The extending of the roller sunblinds can beimmediately halted by releasing the roof panelswitch or, if the roof panel switch was movedpast the resistance point and released, bymoving the roof panel switch in any direction.

Roof panel switch: Retracting; Retracting= Extending

X Switch on the ignition.X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof

panel switch to the resistance point in therequired direction of arrow :, ; or =until the roller sunblinds have reached theirdesired position.

X Express operation: Move the roof panelswitch past the resistance point indirection of arrow :, ; or = and release.The roller sunblinds retract/extendcompletely.

X Stopping during express operation:Move the roof panel switch in any direction.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 199

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 199

Z

Opening and closing the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel


G Warning!When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel,make sure there is no danger of anyone beingharmed by the opening/closing procedure.The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with theexpress operation and automatic reversalfunction. If the movement of the tilt/slidingpanel is blocked during the closing procedure,the tilt/sliding panel will stop and openslightly.The tilt/sliding panel operates differentlywhen the roof panel switch is pressed andheld. See the “Closing when the tilt/slidingpanel is blocked” section in this chapter fordetails.The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding panel can be immediately halted byreleasing the roof panel switch or, if the roofpanel switch was moved past the resistancepoint and released, by moving the roof panelswitch in any direction.

G Warning!The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel ismade out of glass. In the event of an accident,the glass may shatter. This may result in anopening in the roof.In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearingtheir seat belts or not wearing them properlymay be thrown out of the opening. Such anopening also presents a potential for injury foroccupants wearing their seat belts properly asentire body parts or portions of them mayprotrude from the passenger compartment.

! To avoid damaging the seals, do nottransport any objects with sharp edgeswhich can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there issnow or ice on the roof, as this could resultin malfunctions.

! Please keep in mind that weatherconditions can sometimes change rapidly.Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panelwhen leaving the vehicle. If water entersthe vehicle interior, vehicle electronicscould be damaged which is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Roof panel switch: Raising; Opening= Closing

The tilt/sliding panel only operates with theroller sunblinds retracted.

i You can also open or close the tilt/slidingpanel using the SmartKey, see “Summeropening feature” (Y page 99) or see“Convenience closing feature”(Y page 100).

X Switch on the ignition.

OpeningX Opening manually: Press and hold the

roof panel switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow ;.

X Release the roof panel switch when thedesired position is reached.

X Express operation: To open the tilt/sliding panel completely, press the roofpanel switch past the resistance point indirection of arrow ; and release.


200 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 200

i When the tilt/sliding panel is open,resonance noises may result in addition tothe usual wind noises. They are caused byminimal pressure changes in the passengercompartment. To reduce or eliminate thesenoises, change the position of the tilt/sliding panel or open a window slightly.

RaisingX Raising manually: Press and hold the roof

panel switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow :.


X Express operation: To raise the tilt/sliding panel completely, press the roofpanel switch past the resistance point indirection of arrow : and release.


i Express raising is not available when thetilt/sliding panel is open. The tilt/slidingpanel must be closed first.

ClosingX Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof

panel switch to the resistance point indirection of arrow =.


X Express operation: To close the tilt/sliding panel completely, pull the roof panelswitch past the resistance point indirection of arrow = and release.


Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is blockedG Warning!Make sure that nobody can become trappedand be seriously or even fatally injured when

closing the tilt/sliding panel withoutautomatic reversal function.

If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel isblocked during the closing procedure (e.g. byice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stopand open slightly.X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has

stopped and opened because it wasblocked, pull and hold the roof panel switchin direction of arrow = until the tilt/slidingpanel is fully closed.

If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again andopens slightly:X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was

blocked and has opened, pull and hold theroof panel switch in direction of arrow =until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.The tilt sliding panel closes withoutautomatic reversal function.

G Warning!Pulling and holding the roof panel switch toclose the tilt/sliding panel immediately afterit had been blocked two times will cause thetilt/sliding panel to close without any reversalfunction for as long as you hold the roof panelswitch.

SynchronizingThe tilt/sliding panel and front rollersunblinds must be synchronized after amalfunction or if the tilt/sliding panel doesnot open smoothly.

! Do not attempt to open the tilt/slidingpanel before the tilt/sliding panel isproperly synchronized. The tilt/slidingpanel could otherwise lock-up in the openposition.If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed orsynchronized, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call RoadsideAssistance.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 201

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 201

Z

X Switch on the ignition.X Push and hold the roof panel switch in

direction of arrow ; (Y page 199) until theroller sunblinds are fully retracted.

X Push and hold the roof panel switch indirection of arrow ; until the tilt/slidingpanel is opened approximately 4 inch(10 cm).

X Pull and hold the roof panel switch indirection of arrow = until the tilt/slidingpanel is fully closed.

X Keep holding the roof panel switch indirection of arrow = for approximately1 second.

X Pull and hold the roof panel switch indirection of arrow = (Y page 199) until theroller sunblinds are fully extended.

X Keep holding the roof panel switch indirection of arrow = for approximately1 second.

X Check the express operation feature of thetilt/sliding panel (Y page 200).If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely,the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeatthe above steps.

Loading and storing

Loading instructions

G Warning!Always fasten items being carried as securelyas possible using fastening materialsappropriate for the weight and size of theload.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo. Do not pile luggage orcargo higher than the seat backrests.

The trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects. Do not place anything on the rear-window shelf.Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open.Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases mayenter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

Load distribution

The total load weight including vehicleoccupants and luggage/cargo should notexceed the total load limit indicated on thecorresponding Tire and Loading Informationplacard located on the driver’s door B-pillar(Y page 238).The handling characteristics of a fully loadedvehicle depend greatly on the loaddistribution. It is therefore recommended toload the vehicle according to the illustrationshown. The heaviest items are to be placedtowards the front of the vehicle.

i The enlarged cargo area should only beused for items which do not fit in the trunkalone.

Please pay attention to and comply with thefollowing instructions when loading thevehicle and transporting cargo:RAlways place items being carried against

front or rear seat backrests, and fastenthem as securely as possible.RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should

always be kept as low as possible againstfront or rear seat backrests.

202 Loading and storingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 202

Roof rackFor information about further roof rackequipment, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G Warning!Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damageto the vehicle.Follow the manufacturer’s installationinstructions. Otherwise, an improperlyattached roof rack system or its load couldbecome detached from the vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum roof load of220 lb (100 kg).Take into consideration that when the roofrack is loaded, the handling characteristicsare different from those when operating thevehicle without the roof rack loaded.

Make sureRyou can raise the power tilt/sliding sunroof

or the panorama roof with tilt/sliding panelcompletelyRyou can open the trunk completely

X Flip trim covers : open.X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage

points under trim covers :.X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for

installation.

Parcel nets

G Warning!Parcel nets are intended for storing light-weight items only, such as road maps, mail,etc.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, orfragile objects may not be transported in theparcel nets. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Parcel nets cannot protect transported goodsin the event of an accident.

Parcel nets are located in the front passengerfootwell and on the left trunk side wall.

Cargo tie-down ringsVehicles with split rear seat bench areequipped with four cargo tie-down rings.Always follow loading instructions(Y page 202).

HooksTwo retaining hooks can be used to attachcargo items such as bags.

! Do not use the retaining hooks to tie downcargo.

Loading and storing 203

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 203

Z

Use retaining hooks to secure light-weightitems only. The maximum permissible weightper retaining hook is 6,6 lbs (3 kg).

Split rear seat benchTo expand the cargo volume, you can folddown the left and right rear seat backrests.The two sections can be folded downseparately.

G Warning!When expanding the cargo volume, alwaysfold the seat cushions fully forward.Unless you are transporting cargo, the seatbackrests must remain properly locked in theupright position.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.

Folding seat backrest forwardX Open the trunk.

X Pull on left and/or right release handle :.X Fully retract the head restraints

(Y page 83).X If necessary, pull the driver’s and/or front

passenger seat forward (Y page 80).

X Fold seat backrests ; forward.X Adjust front seats to desired position

(Y page 80).

Setting up seat backrest

X Fold seat backrest : rearward until itengages.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 204

! Make sure that the seat belt is notpinched.

X Check for secure locking by pushing andpulling on the seat backrest.

X Adjust head restraints, if necessary(Y page 83).

X Adjust front seats to desired position(Y page 80).

G Warning!Always lock the seat backrest in its uprightposition when the rear seat bench isoccupied, or the extended cargo volume is notin use.Check for secure locking by pushing andpulling on the seat backrest.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo.

i To prevent unauthorized persons fromaccess to the trunk, always lock the seatbackrests in its upright position.

Front storage compartments

G Warning!To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whenstoring objects in the vehicle. Put luggage orcargo in the trunk if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will helpto prevent stored objects from being thrownabout and injuring vehicle occupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident

Glove box Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUXsocket or a media interface is located in theglove box. For information on Audio AUXmode, see (Y page 166) or on mediainterface, see separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.The glove box can be ventilated(Y page 193).

X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.

X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwardsuntil it engages.

You can lock the glove box, e.g. when thevehicle is in the shop for service.The glove box can only be locked or unlockedwith the mechanical key.

Loading and storing 205

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 205

Z

1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box locked

Front armrest storage compartments

i There is a small and a large storagecompartment located underneath thearmrest. The small storage compartmentcan be removed for the purpose ofemptying.

X Opening storage compartments: Pressbutton : or ;.The armrest opens to the left and the rightside automatically.

X Closing storage compartments: Swingthe left and/or right armrest backwarduntil it engages.

Rear storage compartments

G Warning!To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whenstoring objects in the vehicle. Put luggage orcargo in the trunk if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests.Keep compartment lids closed. This will helpto prevent stored objects from being thrownabout and injuring vehicle occupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident

Rear armrest storage compartment ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight

against the armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

! Before storing the armrest in the seatbackrest, close the storage compartmentcover.

X Fold the rear armrest down.

X Opening: Pull release catch : and swingthe storage compartment cover upward indirection of arrow.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 206

Storage bags

G Warning!Storage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in thestorage bag. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.

Storage bags are located on the back of thefront seats.

Useful features

Cup holders

G Warning!In order to help prevent spilling liquids onvehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,only use containers that fit into the cupholder. Use lids on open containers and donot fill containers to a height where thecontents, especially hot liquids, could spillduring braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in anaccident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupantsmay cause serious personal injury. Liquidsspilled on vehicle equipment may causedamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.An open cup holder may cause injury to youor others when contacted during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.Keep in mind that objects placed in the cupholder may come loose during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and bethrown around in the vehicle interior. Objectsthrown around in the vehicle interior maycause an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

Cup holder in front center consoleA cup holder : is located in the front centerconsole.

Cup holder in rear armrest X Opening: Open rear armrest storage

compartment (Y page 206).

X Press release button :.Cup holder ; swings out and opensautomatically.

X Close rear armrest storage compartment.X Closing: Open rear armrest storage

compartment (Y page 206).X Swing cup holder ; backward until it

engages.X Close rear armrest storage compartment.

! Do not sit on or lean your body weightagainst the armrest when it is folded down,as you could otherwise damage it.

Useful features 207

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 207

Z

! Close the cup holder before folding thearmrest upwards. Otherwise you coulddamage the cup holder.

Sun visors

G Warning!Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visorsclosed while vehicle is in motion. Reflectedglare can endanger you and others.

: Vanity mirror lamp; Mounting= Holder, e.g. for gas cards? Vanity mirrorA Vanity mirror cover

Glare through the windshieldX Flip sun visor down when you experience

glare.

Glare through a door windowX Close vanity mirror cover A if opened.X Disengage sun visor from mounting ;.X Pivot sun visor to the side.

X Adjust sun visor by pushing or pulling.

Vanity mirrorThe vanity mirror lamp only functions whenthe sun visor is engaged in mounting ;.X Lift up vanity mirror cover A.

Vanity mirror lamp : comes on.

Rear window sunshade

G Warning!When operating the rear window sunshademake sure there is no danger of anyone beingharmed by the extending or retractingprocedure.The extending or retracting procedure can beimmediately halted by briefly pressing rearwindow sunshade switch. To reverse directionof movement, press rear window sunshadeswitch again.


208 Useful featuresCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 208

X Switch on the ignition.X Extending/Retracting: Press rear

window sunshade switch : briefly.

Ashtrays

Center console ashtray i A storage compartment is located under

the ashtray insert.

! The storage compartment is not heat-proof. When smoking always make sure theashtray insert is present and properlyinserted.

X Opening: Press cover ; forward until itengages.

X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtrayinsert : on the grooved side and pull it upand out in the direction indicated byarrows.

X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtrayinsert : back into the frame until itengages.

X Closing: Tap the front of cover ;.

Rear center console ashtray

X Opening: Pull at top of cover ;.

X Removing ashtray insert: Push button= to disengage ashtray insert : andremove it.

X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtrayinsert : down into the retainer until itengages.

X Closing: Push at top of cover ;.

Cigarette lighter


G Warning!Never touch the heating element or sides ofthe lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold theknob only.Make sure any children traveling with you donot injure themselves or start a fire with thehot cigarette lighter.

If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter isbeing used extensively, the vehicle batterymay become discharged.

Useful features 209

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 209

Z

X Switch on the ignition.X Open cover : (Y page 209).X Push in cigarette lighter ;.

Cigarette lighter ; will pop outautomatically when hot.

X Take out cigarette lighter ;.X Reinsert cigarette lighter ; in its socket

after use.

Power outletsThe power outlets can be used toaccommodate 12V DC electrical accessories(e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).If the engine is off and the power outlets arebeing used extensively, the vehicle batterymay become discharged.X Switch on the ignition.

Power outlet in glove boxX Open glove box (Y page 205).

Power outlet in rear passenger compartment

X Pull at top of cover :.

Compass

i In order to receive an accurate reading inthe interior rear view mirror :, thecompass must be calibrated and themagnetic field zone set.

X Calling up the compass: Press button= briefly.The compass displays the direction intowhich the vehicle is currently traveling: N,NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.

X Compass adjustment: Determine yourlocation on the basis of the following zonemaps.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 210

Zone map North America

Zone map South America

X Press button = approximately 3 seconds.The currently selected zone appears incompass display ;.

X Selecting zone: Press button = until thedesired zone is selected.Do not press the button again until thedirection is indicated.

X Compass calibration: Make sure you arein an area where you can drive a full circlewith your vehicle without disturbing trafficin order to calibrate the compass.

In order to calibrate the compass properly,mind the following:RCalibrate the compass in open terrain.

Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines andlarge antenna masts, for example, couldimpair compass calibration.RSwitch off electrical consumers (e.g.

climate control, windshield wipers, or rearwindow defroster).RClose all doors and the trunk.X Start the engine.X Press button = approximately 6 seconds

until symbol C appears in compassdisplay ;.

X Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed ofbetween 3 mph (5 km/h) and 6 mph(10 km/h).When calibration was successful, thecurrent direction appears in compassdisplay ;.

Tele Aid! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a

subscriber agreement must be completed.To ensure your system is activated andoperational, please press Informationbutton ï to perform the acquaintancecall. Failure to complete either of thesesteps may result in a system that is notactivated.If you have any questions regardingactivation, please call the CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canadaonly).

Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aidacquaintance call, you will receive a user IDand password in the mail. You may use thispassword to access the Tele Aid section in“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USAonly). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you

Useful features 211

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 211

Z

access to account information, remote doorunlock and more.The Tele Aid system is available ifRit has been activated and is operational.

Activation requires a subscription formonitoring services, connection andcellular air timeRvehicle battery power is availableRthe relevant cellular phone network and

GPS signals are available and pass theinformation on to the Customer AssistanceCenter

i Location of the vehicle on a map is onlypossible if the vehicle is able to receivesignals from the GPS satellite network andpass the information on to the CustomerAssistance Center.

The Tele Aid system(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)The Tele Aid system consists of three typesof response:RAutomatic and manual emergencyRRoadside AssistanceRInformation

To adjust the speaker volume during a TeleAid call do the following:X Press button W or X on the

multifunction steering wheel.orX Use the rotary control on the audio system

(Y page 144).Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” atwww.mbusa.com (USA only) for moreinformation and a description of all availablefeatures.

System self-test The system performs a self-test after youhave switched on the ignition.

G Warning!A malfunction in the system has beendetected if any or all of the followingconditions occur:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the Roadside

Assistance button F does not come onduring the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the Information

button ï does not come on during thesystem self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button,

Roadside Assistance button F, orInformation button ï remainsilluminated constantly in red after thesystem self-test.RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative orTele Aid Not Activated appears in themultifunction display after the system self-test

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. Incase of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestMercedes-Benz Center or contact theCustomer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)as soon as possible.

Emergency calls ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a

subscriber agreement must be completed.To ensure your system is activated andoperational, please press Informationbutton ï to perform the acquaintancecall. Failure to complete either of thesesteps may result in a system that is notactivated.If you have any questions regardingactivation, please call the CustomerAssistance Center at


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 212

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canadaonly).

An emergency call is initiated automaticallyfollowing an accident in which the EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags havedeployed.

i An automatically initiated Tele Aidemergency call cannot be canceled.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually (Y page 213).Once the emergency call is in progress, theindicator lamp in the SOS button will begin toflash. The message Connecting Callappears in the multifunction display and theCOMAND system is muted. When theconnection is established, the messageCall Connected appears in themultifunction display.All information relevant to the emergency,such as the location of the vehicle(determined by the GPS satellite locationsystem), vehicle model, identification numberand color are generated.A voice connection between the CustomerAssistance Center and the occupants of thevehicle will be established automatically soonafter the emergency call has been initiated.The Customer Assistance Center will attemptto determine the nature of the emergencymore precisely, provided they can speak toan occupant of the vehicle.

i If no vehicle occupant responds, anambulance will be sent to the vehicleimmediately.

G Warning!If the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Customer AssistanceCenter established, then the Tele Aid systemcould not initiate an emergency call (e.g. therelevant cellular phone network is notavailable).

The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must besummoned by other means.

i The “911” emergency call system is apublic service. Using it without due causeis a criminal offense.

Initiating an emergency call manually

X Briefly press on cover : to open.X Press SOS button ; briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button ; willflash until the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theCustomer Assistance Center.

X Close cover : after the emergency call isconcluded.

G Warning!If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,vehicle in a dangerous road location), pleasedo not wait for voice contact after you havepressed the emergency button. Carefullyleave the vehicle and move to a safe location.The Customer Assistance Center willautomatically contact local emergencyofficials with the vehicle’s approximatelocation if they receive an automatic SOSsignal and cannot make voice contact with thevehicle occupants.

Useful features 213

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 213

Z

X Terminating calls: Press button ~ onthe multifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the respective button for ending a

telephone call on the audio system or theCOMAND system.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press and hold Roadside Assistancebutton : for longer than 2 seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance dispatcher will be initiated. Theindicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton : will flash while the call is inprogress. The message Connecting Call will appear in the multifunctiondisplay and the audio system or theCOMAND system is muted.

When the connection is established, themessage Call Connected appears in themultifunction display. The Tele Aid system willtransmit data generating the vehicleidentification number, model, color andlocation (subject to availability of cellular andGPS signals).

i The audio system or COMAND systemdisplay indicates that a Tele Aid call is inprogress. While the call is connected youcan change to the navigation menu bypressing the NAVI button on the COMANDsystem. Spoken commands are notavailable.

A voice connection between the RoadsideAssistance dispatcher and the occupants ofthe vehicle will be established.X Describe the nature of the need for

assistance.The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistancedispatcher will either dispatch a qualifiedMercedes-Benz technician or arrange to towyour vehicle to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. For services such aslabor and/or towing, charges may apply.Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual formore information.Sign and Drive services (USA only):Services such as a jump start, a few gallonsof fuel or the replacement of a flat tire withthe vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at nocharge.

i If the indicator lamp in RoadsideAssistance button : is flashingcontinuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Customer AssistanceCenter established, then the Tele Aidsystem could not initiate a RoadsideAssistance call (e.g. the relevant cellularphone network is not available). Themessage Call Failed appears in themultifunction display.





ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 214

Information button

X Press and hold Information button : forlonger than 2 seconds.A call to the Customer Assistance Centerwill be initiated. The indicator lamp inInformation button : will flash while thecall is in progress. The messageConnecting Call will appear in themultifunction display and the COMANDsystem is muted.

i The audio system or COMAND systemdisplay indicates that a Tele Aid call is inprogress. While the call is connected youcan change to the navigation menu bypressing the NAVI button on the COMANDsystem. Spoken commands are notavailable.

A voice connection between the CustomerAssistance Center representative and theoccupants of the vehicle will be established.Information regarding the operation of yourvehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA productsand services is available to you.For more details concerning the Tele Aidsystem, please visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.

i If the indicator lamp in Informationbutton : is flashing continuously andthere was no voice connection to theCustomer Assistance Center established,then the Tele Aid system could not initiatean Information call (e.g. the relevant

cellular phone network is not available).The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display.




Call priorityIf other service calls such as a RoadsideAssistance call or Information call are active,an emergency call is still possible. In thiscase, the emergency call will take priority andoverride all other active calls.The indicator lamp in the respective buttonflashes until the call is concluded. Automaticinitiated emergency calls can only beterminated by a Customer Assistance Centerrepresentative. All other calls can beterminated by pressing button ~ on themultifunction steering wheel or therespective button for ending a telephone callon the audio system or the COMAND system.

i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,the audio system or the COMAND systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to the COMAND system. If youmust use this phone, we recommend thatyou use it only with the vehicle at astandstill in a safe location.

Search & Send “Search & Send” is a navigation destinationaddress entry service. For more informationon “Search & Send”, refer to separateCOMAND system operating instructions.

Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicleunintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),and the reserve SmartKey is not available:

Useful features 215

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 215

Z

X Contact the Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).You will be asked to provide your password.

X Then return to your vehicle at the timearranged with the Customer AssistanceCenter and pull the trunk lid handle for aminimum of 20 seconds until the indicatorlamp in the SOS button is flashing.The message Connecting Call appears inthe multifunction display.

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehiclevia Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password(USA only).

i The remote door unlock feature isavailable if the relevant cellular phonenetwork is available.The SOS button will flash and the messageConnecting Call will appear in themultifunction display to indicate receipt ofthe door unlock command.If the trunk lid handle was pulled for morethan 20 seconds before door unlockauthorization was received, you must wait15 minutes before pulling the trunk lidhandle again.

Remote door lock If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle andare no longer near it, you can have it lockedremotely through the Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be remotely locked withinfour days after the ignition has been switchedoff.X Contact the Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).You will be asked to provide your password.

When you are inside your vehicle the nexttime and switch on the ignition, the messageTele Aid Doors locked by remote

control will appear on the multifunctiondisplay.

i The remote door lock feature is availableif the relevant cellular phone network isavailable and data connection is possible.

Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services In the event your vehicle was stolen:X Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X Pass this number on to the CustomerAssistance Center along with yourpassword.The Customer Assistance Center will thenattempt to covertly contact the vehicle’sTele Aid system. Once the vehicle islocated, the Customer Assistance Centerwill contact the local law enforcement andyou. The vehicle’s location will only beprovided to law enforcement.

i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for morethan 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system willnotify the Customer Assistance Centerautomatically.

Garage door openerThe integrated remote control can operate upto three separately controlled devicescompatible with HomeLink® or some othersystems.

G Warning!Before programming the integrated remotecontrol to a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Whenprogramming a garage door opener, the doormoves up or down. When programming a gateoperator, the gate opens or closes.Do not use the integrated remote control withany garage door opener that lacks safety stop


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 216

and reverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling the doorto stop and reverse - does not meet currentU.S. federal safety standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.Do not run the engine while programming theintegrated remote control. Inhalation ofexhaust gas is hazardous to your health. Allexhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),and inhaling it can cause unconsciousnessand possible death.

Interior rear view mirror with integrated remotecontrol

Hand-held remote control A is not part of thevehicle equipment.

Programming the integrated remote controlX Step 1: Switch on the ignition.X Step 2: If you have previously programmed

a signal transmitter button and wish toretain its programming, proceed to step 3.

orX If you are programming the integrated

remote control for the first time, press andhold the two outer signal transmitterbuttons ; and ? and release them whenindicator lamp : begins to flash afterapproximately 20 seconds.

Do not hold the buttons for longer than30 seconds.This procedure erases any previoussettings for all three channels andinitializes the memory. If you later wish toprogram a second and/or third hand-heldtransmitter to the remaining two signaltransmitter buttons, do not repeat this stepand begin directly with step 3.

X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remotecontrol A of the device you wish to trainapproximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) awayfrom the signal transmitter button (;, =or ?) to be programmed, while keepingindicator lamp : in view.

X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneouslypress hand-held remote control button Band the desired signal transmitter button(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttonsuntil step 5 is completed.Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly andthen rapidly.

i Indicator lamp : flashes immediatelythe first time the signal transmitter buttonis programmed. If this button has alreadybeen programmed, the indicator lamp willstart flashing after 20 seconds.

X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changesfrom a slow to a rapidly flashing light,release the hand-held remote controlbutton and the signal transmitter button.

X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trainedsignal transmitter button (;, = or ?) andobserve indicator lamp :.If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the respective signaltransmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressedand released.

i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly forapproximately 2 seconds and then turns toa constant light, continue withprogramming steps 8 through 12 as your

Useful features 217

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 217

Z

garage door opener may be equipped withthe “rolling code” feature.

X Step 7: To program the remaining twosignal transmitter buttons, repeat the stepsabove starting with step 3.

Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (or other rollingcode devices) with the rolling code feature,follow these instructions after completing the“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) ofthis text. For your convenience and tocomplete the procedure faster, you mightwant to have someone assist you.X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the

garage door opener motor head unit.

i Exact location and color of the button mayvary by garage door opener brand.Depending on manufacturer, the “training”button may also be referred to as “learn” or“smart” button. If there is difficulty locatingthe transmitting button, refer to the garagedoor opener Operator’s Manual.

X Step 9: Press the “training” button on thegarage door opener motor head unit.The “training light” is activated.You have 30 seconds to initiate thefollowing two steps.

X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmlypress, hold for 2 seconds and release theprogrammed signal transmitter button (;,= or ?).

X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds andrelease same signal transmitter button asecond time to complete the trainingprocess.

i Some garage door openers (or otherrolling code equipped devices) may requireyou to press, hold for 2 seconds andrelease the same signal transmitter buttona third time to complete the trainingprocess.

X Step 12: Confirm the garage dooroperation by pressing the programmedsignal transmitter button (;, = or ?).

X Step 13: To program the remaining twosignal transmitter buttons, repeat the stepsabove starting with step 3.

Gate operator/Canadian programmingCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission whichmay not be long enough for the integratedsignal transmitter to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadian law,some U.S. gate operators are designed to“time-out” in the same manner.If you live in Canada or if you are havingdifficulties programming a gate operator(regardless of where you live) by using theprogramming procedures, replace step 4 withthe following:X Step 4: Press and hold the signal

transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do notrelease this button until it has beensuccessfully trained.

X While still holding down the signaltransmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”your hand-held remote control button Bas follows: Press and hold button B for2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.Repeat this sequence on the hand-heldremote control until the frequency signalhas been learned.Upon successful training, indicatorlamp : will flash slowly and then rapidlyafter several seconds.

X Proceed with programming step 5 andstep 6 to complete.

i Upon completion of programming theintegrated remote control, make sure youretain the hand-held remote control thatcame with the garage door opener, gateoperator or other device. You may need itfor use in other vehicles, for futureprogramming of an integrated remote


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 218

control, or simply for continued use as ahand-held remote control to operate therespective device in other situations.

Reprogramming a single signal transmitter buttonTo program a device using a signaltransmitter button previously trained, followthese steps:X Switch on the ignition.X Press and hold the desired signal

transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do notrelease the button.Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after20 seconds.

X Without releasing the signal transmitterbutton, proceed with programming startingwith step 3.

Operation of integrated remote controlX Switch on the ignition.X Select and press the appropriate

integrated signal transmitter button (;,= or ?) to activate the remote controlleddevice.The integrated remote control transmittercontinues to send the signal as long as thebutton is pressed – up to 20 seconds.

Erasing the integrated remote control memoryi If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of

all three channels.

X Switch on the ignition.X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal

transmitter buttons ; and ?, forapproximately 20 seconds, until indicatorlamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.The codes of all three channels are erased.

Programming tipsIf you are having difficulty programming theintegrated remote control, here are somehelpful tips:RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote

control A (typically located on the reverseside of the remote). The integrated remotecontrol is compatible with radio-frequencydevices operating between 280-390 MHz.RPut a new battery in hand-held remote

control A. This will increase the likelihoodof the hand-held remote control sending astronger and more accurate signal to theintegrated remote control.RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held

remote control A at different lengths andangles from the signal transmitter button(;, = or ?) you are programming.Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the sameangle at varying distances.RIf another hand-held remote control is

available for the same device, try theprogramming steps again using that otherhand-held remote control. Make sure newbatteries are in the hand-held remotecontrol before beginning the procedure.RStraighten the antenna wire from the

garage door opener assembly. This mayhelp improve transmitting and/or receivingsignals.

i Certain types of garage door openers areincompatible with the integrated remotecontrol. If you should experience furtherdifficulties with programming theintegrated remote control, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or callthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA only) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.

Useful features 219

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 219

Z









Floormats

G Warning!Whenever you are using a floormat, make surethere is enough clearance and that thefloormat is securely fastened.The floormat should always be securelyfastened using the fastening equipment.Before driving off, check that the floormat issecurely in place and adjust it if necessary. Aloose floormat could slip and hinder properfunctioning of the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top of eachother as this may impair pedal movement.

X Move the driver’s seat as far to the rear aspossible.

X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainerpins ;.

X Installing: Press floormat eyelets : ontoretainer pins ;.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 220

Vehicle equipment ............................ 222The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 222At the gas station ............................. 222Engine compartment ........................ 224Tires and wheels ............................... 229Winter driving ................................... 252Driving instructions .......................... 254Maintenance ...................................... 258Vehicle care ....................................... 260

221

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 221

Vehicle equipment


The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

The more cautiously you treat your vehicleduring the break-in period, the more satisfiedyou will be with its performance later on.RDrive your vehicle during the first

1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying butmoderate vehicle and engine speeds.RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full

throttle driving) and excessive enginespeeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpmin each gear).RVehicles with automatic transmission:

- Select C as the preferred shift program(Y page 111) for the first 1 000 miles(1 500 km).

- Do not attempt to slow the vehicle downby shifting to a lower gear using the gearselector lever.

- Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1(Y page 111) only when driving atmoderate speeds (for hill driving).

- Avoid accelerating by kickdown.

RVehicles with manual transmission:Shift gears in a timely manner.

After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you maygradually increase vehicle and engine speedsto the permissible maximum.

! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),

do not exceed a speed of 85 mph(140 km/h).RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds

above 4 500 rpm in each gear.RShift gears in a timely manner.

All of the above instructions, as may apply toyour vehicle type, also apply when driving thefirst 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engineor the rear differential has been replaced.

i Always obey applicable speed limits.

At the gas station

Refueling

G Warning!Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline!Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact. Extinguish all smoking materials.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging yourhealth.

G Warning!Overfilling of the fuel tank may createpressure in the system which could cause agas discharge. This could cause the gas tospray back out when removing the fuel pumpnozzle, which could cause personal injury.

G Warning!C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatictransmission:

222 At the gas stationOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 222

Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a labelreading Premium gasoline or E85 only! onthe fuel filler flap):Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highlyflammable, poisonous and burn easily.Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries ifignited or if you come into contact with it orinhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanolfumes and skin contact with ethanol.Extinguish all open flames before refueling.Never smoke or create sparks close toethanol.

! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline enginewith diesel fuel. Even small amounts ofdiesel fuel will damage the fuel system andengine. Damage resulting from the use ofnon-approved fuels or fuel additives orresulting from mixing gasoline with dieselfuel is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

! If you have accidentally filled the tankwith incorrect or non-approved fuel, do notswitch on the ignition. Otherwise theincorrect or non-approved fuel will get intothe fuel lines. The fuel system must bedrained completely. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to have the fuelsystem drained completely.

! To prevent damage to the catalyticconverters, only use premium unleadedgasoline in this vehicle.Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a labelreading Premium gasoline or E85 only!on the fuel filler flap) may be fueled withE85. For additional information, see“Flexible Fuel Vehicles”.Any noticeable irregularities in engineoperation should be repaired promptly.Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel mayreach the catalytic converter, causing it tooverheat and potentially start a fire.

i Only use premium unleaded gasoline witha minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91(average of 96 RON/86 MON). Informationon gasoline quality can normally be foundon the fuel pump. Please contact gasstation personnel in case labels on thepump cannot be found.C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatictransmission:Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by alabel reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on the fuel filler flap.For more information on gasoline or E85,see “Premium unleaded gasoline”(Y page 354), see “Flexible Fuel Vehicles”(Y page 355), see “Fuel requirements”(Y page 354), or contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, or visitwww.mbusa.com (USA only).

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automaticallylocks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

i In case the central locking system doesnot release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel fillerflap” (Y page 310).

The fuel filler flap is located on the right-handside of the vehicle towards the rear.

X Turn off the engine.

i Leaving the engine running and the fuelfiller cap open can cause the yellow enginemalfunction indicator lamp ; toilluminate.

At the gas station 223

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 223

Z

For more information, see also “Practicalhints” (Y page 305).

X Remove the SmartKey from the starterswitch.KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. Thisputs the starter switch in position 0, sameas with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch. The driver’s door then canbe closed again.

X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at thepoint indicated by the arrow.

X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.X Take off fuel filler cap ;.

! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuelfiller neck. Do not drop the cap. It coulddamage the vehicle paint finish.

X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrowinto holder =.

X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit

cuts out – do not top off or overfill.X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise

until it audibly engages.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin willprevent closing the fuel filler flap.

X Close fuel filler flap :.

Check regularly and before a long tripFor information on quantities andrequirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 349).Check the following:REngine oil level (Y page 225)RTire inflation pressure (Y page 232)RCoolant level (Y page 227)RVehicle lighting (Y page 313)

RWasher system and headlamp cleaningsystem (Y page 228)RBrake fluid (Y page 228)

Engine compartment

Hood

G Warning!Do not pull the release lever while the vehicleis in motion. Otherwise the hood could beforced open by passing air flow.This could cause the hood to come loose andinjure you and/or others.

Opening

G Warning!Do not open the hood when the engine isoverheated. You could be seriously injured.Observe the coolant temperature gauge todetermine whether the engine may beoverheated. If you see flames or smokecoming from the engine compartment, moveaway from the vehicle. Wait until the enginehas cooled. If necessary, call the firedepartment.

G Warning!You could be injured when the hood is open –even when the engine is turned off.Parts of the engine can become very hot. Toprevent burns, let the engine cool completelybefore touching any components on thevehicle. Comply with all relevant safetyprecautions.

G Warning!To help prevent personal injury, stay clear ofmoving parts when the hood is open and theengine is running.The radiator fan may continue to run forapproximately 30 seconds or may evenrestart after the engine has been turned off.Stay clear of fan blades.

224 Engine compartmentOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 224

G Warning!The engine is equipped with a transistorizedignition system. Because of the high voltageit is dangerous to touch any components(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnosticsocket) of the ignition systemRwith the engine runningRwhile starting the engineRwhen the ignition is switched on and the

engine is turned manually

X Pull hood lock release lever :.The hood is unlocked.

! Never open the hood if the wiper arms arefolded forward away from the windshield.Otherwise the windshield wipers or thehood could be damaged.

X Push handle ; under the hood upwards.X Pull up on the hood and then release it.

The hood will be held open at shoulderheight by gas-filled struts automatically.

Closing

G Warning!When closing the hood, use extreme cautionnot to catch hands or fingers. Be careful thatyou do not close the hood on anyone.Make sure the hood is securely engagedbefore driving off. Do not continue driving ifthe hood can no longer engage after anaccident, for example. The hood couldotherwise come loose while the vehicle is inmotion and injure you and/or others.

X Let the hood drop from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check to make sure the hood is fullyclosed.If you can raise the hood at a point abovethe headlamps, then it is not properlyclosed. Open it again and let it drop withsomewhat greater force.

Engine oilThe amount of oil your engine consumes willdepend on a number of factors, includingdriving style. Increased oil consumption canoccur when the vehicle is new or the vehicleis driven frequently at higher engine speeds.Engine oil consumption checks should onlybe made after the vehicle break-in period.

! Do not use any special lubricant additives,as these may damage the drive assemblies.Using special additives not approved byMercedes-Benz may cause damage notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.For further information contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Notes on checking engine oil levelWhen checking the oil levelRthe vehicle must be parked on level groundRwith the engine at operating temperature,

the vehicle must have been stationary for

Engine compartment 225

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 225

Z

at least 5 minutes with the engine turnedoffRwith the engine not at operating

temperature, the vehicle must have beenstationary for at least 30 minutes with theengine turned off

Checking engine oil level X Open the hood (Y page 224).

X Pull out oil dipstick :.X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the

dipstick guide tube.X Pull out oil dipstick : again after

approximately 3 seconds to obtainaccurate reading.The oil level is correct when it is betweenlower (min) mark = and upper (max)mark ; of oil dipstick :.

i All models (except C 63 AMG):The filling quantity between the upper andlower marks on the oil dipstick isapproximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).C 63 AMG:The filling quantity between the upper andlower marks on the oil dipstick isapproximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).

X If necessary, add engine oil.For more information on engine oil, see“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”(Y page 349).

For information on messages in themultifunction display concerning engine oil,see the “Practical hints” section(Y page 291).

Adding engine oil ! Only use approved engine oils and oil

filters required for vehicles withMaintenance System. For a listing ofapproved engine oils and oil filters, contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center orvisit www.mbusa.com (USA only).The following will result in engine oremission control system damage notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty:RUsing engine oils and oil filters of

specification other than those expresslyrequired for the Maintenance System.RChanging of oil and oil filter at change

intervals longer than those called for bythe Maintenance System.RUsing any oil additives.

All models (except C 63 AMG)


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 226

C 63 AMG

X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck.X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not

to overfill with oil.Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.Avoid environmental damage caused by oilentering the ground or water.

! Excess oil must be siphoned or drainedoff. It could cause damage to the engineand emission control system not coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.For more information on engine oil, see the“Technical data” section (Y page 349) and(Y page 353).

Transmission fluid levelVehicles with automatic transmission:The transmission fluid level does not need tobe checked. If you notice transmission fluidloss or gearshifting malfunctions, have anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center check thetransmission.

Coolant levelThe engine coolant is a mixture of water andanticorrosion/antifreeze.When checking the coolant level, the vehiclemust be parked on level ground, and thecoolant temperature must be below 158‡(70†).

G Warning!In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:RUse extreme caution when opening the

hood if there are any signs of steam orcoolant leaking from the cooling system, orif the coolant temperature gauge indicatesthat the coolant is overheated.RDo not remove the cap on the coolant

expansion tank if the coolant temperatureis above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine tocool down before removing the cap. Thecoolant expansion tank contains hot fluidand is under pressure.RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap

approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwiseto relieve excess pressure. If openedimmediately, scalding hot fluid and steamwill be blown out under pressure.RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol whichmay burn if it comes into contact with hotengine parts.

X Using a rag, slowly open cap :approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwiseto relieve excess pressure.

X Continue turning cap : counterclockwiseand remove it.

Engine compartment 227

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 227

Z

The coolant level is correct if the levelRfor cold coolant: reaches marking bar= in coolant expansion tank ;Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) higherX Add coolant as required.X Screw cap : back on and tighten it.For more information on coolant, see the“Technical data” section (Y page 351) and(Y page 356).

Washer system and headlamp cleaning system

G Warning!Washer solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

! Always use washer solvent/antifreezewhere temperatures may fall belowfreezing point. Failure to do so could resultin damage to the washer system/fluidreservoir.

! Only use washer fluid which is suitable forplastic lenses. Improper washer fluid candamage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not use distilled or deionized water inthe washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, thewasher fluid level sensor could bedamaged.

Fluid for the washer system and the headlampcleaning system is supplied from the washerfluid reservoir.During all seasons, use MB WindshieldWasher Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix itwith water or premixed washer solvent/antifreeze depending on the ambienttemperature (Y page 358).

X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tabof cap : upwards.

X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press

cap : onto filler hole until it engages.For more information, see “Washer systemand headlamp cleaning system”(Y page 352).

Brake fluid level! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimummark or below, have the brake systemchecked for brake pad thickness and leaksimmediately. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center immediately. Donot add brake fluid as this will not solve theproblem. For more information, see“Practical hints”.

When checking the brake fluid level, thevehicle must be parked on level ground.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 228

The brake fluid level is correct when it isbetween lower mark (MIN) ; and uppermark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir.

Tires and wheels

Safety notesContact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor information on tested and recommendedrims and tires for summer and winteroperation. They can also offer adviceconcerning tire service and purchase.

G Warning!Replace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further informationcontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If incorrectly sized rims and tires aremounted, the wheel brakes or suspensioncomponents can be damaged. Also, theoperating clearance of the wheels and thetires may no longer be correct.

G Warning!Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.When replacing rims, only use genuineMercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for theparticular rim type. Failure to do so can resultin the bolts loosening and possibly anaccident.Retreaded tires are not tested orrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always berecognized on retreads. The operating safetyof the vehicle cannot be assured when suchtires are used.

G Warning!If you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that possibledamage to your vehicle has occurred, you

should turn on the hazard warning flashers,carefully slow down, and drive with caution toan area which is a safe distance from the road.Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbodyfor possible damage. If the vehicle or tiresappear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ortire dealer for repairs.

G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youcould lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high speedwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Important guidelinesROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same

type and make.RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.RBreak in new tires for approximately

60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.RRegularly check the tires and rims for

damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tireinflation pressure loss and damage to thetire beads.RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire

inflation pressure and correct as required.RDo not allow your tires to wear down too

far. Adhesion properties on wet roads aresharply reduced at tread depths of lessthan 1/8 in (3 mm).RWhen replacing individual tires, you should

mount new tires on the front wheels first(on vehicles with same-sized wheels allaround).

Tires and wheels 229

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 229

Z

Recommended tire inflation pressure

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire andLoading Information placard located on thedriver’s door B-pillar (Y page 238).The tire inflation pressure should be checkedregularly. Only adjust the tire inflationpressure on cold tires. The tires can beconsidered cold if the vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambienttemperature, the driving speed and the tireload, the tire temperature changes. When thetire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), thetire inflation pressure will change byapproximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this inmind when checking tire inflation pressure onwarm tires and adjust the tire pressure onlyif the tire inflation pressure is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire inflation pressure when the tires arewarm, the reading will be higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not let air out tomatch the specified cold tire inflation

pressure. Otherwise, the tire will beunderinflated.Follow recommended cold tire inflationpressures listed on Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s doorB-pillar.Keeping the tires properly inflated providesthe best handling, tread life and ridingcomfort.In addition to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s doorB-pillar, also consult the tire inflationpressure label on the inside of the filler flapfor any additional information pertaining tospecial driving situations. For moreinformation, see “Important notes on tireinflation pressure” (Y page 231).

i Data shown on Tire and LoadingInformation placard example are forillustration purposes only. Tire data arespecific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the following illustration.Refer to Tire and Loading Informationplacard on vehicle for actual data specificto your vehicle.

The Tire and Loading Information placard liststhe recommended cold tire inflationpressures : for maximum loaded vehicleweight. The tire inflation pressures listedapply to the tires installed as originalequipment.

230 Tires and wheelsOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 230

Important notes on tire inflation pressure

G Warning!If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,check the tires for punctures from foreignobjects and/or whether air is leaking from thevalves or from around the rim.

Tire temperature and tire inflation pressureare also increased while driving, dependingon the driving speed and the tire load.If you will be driving your vehicle at highspeeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,where it is legal and conditions allow, consultthe tire inflation pressure label on the insideof the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the coldtire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust thetire inflation pressure, excessive heat canbuild up and result in sudden tire failure.If you are not sure about the proper tireinflation pressure, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Driving comfort may be reduced when thetire inflation pressure is adjusted to thevalue for speeds above 100 mph(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflationpressure label located on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Make sure to readjust the tire inflationpressure for normal driving speeds.Supplemental tire inflation pressureinformation for different loading conditions ofthe vehicle can be found on the tire inflationpressure label. The tire inflation pressurelabel is located on the inside of the fuel fillerflap.For the tire inflation pressure for sparewheels such as Minispare wheels or sparewheels with collapsible tire refer toRthe yellow label on the spare wheel rimRthe “Technical data” section of this

Operator’s Manual (Y page 349)Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on

the driver’s door B-pillar

Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflationpressures on the tire inflation pressure labelare valid for all approved, factory-equippedtires.

i Data shown on tire inflation pressurelabel examples are for illustration purposesonly. Tire inflation pressure data arespecific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the following illustrations.Refer to the tire inflation pressure label onvehicle for actual data specific to yourvehicle.

Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for allapproved, factory equipped tires

When a tire size is specified, the tire inflationpressure that follows applies to thatparticular tire size only.

Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures forparticular tire sizes

Some tire inflation pressure labels may onlyshow the rim diameter instead of the entiretire size, e.g. R 18 or 18".The rim diameter is part of the tire size asspecified on the tire sidewall (Y page 246).


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 231

Z

Example illustration: Tire inflation pressuresspecific to rim diameter

Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires

Underinflated tiresG Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.

Underinflated tires canRcause excessive and uneven tire wearRadversely affect fuel economyRlead to tire failure from being overheatedRadversely affect handling characteristics

Overinflated tiresG Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

Overinflated tires canRadversely affect handling characteristicsRcause uneven tire wear

Rbe more prone to damage from roadhazardsRadversely affect ride comfortRincrease stopping distance

Checking tire inflation pressure

Safety notes

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Check the tire inflation pressure at least oncea month.Check and adjust the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold (Y page 230).

Checking tire inflation pressure manuallyFollow the steps below to achieve correct tireinflation pressure:X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire

gauge and check against therecommended tire inflation pressure on the


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 232

Tire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar (Y page 238). Ifnecessary, add air to achieve therecommended tire inflation pressure.

X If you have overfilled the tire, release tireinflation pressure by pushing the metalstem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.Then recheck the tire inflation pressurewith the tire gauge.

X Install the valve cap.X Repeat this procedure for each tire.

Tire pressure loss warning system (Canada only)While the vehicle is being driven, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire inflation pressures by evaluating eachwheel’s rotational speed. This allows thesystem to detect a significant loss of pressurein a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changesdue to falling tire inflation pressure, you willsee a corresponding warning message in themultifunction display.The tire pressure loss warning system mayfunction in a restricted manner or with a delayRwhen snow chains are mounted to the

vehicleRin the presence of ice and snowRwhen you are driving on a loose surface

(e.g. sand or gravel)Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty

manner (involving rapid acceleration orhigh speeds in curves)Rwhen you are driving with a loaded roof

rack or heavily laden vehicle

G Warning!When the multifunction display shows themessage Check Tire Pressure Soon, oneor more of your tires are significantlyunderinflated. You should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper tire inflation pressure as

indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, on the tireinflation pressure label.Driving on a significantly underinflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.Each tire, including the spare, should bechecked at least once a month when cold.Inflate the tires to the recommended tireinflation pressure as specified onRthe Tire and Loading Information placard on

the driver’s door B-pillarorRthe tire inflation pressure label located on

the inside of the fuel filler flap

i The recommended tire inflation pressuresfor your vehicle can be found onRthe Tire and Loading Information placard

located on the driver’s door B-pillar(Y page 238)Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the

inside of the fuel filler flapThe tire inflation pressures are not listed inthe Operator’s Manual.

G Warning!The tire pressure loss warning system doesnot provide a warning for wrongly selected tireinflation pressures. Always adjust tireinflation pressure according to the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver’sdoor B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressurelabel located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure loss warning system doesnot replace regular checks of the tire inflationpressures since a gradual pressure loss inmore than one tire cannot be detected by thetire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure loss warning system is notable to issue a warning due to a suddendramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 233

Z

tire blowout caused by a foreign object). Inthis case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefullyapplying the brakes and avoiding abruptsteering maneuvers.

Restarting the tire pressure loss warning systemThe tire pressure loss warning system mustbe restarted in the following situations:Rafter you have changed the tire inflation

pressureRafter you have replaced the wheels or tiresRafter you have installed new wheels or tiresX Using the Tire and Loading Information

placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, ifavailable, the tire inflation pressure label onthe inside of the fuel filler flap, make surethe tire inflation pressure of all four tires iscorrect.

G Warning!The tire pressure loss warning system canonly warn you in a reliable manner if you haveset the correct tire inflation pressures foreach tire.If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,the system will monitor the pressureaccording to the incorrect value.

X Switch on the ignition.X Press button = or ; on the

multifunction steering wheel to select theService menu (Y page 129).

X Press button 9 or : on themultifunction steering wheel to selectTire Pressure.

X Press button a on the multifunctionsteering wheel to confirm.The following message appears in themultifunction display:Run Flat IndicatorActivePress 'OK' to Restart

X Press button a.The following message will appear in themultifunction display:Tire PressureNow OK?CancelYes

X If you wish to confirm: Press button9 or : to select Yes.

X Press button a.The following message will appear in themultifunction display:Run FlatIndicatorRestartedAfter a certain “learning phase”, the tirepressure loss warning system checks theset pressure values for all four tires.

X If you wish to cancel: Press button 9or : to select Cancel.

X Press button a to confirm.The previous settings remain unchanged.

Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only)Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvancedTire Pressure Monitoring System (AdvancedTPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressurein the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings incase of pressure loss in one or more of thetires.The TPMS is equipped with a combination lowtire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale inthe instrument cluster. Depending on how thetelltale illuminates, it indicates a low tirepressure condition or a malfunction in theTPMS system itself:RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one

or more of your tires is significantlyunderinflated. There is no malfunction inthe TPMS.RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and

then stays illuminated, the TPMS systemitself is not operating properly.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 234

The TPMS only functions on wheels that areequipped with the proper electronic sensors.

G Warning!The TPMS does not indicate a warning forwrongly selected inflation pressures. Alwaysadjust tire inflation pressure according to theTire and Loading Information placard or thesupplemental tire inflation pressureinformation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.The TPMS is not able to issue a warning dueto a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tireblowout caused by a foreign object). In thiscase bring the vehicle to a halt by carefullyapplying the brakes and avoiding abruptsteering maneuvers.

G Warning!Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on theinside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information placardor the tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately 1 minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

i If a condition causing the TPMS tomalfunction develops, it may take up to10 minutes for the system to signal amalfunction using the TPMS telltaleflashing and illumination sequence.The telltale extinguishes after a fewminutes driving if the malfunction has beencorrected.

Tire pressure inquiries are made using themultifunction display. The current tireinflation pressure for each tire appears in themultifunction display after a few minutes ofdriving.

i Possible differences between thereadings of a tire pressure gauge of an airhose, e.g. gas station equipment, and thevehicle’s control system can occur. The tire


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 235

Z

pressure displayed by the control systemapply to sea level. In high-altitudelocations, the reading on a tire pressuregauge will be higher than the reading issuedby the vehicle’s control system. Do notreduce the tire inflation pressure undersuch circumstances.


multifunction steering wheel to select theService menu (Y page 129).

X Press button 9 or : to select Tire Pressure.

X Press button a.The current inflation pressure for each tireappears in the multifunction display.


When the vehicle has been parked for longerthan 20 minutes, the message Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes appears in themultifunction display.The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensorsautomatically after the learn-in phase. As longas the tire inflation pressure values cannot beallocated to the individual wheels, themessage Tire Pressure Monitor Activeappears. Despite this message, the tireinflation pressure values are monitoredalready.

i With a spare wheel mounted, the systemmay still indicate the tire inflation pressureof the removed road wheel for someminutes. If this happens, keep in mind thatthe indicated value where the spare wheelis mounted does not reflect the actualspare tire inflation pressure.

i Operating radio transmission equipment(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) inor near the vehicle could cause the TPMSto malfunction.

i This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful


interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired.


Tire inflation pressure warningsIf the system detects a significant loss of tireinflation pressure in one or more than onetire, a message appears in the multifunctiondisplay. In addition, an acoustic warningsounds and the low tire pressure telltale in theinstrument cluster comes on.


The respective tire is indicated by a redrectangle.

Restarting Advanced TPMSG Warning!It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tireinflation pressure to the recommended coldtire inflation pressure. Underinflated tiresaffect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.You might lose control over the vehicle.

When you restart the TPMS, the system setsnew reference values for each tire.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 236

The TPMS must be restarted when you haveadjusted the tire inflation pressure to a newlevel (e.g. because of different load or drivingconditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated tothe current tire inflation pressures.Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tireinflation pressure to the inflation pressurerecommended for the vehicle operatingcondition. Tire inflation pressure should onlybe adjusted on cold tires. Observe therecommended tire inflation pressure on theTire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may havesupplemental tire inflation pressureinformation for driving at high speeds or forvehicle loads less than the maximum loadedvehicle condition. If such information isprovided, it can be found on the inside of thefuel filler flap.X Using the Tire and Loading Information

placard on the driver’s door B-pillar(Y page 238) or the supplemental tireinflation pressure information on the insideof the fuel filler flap, make sure the tireinflation pressure of all four tires is correct.


multifunction steering wheel to select theService menu.

X Press button 9 or : on themultifunction steering wheel to selectTire Pressure.

X Press button a.The current inflation pressure for each tireappears in the multifunction display or thefollowing message appears in themultifunction display:Tire pressureswill be displayedafter drivinga few minutes

X Press button :.The following message appears in themultifunction display:Use CurrentPressures As New

Reference ValuesPress 'OK' to Confirm

X Press button a.The following message appears in themultifunction display:Tire Press. MonitorRestartedAfter driving a few minutes the systemverifies that the current tire inflationpressures are within the system’s specifiedrange. Afterwards the current tire inflationpressures are accepted as reference valuesand then monitored.

X If you wish to cancel: Press button %.orX Press button 9 to exit the menu screen.

i When the wheel positions have beenchanged, the inflation pressure of a tiremay be displayed for the wrong positiontemporarily. After driving for a few minutes,the inflation pressure will be shown for thecorrect position.

Maximum tire inflation pressure

G Warning!Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure. Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 237

Z

i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.

This is the maximum permissible tire inflationpressure : for the tire.Always follow the recommended tire inflationpressure (Y page 230) for proper tireinflation.

Loading the vehicleTwo labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

can be found on the driver’s doorB-pillar. This placard tells you importantinformation about the number of peoplethat can be in the vehicle and the totalweight that can be carried in the vehicle.It also contains information on the propersize and recommended tire inflationpressures for the original equipment tireson your vehicle.

(2) The certification label, also found on thedriver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about thegross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo. The certification label also tellsyou about the front and rear axle weightcapacity, called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR).

The GAWR is the total allowable weightthat can be carried by a single axle (frontor rear). Never exceed the GVWR orGAWR for either the front axle or rearaxle.

: Driver’s door B-pillar

Following is a discussion on how to work withthe information contained on the Tire andLoading Information placard with regards toloading your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information

G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Tire and Loading Information placardi Data shown on Tire and Loading

Information placard example are forillustration purposes only. Load limit dataare specific to each vehicle and may varyfrom data shown in the followingillustration. Refer to Tire and LoadingInformation placard on vehicle for actualdata specific to your vehicle.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 238

The Tire and Loading Information placardshowing load limit information : is locatedon the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 238).X Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

The combined weight of all occupants,cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (ifapplicable) should never exceed the weightreferenced in that statement.

Seating capacity i Data shown on Tire and Loading

Information placard example are forillustration purposes only. Seating capacitydata are specific to each vehicle and mayvary from data shown in the followingillustration. Refer to Tire and LoadingInformation placard on vehicle for actualdata specific to your vehicle.

The seating capacity gives you importantinformation on the number of occupants that

can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rearseating capacity. The Tire and LoadingInformation placard showing seatingcapacity : is located on the driver’s doorB-pillar (Y page 238).

Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the “National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966”.X Step 1: Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”on your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the “XXX” amountequals 1 400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle (Y page 242).

The following table shows examples on howto calculate total and cargo load capacitieswith varying seating configurations and


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 239

Z

number and size of occupants. The followingexamples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sureyou are using the actual load limit for yourvehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 239).


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 240

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from Tire and Loading Information placard

1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs


Step 2 Number of occupants (driver and passengers)

5 3 1

Seating configuration front: 2rear: 3

front: 1rear: 2

front: 1

Occupants weight Occupant 1:150 lbsOccupant 2:180 lbsOccupant 3:160 lbsOccupant 4:140 lbsOccupant 5:120 lbs

Occupant 1:200 lbsOccupant 2:190 lbsOccupant 3:150 lbs

Occupant 1:150 lbs

Combined weight of all occupants

750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs


Step 3 Available cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (total load limit from Tire and Loading Information placard minus combined weight of all occupants)

1 500 lbs -750 lbs =750 lbs

1 500 lbs -540 lbs =960 lbs

1 500 lbs -150 lbs =1 350 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, theless cargo and luggage load capacity isavailable.For more information, see “Trailer tongueload” (Y page 242).

Certification labelEven after careful determination of thecombined weight of all occupants, cargo andthe trailer tongue load (if applicable)(Y page 242) as to not exceed thepermissible load limit, you must make sureyour vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 241

Z

Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle. You can obtain the GVWR andGAWR from the certification label. Thecertification label can be found on the driver’sdoor B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section(Y page 332).Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): Thetotal weight of the vehicle, all occupants, allcargo, and the trailer tongue load (ifapplicable) must never exceed the GVWR.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The totalallowable weight that can be carried by asingle axle (front or rear).To assure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible weight limits(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),have the loaded vehicle (including driver,passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitablecommercial scale.

Trailer tongue loadThe tongue load of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the loadyou can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer istowed, the tongue load must be added to theweight of all occupants riding and any cargoyou are carrying in the vehicle. The tongueload typically is 10% of the trailer weight andeverything loaded in it.Your Mercedes-Benz has been designedprimarily to carry passengers and their cargo.Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailertowing with your vehicle.

Maximum tire load

G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also result

in handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.


The maximum tire load rating : is themaximum weight the tires are designed tosupport.For more information on tire load rating, see(Y page 247).For information on calculating total and cargoload capacities, see (Y page 239).

Direction of rotationUnidirectional tires offer added advantages,such as better hydroplaning performance. Tobenefit, however, you must make sure thetires rotate in the direction specified.An arrow on the sidewall indicates theintended direction of rotation of the tire.Spare wheels may be mounted against thedirection of rotation (spinning) even with aunidirectional tire for temporary use only untilthe regular drive wheel has been repaired orreplaced. Always observe and followapplicable temporary use restrictions andspeed limitations indicated on the sparewheel.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 242

Tire care and maintenance

G Warning!Regularly check the tires for damage.Damaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.

Check the tire inflation pressure at least oncea month. For more information on checkingtire inflation pressure, see “Recommendedtire inflation pressure” (Y page 230).

Tire inspection Every time you check the tire inflationpressure, you should also inspect your tiresfor the following:Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 243)Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s

rubberRbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the

tread or side of the tireReplace the tire if you find any of the aboveconditions.Make sure you also inspect the spare tireperiodically for condition and inflation. Sparetires will age and become worn over time evenif never used, and thus should be inspectedand replaced when necessary.

Life of tire

G Warning!Tires and spare tire should be replaced after6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.

The service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including but not limited to:RDriving styleRTire inflation pressureRDistance driven

Tread depth

G Warning!Although the applicable federal motor vehiclesafety laws consider a tire to be worn whenthe treadwear indicators (TWI) become visibleat approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), werecommend that you do not allow your tiresto wear down to that level. As tread depthapproaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesionproperties on a wet road are sharply reduced.Depending upon the weather and/or roadsurface (conditions), the tire traction varieswidely.

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharplyreduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in(3 mm).Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. These indicators are located in six placeson the tread circumference and becomevisible at a tread depth of approximately1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire isconsidered worn and should be replaced.The recommended minimum tire tread depthfor summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). Therecommended minimum tire tread depth forwinter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).

Treadwear indicator : appears as a solidband across the tread.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 243

Z

Storing tires ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place

with as little exposure to light as possible.Protect tires from contact with oil, greaseand fuels.

Cleaning tires ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash

tires. The intense jet of water can result indamage to the tire.Always replace a damaged tire.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.Government requirement designed to givedrivers consistent and reliable informationregarding tire performance. Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors:treadwear :, traction ;, and temperatureresistance =. Although not a Government ofCanada requirement, all tires made for sale inNorth America have these grades branded onthe sidewall.


Quality grades can be found, whereapplicable, on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. Government test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and one-half(1 1/2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

G Warning!The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

G Warning!If ice has formed on the road, tire traction willbe substantially reduced. Under such weatherconditions, drive, steer and brake withextreme caution.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 244

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on a dry road.You should pay particular attention to thecondition of the road whenever the outsidetemperature is close to the freezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires(Y page 252) with a minimum tread depth ofapproximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheelsfor the winter season to ensure normalbalanced handling characteristics. Onpacked snow, they can reduce your stoppingdistance compared to summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road isnot covered with snow or ice. Exerciseappropriate caution.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This maycause serious damage to the drivetrainwhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

Temperature

G Warning!The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Rotating tires

G Warning!Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tiresare of the same dimension.If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-sizetires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),tire rotation is not possible.

G Warning!Have the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. Wheels could becomeloose if not tightened with a torque of96 lb-ft (130 Nm).Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel boltsspecified for your vehicle’s rims.

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicleswith tires of the same dimension all around.If your vehicle is equipped with tires of thesame dimension all around, tires can berotated, observing a front-to-rear rotationpattern that will maintain the intendedrotation (spinning) direction of the tire(Y page 242).In some cases, such as when your vehicle isequipped with mixed-size tires (different tiredimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is notpossible.If applicable to your vehicle’s tireconfiguration, tires can be rotated accordingto the tire manufacturer’s recommendedintervals in the tire manufacturer’s warrantypamphlet located in your vehicle literatureportfolio. If none is available, tires should berotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, accordingto the degree of tire wear. The same rotation(spinning) direction must be maintained.Rotate tires before the characteristic tirewear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wearon front tires and tread center wear on reartires).


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 245

Z

Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheelsand brake disks, i.e. the inner side of thewheels/tires, during each rotation. Check forand ensure proper tire inflation pressure.For information on wheel change, see “Flattire” (Y page 317).

Tire labelingBesides tire name (sales designation) andmanufacturer name, a number of markingscan be found on a tire.Following are some explanations for themarkings on your vehicle’s tires:

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 244)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 249)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 242)? Maximum tire inflation pressure

(Y page 237)A ManufacturerB Tire ply material (Y page 250)C Tire size designation, load and speed

rating (Y page 246)D Load identification (Y page 249)E Tire name

i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.For more information, see “Rims and tires”(Y page 344).

Tire size designation, load and speed rating

: Tire width; Aspect ratio in %= Radial tire code? Rim diameterA Load index B Speed symbol


General: Depending on the design standardsused, the tire size molded into the sidewallmay have no letter or a letter preceding thetire size designation.No letter preceding the size designation (asillustrated above): Passenger car tire basedon European design standards.Letter “P” preceding the size designation:Passenger car tire based on U.S. designstandards.Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:Light Truck tire based on U.S. designstandards.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 246

Letter “T” preceding the size designation:Temporary spare tires which are highpressure compact spares designed fortemporary emergency use only.

Tire widthTire width : indicates the nominal tire widthin millimeters.

Aspect ratioAspect ratio ; is the dimensionalrelationship between tire section height andsection width and is expressed in percentage.The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividingsection height by section width.

Tire codeTire code = indicates the tire constructiontype. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tirewith a speed capability above 149 mph(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the sizedesignation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). Foradditional information, see “Tire speedrating” (Y page 247).

Rim diameterRim diameter ? is the diameter of the beadseat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Therim diameter is indicated in inches (in).

Load indexG Warning!The tire load rating must always be at leasthalf of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,tire failure may be the result which may causean accident and/or serious injury to you orothers.Always replace rims and tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part.

G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Load index A is a numerical code associatedwith the maximum load a tire can support.For example, a load rating of 91 correspondsto a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) thetire is designed to support. See also“Maximum tire load” (Y page 242) where themaximum load associated with the load indexis indicated in kilograms and lbs.For additional information on the load index,see “Load identification” (Y page 249).

Speed symbol G Warning!Even when permitted by law, never operate avehicle at speeds greater than the maximumspeed rating of the tires.Exceeding the maximum speed for which tiresare rated can lead to sudden tire failure,causing loss of vehicle control and possiblyresulting in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury and possible death, for youand for others.

Regardless of the tire speed rating, localspeed limits should be obeyed. Use prudentdriving speeds appropriate to prevailingconditions.Speed symbol B indicates the approvedmaximum speed (tire speed rating) for thetire.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 247

Z

Index Speed rating

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)

RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tirewith a speed capability above 149 mph(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the sizedesignation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).To determine the maximum speedcapability of the tire, the servicedescription for the tire must be referred to.The service description is comprised ofload index A and speed symbol B.If your tire includes “ZR” in the sizedesignation and no service description isgiven, the tire manufacturer must beconsulted for the maximum speedcapability.If a service description is given, the speedcapability is limited by the speed symbol inthe service description. Example:245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”is the service description. The letter “Y”designates the speed rating and the speedcapability of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RAny tire with a speed capability above

186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”in the size designation AND the servicedescription must be placed in parenthesis.Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”speed symbol in parenthesis designatesthe maximum speed capability of the tireas being above 186 mph (300 km/h).

Consult the tire manufacturer for the actualmaximum permissible speed of the tire.

All-season and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S18 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S18 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S18 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S18 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all M+S rated tires provide specialwinter performance. Make sure the tiresyou use show M+S and the mountain/snowflakeimarking on the tiresidewall. These tires meet specific snowtraction performance requirements of theRubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)and the Rubber Association of Canada(RAC) and have been designed specificallyfor use in snow conditions.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of:RAll models except C 63 AMG:

130 mph (210 km/h)RC 63 AMG:

155 mph (250 km/h)RC 63 AMG with increased top speed:

174 mph (280 km/h)The factory equipped tires on your vehiclemay have a tire speed rating above themaximum speed permitted by the electronicspeed limiter.Make sure your tires have the required tirespeed rating as specified for your vehicle inthe “Technical data” section (Y page 344),for example when purchasing new tires.If you are uncertain about the correct readingof the information given on a tire’s sidewall,any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will beglad to assist you.

18 or M+Sifor winter tires


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 248

Load identification


In addition to the load index, special loadidentification : may be molded into the tiresidewall following the letter designating thespeed symbol B (Y page 246).RNo specification given: absence of any text

(like in above example) indicates astandard load (SL) tire.RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load

(or reinforced) tire.RLight Load: designates a light load tire.RC, D, E: designates load range associated

with the maximum load a tire can carry ata specified pressure.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations require each new tiremanufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TINinto or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identifier. The TINfacilitates efforts by tire manufactures tonotify purchasers in recall situations or othersafety matters concerning tires. It givespurchasers the means to easily identify suchtires.The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’sidentification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tiretype code” ? and “Date of manufacture”A.


DOT (Department of Transportation)Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tiremeets requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.

Manufacturer’s identification markManufacturer’s identification mark ;denotes the tire manufacturer.New tires have a mark with two symbols.Retreaded tires have a mark with foursymbols. For more information on retreadedtires, see (Y page 229).

Tire sizeCode = indicates the tire size.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 249

Z

Tire type codeTire type code ? may, at the option of themanufacturer, be used as a descriptive codefor identifying significant characteristics ofthe tire.

Date of manufactureThe date of manufacture A identifies theweek and year of manufacture.The first two figures identify the week,starting with “01” to represent the first fullweek of the calendar year. The second twofigures represent the year.For example, “3208” represents the 32ndweek of 2008.

Tire ply material


This marking tells you about the type of cordand number of plies in the sidewall : andunder the tread ;.

Tire and loading terminology

Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of thosestandard items which may be replaced) ofautomatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats,

radio, and heater, to the extent that theseitems are available as factory-installedequipment (whether installed or not).

Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds per squareinch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.

Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tiresection height and section width expressedin percentage.

Bar Metric unit for air pressure. There are14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle hasbeen sitting for at least 3 hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,air conditioning and additional optionalequipment, but without passengers andcargo.

DOT (Department of Transportation) A tire branding symbol which denotes the tiremeets requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.


erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 250

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight. The gross vehicle weight on each axlemust never exceed the GAWR for the frontand rear axle indicated on the certificationlabel located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicleincluding fuel, tools, spare wheel, installedaccessories, passengers and cargo and, ifapplicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW mustnever exceed the GVWR indicated on thecertification label located on the driver’s doorB-pillar.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) This is the maximum permissible vehicleweight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight ofthe vehicle including all options, passengers,fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailertongue load). It is indicated on thecertification label located on the driver’s doorB-pillar.

Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPato 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressureis bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to1 bar.

Load index Numerical code associated with themaximum load a tire can support.

Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,total load limit, and production optionsweight.

Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should ever be put in the tire.

Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle isdesigned to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).

Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Production options weight The combined weight of those installedregular production options weighing over5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of thosestandard items which they replace, notpreviously considered in curb weight oraccessory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy dutybattery, and special trim.

PSI (Pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for air pressure.

Recommended tire inflation pressure The recommended tire inflation pressure fornormal driving conditions is listed on the Tireand Loading Information placard located onthe driver’s door B-pillar. It provides besthandling, tread life and riding comfort.Supplemental information pertaining tospecial driving situations can be found on thetire inflation pressure label on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.

Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tire beads areseated.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 251

Z

Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

TIN (Tire Identification Number) Unique identifier which facilitates efforts bytire manufacturers to notify purchasers inrecall situations or other safety mattersconcerning tires and gives purchasers themeans to easily identify such tires. The TIN iscomprised of “Manufacturer’s identificationmark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Dateof manufacture”.

Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or thenumber of layers of rubber-coated fabric inthe tire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate the plymaterials in the tire and sidewall, whichinclude steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Tire speed rating Part of tire designation (speed symbol);indicates the speed range for which a tire isapproved.

Total load limit Rated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’sdesignated seating capacity.

Traction The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface onwhich it moves. The amount of grip provided.

Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Treadwear indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”that show across the tread of a tire when only1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,temperature and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determinedby distributing to each axle its share of themaximum loaded vehicle weight and dividingit by two.

Winter driving

General informationHave your vehicle winterized at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Winter tires

G Warning!Winter tires with a tread depth of less than1/6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are nolonger suitable for winter operation.

G Warning!If you use your spare wheel when winter tiresare fitted on the other wheels, be aware thatthe difference in tire characteristics may verywell impair turning stability and that overalldriving stability may be reduced. Adapt yourdriving style accordingly.Have the spare wheel replaced by a regularroad wheel with a winter tire at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

252 Winter drivingOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 252

Always use winter tires at temperaturesbelow 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry roadconditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tiresprovide special winter performance. Makesure the tires you use show the mountain/snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.These tires meet specific snow tractionperformance requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC) andhave been designed specifically for use insnow conditions. Use of winter tires is theonly way to achieve the maximumeffectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safetysystems such as the ABS and the ESP® inwinter operation.For safe handling, make sure all mountedwinter tires are of the same make and havethe same tread design.For information on winter tires for yourvehicle model, see the “Technical data”section (Y page 344).Always observe the speed rating of the wintertires installed on your vehicle.After installing winter tires:X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust

it if necessary (Y page 232).X Restart the tire pressure loss warning

system (Y page 233) or the Advanced TirePressure Monitoring System (Y page 234).

Snow chains! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate

clearance for snow chains. To help avoidserious damage to your vehicle or tires,make sure the use of snow chains ispermissible as specified in the “Technicaldata” section of this Operator’s Manual.

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soonas possible when driving on roads withoutsnow.

Observe the following guidelines when usingsnow chains:RUse of snow chains is not permissible with

all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 344).RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear

wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’smounting instructions.

! If snow chains are mounted to the frontwheels, they may scrape against the bodyor axle components. The tires or the vehiclecould be damaged as a result.ROnly use snow chains that are approved by

Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you onthis subject.RUse of snow chains may be prohibited

depending on location. Always check localand state laws before installing snowchains.RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.

i When driving with snow chains, you maywish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 62)before setting the vehicle in motion. Thiswill improve the vehicle’s traction.

Winter driving instructions

G Warning!If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, makesure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipeand from around the vehicle with the enginerunning. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide(CO) gases may enter vehicle interiorresulting in unconsciousness and death.To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, opena window slightly on the side of the vehiclenot facing the wind.

G Warning!The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Winter driving 253

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 253

Z

Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.


The most important rule for slippery or icyroads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abruptacceleration, braking and steeringmaneuvers. Do not use the cruise controlsystem under such conditions.When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shiftthe automatic transmission to neutralposition N or declutch in case of manualtransmission. Try to keep the vehicle undercontrol by corrective steering action.

i For information on driving with snowchains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 253).

Road salts and chemicals can adverselyaffect braking efficiency. Increased pedalforce may become necessary to produce thenormal brake effect.Depressing the brake pedal periodically whentraveling at length on salt-strewn roads canbring road-salt-impaired braking efficiencyback to normal.If the vehicle is parked after being driven onsalt-treated roads, the braking efficiencyshould be tested as soon as possible afterdriving is resumed.

G Warning!Make sure not to endanger any other roadusers when carrying out these brakingmaneuvers.

Driving instructions

Drive sensibly – save fuelTo save fuel you should:RKeep tires at the recommended inflation

pressures.RRemove unnecessary loads.RRemove roof rack when not in use.RAllow engine to warm up under low load

use.RAvoid frequent acceleration and

deceleration.RHave all maintenance work performed at

the intervals specified in the MaintenanceBooklet and as required by theMaintenance system. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuel consumption is also increased by drivingin cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, onshort trips and in mountainous areas.

Drinking and driving

G Warning!Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Pedals

G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all

254 Driving instructionsOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 254

obstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure that thepedals still have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,the objects could get caught between thepedals. You could then no longer brake oraccelerate. This could lead to accidents andinjury.

Power assistance

G Warning!There is no power assistance for the steeringand the brake when the engine is not running.Steering and braking requires significantlymore effort and you could lose control of thevehicle and cause an accident as a result.Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle isin motion.

Brakes

Downhill grades! When driving down long and steep

grades, relieve the load on the brakes byshifting into a lower gear to use theengine’s braking power. This helps preventoverheating of the brakes and reduceswear.When using the engine’s braking power, adrive wheel may not spin for an extendedperiod of time, e.g. on slippery roadsurfaces. This may cause serious damageto the drivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Continuous or hard braking

G Warning!Resting your foot on the brake pedal willcause excessive and premature wear of thebrake pads.

It can also result in the brakes overheating,thereby significantly reducing theireffectiveness. It may not be possible to stopthe vehicle in sufficient time to avoid anaccident.

After hard braking, it is advisable to drive onfor some time, rather than immediately park,so that the air stream will cool down thebrakes faster.

Wet roads

G Warning!After driving in heavy rain for some timewithout applying the brakes or through waterdeep enough to wet brake components, thefirst braking action may be somewhatreduced and increased pedal pressure may benecessary to obtain expected brake effect.Maintain a safe distance from vehicles infront.

To help prevent brake disk corrosion afterdriving on wet or salt-covered roads, it isadvisable to brake the vehicle withconsiderable force prior to parking. The heatgenerated serves to dry the brakes.

Salt-covered roads

G Warning!A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brakelinings may cause a delay in the brakingeffect, resulting in a significantly increasedbraking distance, which could lead to anaccident.To avoid this danger, you should:Roccasionally brake carefully when you are

driving on salt-covered roads, so that anylayer of salt that may have built up on thebrake discs and the brake linings is

Driving instructions 255

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 255

Z

removed without putting other road usersat riskRmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead and drive with particular careRcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a

trip and immediately after commencing anew trip, so that salt residues are removedfrom the brake disc

Brake service! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may

be too low if the red brake warning lamp inthe instrument cluster comes on while theengine is running and an acoustic warningsounds. Observe additional messages inthe multifunction display that may appear.Brake pad wear or a leak in the system maybe the reason for low brake fluid in thereservoir.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

All checks and service work on the brakesystem should be carried out by qualifiedtechnicians only. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Only install brake pads and use brake fluidrecommended by Mercedes-Benz.

G Warning!If other than recommended brake pads areinstalled, or other than recommended brakefluid is used, the braking properties of thevehicle can be degraded to an extent that safebraking is substantially impaired. This couldresult in an accident.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC:Only conduct operational or performancetests on a two-axle dynamometer. If suchtests are necessary, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You couldotherwise seriously damage the brakesystem or the transfer case which is not

covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometer.Active braking action through the ESP®


! Vehicles without 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the parking brake isbeing tested on a brake test dynamometeror the vehicle is being towed with the frontaxle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®


If your brake system is only subjected tomoderate loads, you should occasionally testthe effectiveness of the brakes by applyingabove-normal braking pressure at higherspeeds. This will also enhance the grip of thebrake pads.

G Warning!Make sure not to endanger any other roadusers when carrying out these brakingmaneuvers.

Refer to the description of the Brake AssistSystem (BAS) (Y page 61).

High-performance brake system The high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on C 63 AMG.

256 Driving instructionsOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 256

G Warning!New vehicle brake pads and discs, andreplacement brake pads and discs may takeseveral hundred miles of driving until theyprovide optimum braking efficiency. Until thattime, you may need to use increased brakepedal pressure while braking. Please be awareof this and adjust your driving and brakingaccordingly during this break-in period.Excessive high-demand braking will causecorrespondingly high brake wear. Please beattentive to the brake warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and brake conditionmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high performance driving, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

The high-performance brake system isdesigned to operate under the extremely highoperating demands required toaccommodate the performance capabilitiesof the vehicle.The brakes may produce a squeaking-typenoise depending on theRvehicle speedRbrake force appliedRambient conditions, e.g. temperature and

humidityAs with any brake system, the wear ofindividual brake system components such asbrake pads or disks strongly depends on yourdriving style and the conditions under whichyou operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving stylecalling for high-demand braking will causeyour vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.

Driving offWarm up the engine smoothly. Do not placefull load on the engine until the operatingtemperature has been reached.

! When driving off on a slippery surface, donot allow a drive wheel to spin for an

extended period with the ESP® switchedoff. Doing so may cause serious damage tothe drivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Simultaneously depressing theaccelerator pedal and applying the brakesreduces engine performance and causespremature brake and drivetrain wear whichis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

HydroplaningDepending on the depth of the water layer onthe road, hydroplaning may occur, even at lowspeeds and with new tires. In heavy rain orwhen conditions indicate possiblehydroplaning:X Reduce vehicle speed.X Avoid track grooves in the road.X Apply brakes cautiously.

Standing water! Do not drive through flooded areas.

Before driving through water, determine itsdepth.If you must drive through standing water,drive slowly to prevent water from enteringthe passenger compartment or the enginecompartment. Water in these areas couldcause damage to electrical components orwiring of the engine or transmission, orcould result in water being ingested by theengine through the air intake causingsevere internal engine damage. Any suchdamage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Driving abroadIf you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.or Canada, you should request dealer

Driving instructions 257

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 257

Z

network information for your destination fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Control and operation of radio transmitter

Safety notes

G Warning!Please do not forget that your primaryresponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’sattention to the road must always be his/herprimary focus when driving. For your safetyand the safety of others, we recommend thatyou pull over to a safe location and stopbefore placing or taking a telephone call.If you choose to use the telephone19 whiledriving, please use the hands-free device andonly use the telephone when road, weatherand traffic conditions permit. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile telephone while driving a vehicle.Only operate the audio system orCOMAND19 (Cockpit Management and DataSystem) if road, weather and trafficconditions permit. Otherwise, you may not beable to observe traffic conditions and couldendanger yourself and others.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

Emission controlCertain systems of the engine serve to keepthe toxic components of the exhaust gaseswithin permissible limits required by law.These systems will function properly onlywhen maintained strictly according to factoryspecifications. Any adjustments on theengine should, therefore, be carried out onlyby qualified Mercedes-Benz Centerauthorized technicians.

Engine adjustments should not be altered inany way. Moreover, the specified serviceprocedures must be carried out regularlyaccording to Mercedes-Benz servicingrequirements. For details refer to theMaintenance Booklet.

G Warning!Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

Maintenance

NotesThe Maintenance System in your vehicletracks the distance driven and the timeelapsed since the last maintenance service.It calculates other maintenance service workrequired, and calls for the next maintenanceservice accordingly.We strongly recommend that you have yourvehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordancewith the Maintenance Booklet at the timescalled for by the maintenance serviceindicator.

i Failure to have the vehicle maintained inaccordance with the Maintenance Bookletand maintenance service indicator at thedesignated times/mileage will result invehicle damage not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

19 Observe all legal requirements.

258 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 258

Maintenance service indicator message

Information on maintenance work andmaintenance intervals are specified in theMaintenance Booklet. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, or visitwww.mbusa.com (USA only) for additionalinformation.The maintenance service indicator messagewill notify you when the next maintenanceservice is required.Starting approximately 1 month before thenext maintenance service is required, one ofthe following messages will appear in themultifunction display. The messages willappear while you are driving or when youswitch on the ignition (example service A):Next Service A in XXXX miles (km)Next Service A in XX daysService A Due

An additional number or a further letter incombination with the maintenance type canbe indicated. This indicates that furtherauxiliary maintenance work is required.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor more information.

Clearing the maintenance service indicator messageThe maintenance service indicator messageis cleared automaticallyRafter approximately 10 seconds when you

switch on the ignitionRafter approximately 10 seconds when

reaching the service threshold while drivingRafter approximately 30 seconds, once the

suggested maintenance service term haspassed

X Clearing the maintenance service indicator message manually: Pressbutton % or button a on themultifunction steering wheel.The standard display appears in themultifunction display.

Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggestedmaintenance service term, you will see thefollowing message in the multifunctiondisplay:Service A Exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)Service A Exceeded by XXX daysIn addition, a signal sounds when themessage appears.Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreset the maintenance service indicatorfollowing a completed maintenance service.

Calling up the maintenance service indicator display

i The menu overview can be found on(Y page 121).

You can call up the maintenance serviceindicator display at any time to check whenthe next maintenance service is required.

Maintenance 259

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 259

Z

X Switch on the ignition.The standard display of the control systemappears (Y page 121).

X Press button = or ; on themultifunction steering wheel to select theService menu.

X Press button : or 9 to selectASSYST PLUS.

X Press button a on the multifunctionsteering wheel to confirm.The maintenance service indicator displaywith the maintenance service deadlineappears in the multifunction display.

i If the battery was disconnected, the daysof disconnection will not be included in thecount shown by the maintenance serviceindicator. To arrive at the true maintenanceservice deadline, you will need to subtractthese days from the days shown in themaintenance service indicator message ormaintenance service indicator display.

Resetting the maintenance service indicator

In the event that the maintenance service onyour vehicle is not carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, you can have themaintenance service indicator reset.The automotive maintenance facility carryingout the maintenance service will find theinformation for resetting the maintenanceservice indicator in the maintenance-relevantliterature for your vehicle.Such literature is available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or directly fromMercedes-Benz.

! If the maintenance service indicator wasreset inadvertently, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center correct it.Only reset the maintenance serviceindicator if the proper maintenance servicehas been performed. Not following theproper maintenance service as describedin the Maintenance Booklet will result in

engine damage and/or other vehicledamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

Vehicle care

Cleaning and care of the vehicle

NotesRegular and proper care will help to maintainthe value of your vehicle.

G Warning!Many cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on theparticular container. Always open yourvehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning theinside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.

! When cleaning the vehicle, do not usescouring agents. Never apply strong forceand only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.Otherwise you may scratch or damage thesurface to be cleaned.

While in operation, even while parked, yourvehicle is subjected to varying externalinfluences which, if gone unchecked, canattack the paintwork as well as the vehicleunderbody and cause lasting damage.Such damage is caused not only by extremeand varying climatic conditions, but also by:RAir pollutionRRoad saltRTarRGravel and stone chipping

260 Vehicle careOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 260

To avoid paint damage, you shouldimmediately remove:RGrease and oilRFuelRCoolantRBrake fluidRBird droppingsRInsectsRTree resins etc.Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminatesthe aggressiveness and potency of the aboveadverse influences.More frequent washings are necessary todeal with unfavorable conditions:Rnear the oceanRin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust

emissions)Rduring winter operationYou should check your vehicle from time totime for stone chipping or other damage. Anydamage should be repaired as soon aspossible to prevent corrosion.In doing so, do not neglect the underbody ofthe vehicle. A prerequisite for a thoroughcheck is a washing of the underbody followedby a thorough inspection. Damaged areasneed to be re-undercoated.Your vehicle has been treated at the factorywith a wax-base rustproofing in the bodycavities which will last for the lifetime of thevehicle. Post-production treatment is neithernecessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility ofincompatibility between materials used in theproduction process and others applied later.We have selected vehicle-care products andcompiled recommendations which arespecially matched to our vehicles and whichalways reflect the latest technology. You canobtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-careproducts at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion ordamage due to negligent or incorrect carecannot always be removed or repaired withthe vehicle-care products recommendedhere. In such cases it is best to seek aid at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The following topics deal with the cleaningand care of your vehicle and give important“how-to” information as well as references toMercedes-Benz approved vehicle-careproducts.

Power washer! Follow the instructions provided by the

power washer manufacturer onmaintaining a distance between the vehicleand the nozzle of the power washer.Never use a round nozzle to power-washtires. The intense jet of water can result indamage to the tire.Always replace a damaged tire.Always keep the jet of water moving acrossthe surface. Do not aim directly at electricalparts, electrical connectors, seals, or otherrubber parts.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet ofwater, and a SmartKey is withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, itcould be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

Tar stainsQuickly remove tar stains before they dry andbecome more difficult to remove. A tarremover is recommended.

Paintwork, painted body components! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape

or similar materials to painted bodycomponents may damage the paintwork.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care shouldbe applied when water drops on the paintsurface do not “bead up”. This should

Vehicle care 261

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 261

Z

normally be done every 3 to 5 months,depending on the climate and washingdetergent used.Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleanershould be applied if the paint surface showssigns of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).Do not apply any of these products or wax ifyour vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hoodis still hot.X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for

quick and provisional repairs of minor paintdamage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicledoors, etc.).

Engine cleaningPrior to cleaning the engine compartment,make sure to protect electrical componentsand connectors from contact with water andcleaning agents.Corrosion protection, such as MBAnticorrosion Wax should be applied to theengine compartment after every enginecleaning. Before applying, all control linkagebushings and joints should be lubricated. Thepoly-V-belt and all pulleys should beprotected from any wax.

Vehicle washingIn the winter, thoroughly remove all traces ofroad salt as soon as possible.When washing the vehicle underbody, do notforget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet ofwater, and a SmartKey is withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, itcould be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

Hand-washX Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle

in direct sunlight.X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to

clean the vehicle.

X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,such as Mercedes-Benz approved CarShampoo.

X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with adiffused jet of water.

X Do not spray directly towards theventilation intake.

X Use plenty of water and rinse the spongeand chamois frequently.

X Rinse with clean water and dry with achamois thoroughly.Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on thefinish.

Automatic car washYou can have your vehicle washed in anautomatic car wash from the start. Brushlesscar washes are preferable.X To protect the filter system, activate the air

recirculation mode using button g onthe climate control panel.

! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatictouchless car wash which uses causticspray. Caustic spray will damage the paintor ornamental moldings.

If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it beforerunning it through the automatic car wash.

! Make sure the combination switch is setto wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rainsensor could activate and cause the wipersto move unintentionally. This may lead tovehicle damage.Due to the width of the vehicle, fold inexterior rear view mirrors prior to runningthe vehicle through an automatic car washto prevent damage to the mirrors.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:X When taking the vehicle through an

automatic conveyor-type car wash:Make sure the automatic transmissionremains in neutral position N.

When leaving the automatic car wash, makesure the mirrors are folded out.

262 Vehicle careOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 262

After running the vehicle through anautomatic car wash, wipe any wax off of thewindshield and the wiper blade inserts. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisewhich can be caused by residual wax on thewindshield.

Ornamental moldingsX For regular cleaning and care of ornamental

moldings, use a damp cloth.

! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamentalmoldings. Although ornamental moldingsmay have chrome appearance, they couldbe made of anodized aluminum that will bedamaged when cleaned with chromecleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to cleanthose ornamental moldings.For very dirty ornamental moldings ofwhich you are sure are chrome-plated, usea chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether anornamental molding is chrome-plated,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lensesX Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,with plenty of water.

! Only use window cleaning solutions thatare suitable for plastic lamp lenses.Window cleaning solutions which are notsuitable may damage the plastic lamplenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do notuse abrasives, solvents or cleaners thatcontain solvents.

Cleaning the driving system sensors

The Parktronic system sensors : are located inthe front and rear bumper.

To clean the bumper area near driving systemsensors : observe the following:RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,with plenty of water.RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth.

! If you use a power washer to clean thesensor covers, observe the following:RFollow the instructions provided by the

power washer manufacturer.RMaintain a distance between the sensor

covers and the nozzle of the powerwasher.

Cleaning the rear view camera lens

X Only use clean water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean rear view cameralens :.

Vehicle care 263

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 263

Z

Be careful not to apply wax to rear viewcamera lens : when waxing the vehicle. Ifnecessary, remove the wax using theMercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo withplenty of water.

! Do not clean the camera and the areaaround the cameraRwith a high-pressure cleanerRwith a dry cloth and strong pressureRwith aggressive cleaning agentsYou could otherwise damage the camera.

Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades! The windshield wipers must be in a

vertical position before folding them awayfrom the windshield. They could otherwisedamage the hood.Never open the hood when the wiper armsare folded forward.

X Make sure the hood is fully closed.X Switch on the ignition.X Turn combination switch to wiper setting° (Y page 96).

X With wiper arms in vertical position, switchoff the ignition.

G Warning!For safety reasons, switch off wipers andremove SmartKey from starter switch beforecleaning the windshield and/or the wiperblades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Makesure the vehicle’s on-board electronics havestatus 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor couldsuddenly turn on and cause injury.

! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.They could tear.

X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snapinto place.

X Clean the windshield and the wiper bladeinserts with a clean cloth and milddetergent solution.

X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild windowcleaning solution on all outside and insideglass surfaces.An automotive glass cleaner isrecommended.

! Fold the windshield wiper arms back ontothe windshield before turning the SmartKeyin the starter switch or pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button.Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiperarm back. If released, the force of theimpact from the tensioning spring couldcrack the windshield.

! To clean the window interior, do not usea dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents. Do not touch theinside of the windows with hard objectssuch as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so maydamage the windows.

Cleaning the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelThe rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has aprotective layer on the inside.X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window

cleaning solution.An automotive glass cleaner isrecommended.

! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solventsor cleaners containing solvents. Do nottouch the protective layer with hard objectssuch as an ice scraper or ring. Never applystrong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the rearpart of the tilt/sliding panel.Otherwise you may scratch or damage theprotective layer.

264 Vehicle careOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 264

Light alloy wheelsIf possible, clean wheels once a week.X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,

a soft bristle brush and a strong spray ofwater for cleaning the light alloy wheels.

! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.Acid may cause corrosion or damage theclear coat.

! The vehicle should not be parked for anextended period of time immediately afterit has been cleaned. This applies especiallyafter the wheel rims have been cleanedwith wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleanerscan lead to increased corrosion of thebrake disks and brake pads. Non-approvedwheel cleaners may also damage the wheelpaint if the vehicle is not driven aftercleaning.Therefore, the vehicle’s brake systemshould always be warmed-up before it isparked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle forseveral minutes to allow the brakes to dry.When applying Mercedes-Benz approvedTire Care and Mercedes-Benz approvedWheel Care products, take care not tospray them on the brake disks.

Plastic and rubber partsX Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild

detergent for delicate fabrics as a washingsolution.

X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarmsolution.The surface may temporarily change color.If this is the case, wait for it to dry.

G Warning!Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprayscontaining solvents to clean the cockpit or thesteering wheel. Cleaners containing solventswill make the surface porous and vehicleoccupants could suffer serious injuries fromplastic parts coming loose in the event of airbag deployment.

! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.Otherwise you may scratch or damage thesurface.

Hard plastic trim items X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care

on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with lightpressure.

Audio or COMAND display! You must switch off the audio or

COMAND display and allow it to cool priorto cleaning.

! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.These can damage or even destroy theaudio or COMAND display screen.

X Use a standard microfiber cloth and applywith light pressure.

Steering wheel and gear selector leverX Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly

or clean with Mercedes-Benz approvedLeather Care.

CarpetsX Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and

Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.

Headliner and shelf below rear windowX Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo

cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat beltsX Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.

! The seat belts must not be treated withchemical cleaning agents. Do not dry theseat belts at temperatures above 176‡(80†) or in direct sunlight.

Vehicle care 265

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 265

Z

G Warning!Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.

UpholsteryUsing aftermarket seat covers or wearingclothing that have the tendency to give offcoloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause theupholstery to become permanentlydiscolored. By lining the seats with a properintermediate cover, contact-discoloration willbe prevented.

G Warning!Only use seat or head restraint covers whichhave been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.Using other seat or head restraint covers mayinterfere with or preventRdeployment of the front side impact air

bagsRdeployment of the rear side impact air bagsRdeployment of the pelvis air bagsRactivation of the NECK-PRO active front

head restraints

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

Leather upholsteryPlease note that leather upholstery is anatural product and is therefore subject to anatural aging process. Leather upholsterymay also react to certain ambient influencessuch as high humidity or high temperature byshowing wrinkles for example.X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth

and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:RWipe with light pressure only.RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning

agents such as scouring milk or powder.

RDo not soak the leather upholstery.As leather is a natural product, it couldotherwise harden or become porous.RExercise particular care when cleaning

perforated leather as its undersideshould not become wet.

Wood trimsX Only use water and a damp cloth to clean

wood trims in your vehicle.

! Do not use solvents like tar remover orwheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes asthese may be abrasive.

Chrome-plated exhaust tipRegular cleaning and care of chrome-platedexhaust tips will help to maintain their shineand the classy appearance.X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome

Polishing Paste each time the vehicle hasbeen washed, especially during the winter.

! Do not use alkaline cleaners such aswheel cleaners as they could causecorrosion.

266 Vehicle careOp

erat

ion


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 266

Vehicle equipment ............................ 268Where will I find ...? .......................... 268Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display ....................... 270What to do if … .................................. 297Unlocking/locking manually ........... 309Resetting activated NECK-PROactive front head restraints ............. 311Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 312Replacing bulbs ................................. 313Replacing wiper blades .................... 316Flat tire .............................................. 317Battery ............................................... 321Jump starting .................................... 323Towing the vehicle ............................ 325Fuses .................................................. 328

267

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 267

Vehicle equipment


Where will I find ...?

First aid kiti Check expiration dates and contents for

completeness at least once a year andreplace missing/expired items.

Depending on the equipment configuration,the first-aid kit will be located either in theopen storage department in the trunk orbehind the cover panel on the left-hand sideof the trunk.

X Turn lock : counterclockwise.X Fold down cover ;.

The first aid kit can be removed.

Vehicle tool kitThe vehicle tool kit is located in the spaceunderneath the trunk floor.

i Vehicles without spare wheel are notfactory-equipped with the tools required fora wheel change such as a jack or a wheel

wrench. Some tools required for a wheelchange are specific to your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain the tools approved foryour vehicle.

The vehicle tool kit includes:RCollapsible wheel chock20

RFuse chartRJack20

RPair of gloves20

RTowing eye boltRWheel wrench20

X Open the trunk (Y page 75).X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.X Engage the floor handle on the upper trunk

lip.

! To prevent damage, always disengage thefloor handle from the upper trunk lip andlower the trunk floor before closing thetrunk.

: Tab; Removing vehicle tool kit box= Vehicle tool kit box cover? Opening vehicle tool kit box coverA TabB Vehicle tool kitC Vehicle tool kit boxD Luggage bowl

20 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

268 Where will I find ...?Pr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 268

X Removing vehicle tool kit box: Pulltab : in direction of arrow ; and liftvehicle tool kit box C.

X Remove vehicle tool kit box C fromluggage bowl D.

X Opening vehicle tool kit box cover: Pulltab A in direction of arrow ? and openvehicle tool kit box cover =.

X Installing vehicle tool kit box: Slidevehicle tool kit box C into the recess ofluggage bowl D.

X Push vehicle tool kit box C downward untilit engages into luggage bowl D.

Collapsible wheel chock The collapsible wheel chock serves to securethe vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the

vehicle tool kit (Y page 268).

X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.X Fold the lower plate outward ;.X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way

into the openings of base plate =.For information on where to place wheelchocks when changing a wheel, see “Liftingthe vehicle” (Y page 318).

Jack

G Warning!Only use the jack supplied with your vehicleto lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If

you use the jack for any other purpose, you orothers could be injured, as the jack isdesigned only for the purpose of changing awheel.When using the jack, observe the safety notesin the “Mounting the spare wheel” section andthe notes on the jack.

X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit(Y page 268).

Storage position

X Turn the crank handle in the direction ofarrow as far as it will go.

Operational position

X Turn the crank handle clockwise.

Before placing the jack back into the vehicletool kit:X Fully collapse the jack.X Fold in the crank handle (storage position).

Where will I find ...? 269

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 269

Z

Spare wheel

G Observe Safety notes, see page 317.The spare wheel is located in the spaceunderneath the trunk floor.X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 75).X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.X Engage the trunk floor handle on the upper

trunk lip.

! To prevent damage, always disengage thefloor handle from the upper trunk lip andlower the trunk floor before closing thetrunk.

X Remove luggage bowl ; by turning itcounterclockwise.

X Remove spare wheel :.

Storing the spare wheel after useX Place spare wheel : into the spare wheel

well.X Secure spare wheel : by turning luggage

bowl ; clockwise.

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

NotesWarning and malfunction messages appear inthe multifunction display located in theinstrument cluster.

Certain warning and malfunction messagesare accompanied by an audible signal.Address these messages accordingly andfollow the additional instructions given in thisOperator’s Manual.High-priority messages appear in themultifunction display in red color.Certain messages of high priority cannot becleared from the multifunction display usinga or % on the multifunction steeringwheel (Y page 118).Other messages of high priority andmessages of less immediate priority can becleared from the multifunction display usinga or %. They are then stored in thevehicle status message memory(Y page 129). Remember that clearing amessage will only make the messagedisappear. Clearing a message will notcorrect the condition that caused themessage to appear.

G Warning!All categories of messages contain importantinformation which should be taken note ofand, where a malfunction is indicated,addressed as soon as possible at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Failure to repair the condition noted maycause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in propertydamage or personal injury.

G Warning!No messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lamps

270 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction displayPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 270

Rmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systems

Driving characteristics may be impaired.If you must continue to drive, do so with addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

On the pages that follow, you will find acompilation of the most important warningand malfunction messages that may appear.For your convenience the messages aredivided into text messages (Y page 272) andsymbol messages (Y page 279).

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 271

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 271

Z

Text messages

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Manual

USA only:The front passenger front air bag is activated while drivingeven though a child, small individual, or object below thesystem’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, orthe front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat orforces acting on the seat may make the system sensesupplemental weight.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Open the front passenger door.X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat

and properly secure the child in rear seat employing thechild restraint if necessary.

X Make sure no objects which apply supplemental weight tothe seat are present. The system may recognize suchsupplemental weight and sense that an occupant on thefront passenger seat is of a greater weight than actuallypresent.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger doorand switch on the ignition.

Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console(Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the instrumentcluster (Y page 28) for the following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should

illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS(Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger front airbag.Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should notappear in the multifunction display at any time the seat isunoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system tocomplete the necessary check cycles and to make sureneither message appears in the multifunction display.

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the frontpassenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 272

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutionsclassification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicatorlamp will remain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not workingproperly. Have the system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps,do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the passengerseat until the system has been repaired.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 273

Z


Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual

USA only:The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while drivingeven though an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forcesacting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease inweight.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the

vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door

and switch on the ignition.Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console(Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the instrumentcluster (Y page 28) for the following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should

illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS(Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger front airbag.Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should notappear in the multifunction display at any time the seat isunoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system tocomplete the necessary check cycles and to make sureneither message appears in the multifunction display.

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the frontpassenger seat again. Depending on the front passengerclassification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicatorlamp will remain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not workingproperly. Have the system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 274


Check Child Seat Position

See Operator's Manual

Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):The BabySmart™ child seat is not positioned correctly.Risk of injury!X Install the BabySmart™ child seat in correct position.

Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):The sensor for child seat recognition is malfunctioning.Risk of injury!X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passengerseat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the frontpassenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Driving systems


Cruise Control

Inoperative

The cruise control is malfunctioning.In addition an acoustic warning sounds.X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Cruise Control

- - - mph One of the activation conditions for cruise control has notbeen fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below20 mph (30 km/h).X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows

and set the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

(Y page 181).


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 275

Z

Vehicle


P Shift to 'P'

You have turned off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button with the automatic transmission in neutralposition N and opened the driver’s door.orYou have attempted to switch off the engine with theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button with the automatictransmission in reverse gear R or drive position D.X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P.

Shift to 'P' or 'N'

to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine while the automatictransmission was in reverse gear R or drive position D.X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or

neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.

Tires


Check Tire Pressure

Then Restart Run Flat Indicator

There has been a warning message about a loss in the tireinflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning systemwas not restarted yet.X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each

tire.X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system

(Y page 233).

Run Flat Indicator

Inoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Check Tire Pressure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tireinflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the trafficsituation around you.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel(Y page 317).

X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required(Y page 232).

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system afteradjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 233).


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 276


Tire pressures will be displayed

after driving a few minutes

The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the AdvancedTPMS.X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Monitor

Inoperative

The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized


Tire Pressure Monitor

Inoperative No Wheel Sensors

There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted(e.g. winter tires).X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an


TirePress. Sensor(s)Missing

At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tireinflation pressure in the multifunction display.X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized


At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors ismounted (e.g. spare wheel).The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tireinflation pressure in the multifunction display.X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized


Tire Press. Monitor

Currently Unavailable

The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressuredue to a nearby radio interference source or insufficientpower supply.As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically aftera few minutes of driving.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 277

Z


Correct Tire Pressure

The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.orThe tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ fromeach other significantly.The tire inflation pressure values are shown in themultifunction display.X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required

(Y page 232).X Restart the Advanced TPMS (Y page 236).

Caution Tire Defect

At least one tire is deflating.The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 317).

Check Tires

The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantlybelow the reference value.The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 317).

G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You maylose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affecthandling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wearunevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they aremore likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 278

Symbol messages

Brake


# Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads have reached their wear limit.X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible at an


! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervalsspecified in the Maintenance Booklet.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 279

Z


$(USA only)J(Canadaonly)

ABS and ESC Inoperative See Operator’s Manual

In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d and theyellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.The brake system is still functioning normally but due to amalfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-startassist system are unavailable.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock

during hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking

responsiveness.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of anaccident.


ABS and ESC Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual

In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d and theyellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.The brake system is still functioning normally but due to amalfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-startassist system are unavailable.The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed

of above 12 mph (20 km/h).When the message disappears, the ESP® is available again.

If the message does not disappear:X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock





actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 280



ABS and ESC Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual

In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d and theyellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.The brake system still functions normally but due toinsufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, andthe hill-start assist system are unavailable.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock


responsiveness.When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start assist system areoperational again and the message should disappear.If the message does not disappear:X Have the alternator and the battery checked.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of anaccident.


EBD, ABS, and ESC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d and theyellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.The brake system is still functioning normally but due to amalfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, and the ESP® areunavailable.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock




$(USA only)!(Canadaonly)

Release Parking Brake

You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In additionan acoustic warning sounds.X Release the parking brake.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 281

Z



Check Brake Fluid Level

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.Risk of accident!X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Do not drive any further.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call

Roadside Assistance.Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

G Warning!Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Haveyour brake system checked immediately.Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can beseriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum markor below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 282

Safety systems


÷ ESC Inoperative See Operator's Manual

In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.The brake system is still functioning normally but due to amalfunction, the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start assistsystem are unavailable.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock




÷ ESC Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.The brake system still functions normally but due toinsufficient power supply the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-startassist system are not available.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock


responsiveness.When the voltage is above the required value again, theESP® is operational again and the message in themultifunction display should disappear.If the message in the multifunction display does notdisappear:X Have the alternator and the battery checked.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of anaccident.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 283

Z



In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.The brake system is still functioning normally but without theBAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start assist system available.X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed

of above 12 mph (20 km/h).When the message disappears, the ESP® is available again.

If the message does not disappear:X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock





If the yellow ESP® warning lamp d flashes while drivingand this message appears, the Electronic Traction System(ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of thedrive wheel brakes.As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic TractionSystem (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.The message in the multifunction display disappears and theESP® warning lamp d goes out.

G Tele Aid Inoperative

One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system aremalfunctioning.X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized


6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint System(SRS). The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized


6 Front Left SRS Malfunction Service Required

Components of the driver’s supplemental restraint systemmay not work properly.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized



actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 284


6 Front Right SRS Malfunction Service Required

Components of the front passenger’s supplemental restraintsystem may not work properly.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized


6 Rear Left SRS Malfunction Service Required

Components of the left rear passenger’s supplementalrestraint system may not work properly.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized


6 Rear Center SRS Malfunction Service Required

Components of the center rear passenger’s supplementalrestraint system may not work properly.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized


6 Rear Right SRS Malfunction Service Required

Components of the right rear passenger’s supplementalrestraint system may not work properly.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized


6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required

The left window curtain air bag may not work properly.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized


6 Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required

The right window curtain air bag may not work properly.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized


G Warning!In the event a malfunction of the SRS isindicated as outlined above, the SRS may notbe operational.For your safety, we strongly recommend thatyou contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center immediately to have the systemchecked. Otherwise the SRS may not beactivated when needed in an accident, whichcould result in serious or fatal injury, or itmight deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarilywhich could also result in injury.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 285

Z

Vehicle


N The trunk is open.X Close the trunk (Y page 76).

M You are driving with the hood open.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to

do so.X Close the hood (Y page 225).There is otherwise danger of an accident.

; You are driving with at least one door open. The displaysymbol shows you which doors are open.X Close all doors.

_ Rear Left Backrest Not LatchedorRear Right Backrest Not Latched

The left or right rear seat backrest is not engaged.X Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fully engaged in

position.

+ Key Detected In Vehicle

A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle wasrecognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.

+ Don’t Forget Your Key

This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if thedriver’s door is opened with the engine turned off and noSmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only areminder.X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.

+ Take Your Key From Ignition

You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

+ Obtain A New Key

The SmartKey is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 286


+ Close Doors To Lock Vehicle

You tried to lock the vehicle but not all doors were closed.X Close doors and lock the vehicle again.

+ Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle

The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to thevehicle.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

+ Replace Key Battery

The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO aredischarged.X Replace the batteries (Y page 312).

+ Key Not Detected(messageappears inred)

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while theengine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Search for the SmartKey.

The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the enginebe started again after the engine is stopped.

+ Key Not Detected(messageappears inred)

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while theengine is running because there is strong radio-frequencyinterference.X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch

(Y page 78).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.

+ Key Not Detected(messageappears inwhite)

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the

starter switch (Y page 78).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.

+ Remove 'Start' Button and Insert Key

The KEYLESS-GO system is malfunctioning.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch

(Y page 78).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 287

Z


¥ Check Washer Fluid

The water level has dropped to approximately 1.1 US qts(1.0 l).X Add washer fluid (Y page 228).

D Power SteeringMalfunctionSee Operator's Manual

Power assistance for the steering system is not available. Aconsiderably higher degree of effort is necessary to steer thevehicle.X Check whether you are capable to apply the higher degree

of effort necessary to safely steer the vehicle.

If you are able to steer the vehicle safely:X Continue driving with added caution.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

If, in any way, you feel that you are not able to steer the vehiclesafely:X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to

do so.X Apply the parking brake.X Do not continue to drive.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Engine


+ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant (Y page 227).X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling

system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G Warning!Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burnif it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the messageand symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine willoverheat causing major engine damage.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 288


? Coolant Low Stop Vehicle! Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.X Turn off the engine immediately.X Engage the parking brake.X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.

You could otherwise damage the engine.X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument

cluster.X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go citytraffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡(120†).

G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into theengine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening theengine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 289

Z


? Coolant Low Stop Vehicle! Turn Engine Off

The poly-V-belt could be broken.X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.X Turn off the engine immediately.X Check the poly-V-belt.X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the

engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pumpwhich may result in damage to the engine. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with thismessage displayed. Doing so could result in serious enginedamage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrumentcluster.

X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately.

? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument

cluster.If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you maycontinue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by drivinguphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.

X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.

# The battery is no longer charging.Possible causes:Ralternator malfunctioningRbroken poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronic systemX Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so and check the poly-V-belt.X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the

engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pumpwhich may result in damage to the engine. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistentwith reduced braking responsiveness.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 290


4 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.X Check the engine oil level (Y page 225) and add engine oil

as required (Y page 226).X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine

checked for possible leaks.

If the message Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling appears while the engine isrunning and at operating temperature, theengine oil level has dropped to approximatelythe minimum level.The message will be stored in the vehiclestatus message memory after you havecleared it from the multifunction display.Visually check for oil leaks. If there are noobvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest servicestation to refill your engine oil to the requiredlevel.

For information on approved engine oilscontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).

! Engine oil level warnings should not beignored. Extended driving with the symboldisplayed could result in serious enginedamage that is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.


8 Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.X Refuel at the next gas station.

8 Gas Cap Loose

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. Thefuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system maybe leaking.X Check the fuel cap (Y page 222).X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 291

Z

Lamps


b Active Headlamps Inoperative

The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Check Left Reverse LamporCheck Right Reverse Lamp

The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).

b Check Left Brake LamporCheck Right Brake Lamp

The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).

b Check Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. Thismessage will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Check Left Fog LamporCheck Right Fog Lamp

The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 292


b Check Front Left Sidemarker LamporCheck Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Check Rear Left Sidemarker LamporCheck Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp

The rear left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).

b Check Front Left Parking LamporCheck Front Right Parking Lamp

The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Check Left High BeamorCheck Right High Beam

The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 293

Z


b Check Left License Plate LamporCheck Right License Plate Lamp

The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Auto Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come onautomatically.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):X Switch off the daytime running lamp mode in the control

system (Y page 133).X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch

(Y page 90).

b Check Left Low BeamorCheck Right Low Beam

The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible

(Y page 313).X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center as soon as possible.

b Check Rear Left Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).

b Switch Off Lights

You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on orremoved the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicleand left the headlamps on.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or c

(Y page 90).orX With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior

lamp switch to its stop.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 294


b Check Left Tail LamporCheck Right Tail Lamp

The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).

b Check Left Tail and Brake LampsorCheck Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).

b Check Left Cornering LightorCheck Right Cornering Light

The left or right corner-illuminating front fog lamp ismalfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Check Rear Left Turn SignalorCheck Rear Right Turn Signal

The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 295

Z


b Check Front Left Turn SignalorCheck Front Right Turn Signal

The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).

b Check Left Mirror Turn SignalorCheck Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror ismalfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs havestopped working.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

Tires


h Tire Press. Warning Caution Tire Malfunction

At least one tire is deflating.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 317).

h Check Tire Pressure

The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantlybelow the reference value.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 317).


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 296

G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You maylose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affecthandling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wearunevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they aremore likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

What to do if …

Lamps in instrument cluster

NotesIf any of the following lamps in the instrumentcluster fails to come on during the bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, havethe respective bulb checked and replaced ifnecessary.

When you switch on the ignition, all lamps inthe instrument cluster come on. The low-beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beamheadlamp indicator lamp, turn signalindicator lamps, and the indicator lamps forthe fog lamps will only come on if activated.If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails tocome on when the ignition is switched on,have it checked and replaced if necessary.

What to do if … 297

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 297

Z

Brake

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABSindicator lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning.

The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,the ESP®, and the EBP are also switched off.The brake system is still functioning normally but without thesystems specified above available.If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such asthe navigation system or the automatic transmission may also bemalfunctioning.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking

responsiveness.X Read and observe messages that may appear in the

multifunction display (Y page 270).X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz



The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.The battery might not be charged sufficiently.When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS isoperational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during



multifunction display (Y page 270).X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator

and the battery checked.

298 What to do if …Pr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 298



The ABS is temporarily not available. The ESP®, the BAS, and theEBP are also unavailable.The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.The brake system is still functioning normally but without thesystems specified above.The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at avehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during





!d

The yellow ABSindicator lamp and theyellow ESP® warninglamp come on while theengine is running andan acoustic warningsounds.

The brake system is still functioning normally but due to amalfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, and the ESP® areunavailable.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Read and observe messages that may appear in the




Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 299

Z


!d

The red brake warninglamp comes on whiledriving. In addition, theyellow ABS indicatorlamp, and the yellowESP® warning lampcome on and anacoustic warningsounds.

The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to amalfunction.The ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® are also switched off.The brake system is still functioning normally but without thesystems specified above available.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during





$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake warninglamp comes on whiledriving and an acousticwarning sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake engaged.X Release the parking brake.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake warninglamp comes on whilethe engine is running.

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.Risk of accident!X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as

soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Read and observe messages that may appear in the

multifunction display (Y page 270).X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

G Warning!Driving with the brake warning lampilluminated can result in an accident. Haveyour brake system checked immediately if thebrake warning lamp stays on. Do not addbrake fluid before checking the brake system.Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can resultin spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and

the brake fluid catching fire. You can beseriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brakefluid reservoir has fallen to the minimummark or below, have the brake systemchecked for brake pad thickness and leaks.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 300

Safety systems


7 The red seat belttelltale comeson for amaximum of6 seconds afterstarting theengine.

The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fastenyour seat belts before driving off.X Fasten your seat belts.Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seatbelt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds afterstarting the engine.

7 The red seat belttelltale comeson. In additionyou hear awarning chimefor a maximumof 6 secondsafter starting theengine.

You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt.

The warning chime stops sounding.

7 The red seat belttelltale comeson while thevehicle isstanding stilland the engine isrunning or whiledriving.

You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten yourseat belts.X Fasten your seat belts.

The seat belt telltale goes out.

There are items placed on the front passenger seat and thereforethe system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them

in a safe place.The seat belt telltale goes out.

7 The red seat belttelltale flasheswhile driving. Inaddition, anintermittentwarning chimesounds withincreasingintensity.

The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and youand/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seatbelts.X Fasten your seat belts.

The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stopssounding.

There are items placed on the front passenger seat and thereforethe system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them

in a safe place.The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stopssounding.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 301

Z

i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and theseat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, thedriver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a frontdoor is opened.


6 The red SRSindicator lampcomes on whiledriving.

There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags orEmergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedlyor fail to activate in an accident.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

G Warning!In the event a malfunction of the SRS isindicated as outlined above, the SRS may notbe operational.For your safety, we strongly recommend thatyou contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center immediately to have the systemchecked. Otherwise the SRS may not beactivated when needed in an accident, whichcould result in serious or fatal injury, or itmight deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarilywhich could also result in injury.


d All models,exceptC 63 AMG:The yellow ESP®

warning lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning.

The ESP® has been switched off.Risk of accident!When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if thesystem recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheelis spinning.X Switch the ESP® back on.

Exceptions: (Y page 63).X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving

to the prevailing road and weather conditions.X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system

checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon aspossible.

d C 63 AMG only:The yellow ESP®


ESP® SPORT is activated.Risk of accident!When ESP® SPORT is activated it will only stabilize the vehicle toa limited extent if the system recognizes that the vehicle starts toskid or that a wheel is spinning.X Switch the ESP® SPORT off (Y page 64).

The message ESP On appears in the multifunction display.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 302


då

C 63 AMG only:The yellow ESP®

warning lampand the yellowESP OFFwarning lampcome on whilethe engine isrunning.

The ESP® has been switched off.Risk of accident!When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if thesystem recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheelis spinning.X Switch the ESP® back on.

Exceptions: (Y page 64).X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving

to the prevailing road and weather conditions.X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system

checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon aspossible.

d All models,exceptC 63 AMG:The yellow ESP®


The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.Risk of accident!X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the

multifunction display.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather

conditions.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.

då

C 63 AMG only:The yellow ESP®

warning lampand the yellowESP OFFwarning lampcome on whilethe engine isrunning.

The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.Risk of accident!X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the

multifunction display.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather

conditions.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 303

Z


d The yellow ESP®

warning lampflashes whiledriving.

The ESP® or the ETS/4-ETS has come into operation because ofdetected traction loss in at least one tire.X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather

conditions.X Do not deactivate the ESP®.

Exceptions: (Y page 63).Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of anaccident.

At least one wheel is spinning and the Electronic Traction System(ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drivewheel brakes.X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the

multifunction display.As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic TractionSystem (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.The message in the multifunction display disappears and theESP® warning lamp d goes out.

Vehicle


8 The yellow fueltank reservewarning lampcomes on whenthe engine isrunning.

The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.X Refuel at the next gas station.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 304

Engine


;

The yellow enginemalfunction indicatorlamp comes on whenthe engine is running.

There may be a malfunction inRthe fuel management systemRthe ignition systemRthe emission control systemRsystems which affect emissionsSuch malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values andmay switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized


i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop assoon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Checklocal requirements.

;

The yellow enginemalfunction indicatorlamp comes on whenthe engine is running.

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuelcap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.X Check the fuel cap (Y page 222).X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an


? The red coolanttemperaturewarning lampcomes on whenthe engine isrunning.

There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in thecooling system.If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may bebroken.X Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating

(Y page 227).X Have the cooling system checked.X If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you can

continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

X Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-godriving.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 305

Z


? The red coolanttemperaturewarning lampcomes on whenthe engine isrunning and anacousticwarning sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248‡ (120†).X Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine

and coolant to cool down.

G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

! The engine should not be operated withthe coolant temperature above 248‡(120†). Doing so may cause seriousdamage which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Tires


h Combinationlow tire pressuretelltale/TPMSmalfunctiontelltale for theAdvanced TPMSilluminatescontinuously.

The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and

braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display

(Y page 270).If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) beencorrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunctiontelltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.

h Combinationlow tire pressuretelltale/TPMSmalfunctiontelltale for theAdvanced TPMSflashes 60seconds andthen staysilluminated.

There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display

(Y page 270).X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tirepressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutesof driving.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 306

G Warning!Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on theinside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information placardor the tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately 1 minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

Lamp in center console


Canada only:45

The front passengerfront air bag offindicator lampilluminates andremains illuminated(Y page 47).

A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.

The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM childseat installed on the front passenger seat.X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized



Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 307

Z


Canada only:45

The front passengerfront air bag offindicator lamp does notilluminate or does notremain illuminated witha BabySmartTM childseat properly installedon the passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 57).If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on thefront passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

USA only:45

The front passengerfront air bag offindicator lampilluminates andremains illuminatedwith the weight of atypical adult orsomeone larger than asmall individual on thefront passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and

follow corrective steps (Y page 270).

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp illuminatesand remains illuminated with the weight of atypical adult or someone larger than a small

individual on the front passenger seat, do nothave any passenger use the front passengerseat until the system has been repaired.


USA only:45

The front passengerfront air bag offindicator lamp does notilluminate and/or doesnot remain illuminatedwith the weight of atypical 12-month-oldchild in a standard childrestraint or less on thefront passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat

and check installation of the child seat.X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the

seat are present.X If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains

out, have the system checked as soon as possible at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child onthe front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display andfollow corrective steps (Y page 270).


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 308

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp does notilluminate or remains out with the weight of atypical 12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint or less on the front passenger seat,do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the system has beenrepaired.

Unlocking/locking manually

Unlocking the vehicleIf you cannot unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock thedriver’s door and the trunk using themechanical key.The anti-theft alarm system will trigger whenyouRunlock the driver’s door or the trunk with

the mechanical keyandRopen the driver’s door or the trunkTo cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey intothe starter switch.

Removing the mechanical key

X Move locking tab : in the direction ofarrow.

X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.

Unlocking the driver’s door

X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’sdoor lock.

X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwiseto position 1.

X Pull the door handle to open the driver’sdoor.

X Turn mechanical key ; back and removeit from the driver’s door lock.

Unlocking the trunk A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.8 m)is required to open the trunk lid.

X Insert mechanical key ; into the trunk lidlock.

X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwiseto position 1.

! When you open the trunk, the trunk lidswings open upwards. Always make surethere is sufficient overhead clearance.

Unlocking/locking manually 309

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 309

Z

X Turn mechanical key ; back and removeit from the trunk lid lock.

Locking the vehicleIf you cannot lock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it asfollows:X Open the driver’s door.X Close the front passenger door, the rear

doors, and the trunk.X Press the central locking switch

(Y page 75).The locking knobs of the front passengerdoor and the rear doors move down.

X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or drained: Press down the locking knobs onthe front passenger door and the reardoors.

X Exit the vehicle.X Close the driver’s door.

X Remove mechanical key ; from theSmartKey (Y page 309).

X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’sdoor lock.

X Turn mechanical key ; clockwise toposition 1.The vehicle is locked.

X Turn mechanical key ; back and removeit from the driver’s door lock.

X Check whether the doors and the trunk arelocked.

X If necessary, lock the trunk with themechanical key (Y page 77).

i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuelfiller flap.

Fuel filler flap

G Warning!Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as theymay contain sharp edges. Otherwise, youcould injure yourself while releasing the fuelfiller flap.

In case the central locking system does notrelease the fuel filler flap, you can open itmanually.The fuel filler flap release is located on thepassenger side in the trunk behind the cover.X Open the trunk (Y page 75).X Open the fuse box cover in the trunk

(Y page 329).

X Pull fuel filler flap release : in direction ofarrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 222).X Close the cover.X Close the trunk.

310 Unlocking/locking manuallyPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 310

Manually unlocking the gear selector lever

If the vehicle’s electrical system ismalfunctioning, the gear selector lever couldremain locked in park position P. In this casethe gear selector lever can be unlockedmanually, e.g. to tow the vehicle.X Engage the parking brake.

! Do not use sharp objects to loosen thegear selector lever cover in the centerconsole, as this could damage the gearselector lever cover or the center console.

X Insert a flat, blunt object into the right edgeof gear selector lever cover : at thepositions indicated by the arrows.

X Loosen gear selector lever cover : usingthis object.

X Pull gear selector lever cover : out andremove.

X Simultaneously push down release ; andmove the gear selector lever out of parkposition P.The gear selector lever is unlocked.

i The gear selector lever is locked again assoon as you move it back to park positionP.

Resetting activated NECK-PRO active front head restraints

If the NECK-PRO active front head restraintshave been triggered in a rear-end collision,they must be reset.You can tell that the NECK-PRO active fronthead restraints have been triggered whenthey have been moved forward and cannot beadjusted.

G Warning!For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO activefront head restraints checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center after arear-end collision.

G Warning!When pushing back the head restraintcushion, make sure your fingers do notbecome caught between the head restraintcushion and the cover. Failing to do so maylead to injury.

i Pressing the head restraint cushion backrequires high force. If you encounterdifficulties when pushing the head restraintback, please have the procedureperformed at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

X Push the head restraint cushion at thebottom, back as far as possible ;.

X Push the head restraint cushion down intothe guide =.

Resetting activated NECK-PRO active front head restraints 311

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 311

Z

X Fold the head restraint cushion by the top,back firmly until it engages :.

X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PROactive front head restraint for the secondfront seat.

For information on NECK-PRO active fronthead restraints, see “NECK-PRO active fronthead restraints” (Y page 52).For information on head restraint adjustment,see “Seats” (Y page 79).

Replacing SmartKey batteries

If the batteries in the SmartKey aredischarged, the vehicle can no longer belocked or unlocked. It is recommended tohave the batteries replaced at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

G Warning!Batteries contain poisonous and corrosivesubstances. Therefore, keep the batteries outof reach of children.If a battery is swallowed, seek medical helpimmediately.

G Warning!SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Check withyour local government’s disposal guidelines.California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Batteries contain materials that can harm theenvironment if disposed of improperly.Recycling of batteries is the preferred methodof disposal. Many states (USA only) orprovinces (Canada only) require sellers ofbatteries to accept old batteries for recycling.When inserting the batteries, make sure theyare clean and free of lint.When replacing batteries, always replaceboth batteries.

i The required replacement batteries areavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Replacement batteries: Lithium, typeCR 2025 or equivalent.X Remove the mechanical key from the

SmartKey (Y page 309).

X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKeyopening until battery compartmentcover : opens. Do not keep the covershut.

X Remove the battery compartment cover.X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your

hand until battery = falls out.X Insert the new battery with the positive

terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth.X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment

cover into the housing and press the coverclosed.

X Check the operation of the SmartKey aswell as the KEYLESS-GO function.

312 Replacing SmartKey batteriesPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 312

Replacing bulbs

Safety notesSafe vehicle operation depends on properexterior lighting and signaling to a largedegree.Correct headlamp adjustment is extremelyimportant. Have headlamps checked andreadjusted at regular intervals and when abulb has been replaced. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forheadlamp adjustment.

G Warning!Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allowthe lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.Keep bulbs out of reach of children.Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. Abulb can explode if youRtouch or move it when hotRdrop the bulbRscratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it isdangerous to replace the bulb or repair thelamp and its components. We recommendthat you have such work done by a qualifiedtechnician.

i Since replacing bulbs is a technicallyhighly demanding process, we recommendto have them replaced at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i If the headlamps or front fog lamps arefogged up on the inside as a result of highhumidity, driving the vehicle a distance withthe lights on should clear up the fogging.

Replacing bulbs 313

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 313

Z

BulbsYou can replace the following bulbs yourself:

Halogen headlamps Type: Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W; Turn signal lamp: 3457A

Bi-Xenon headlamps Type: Turn signal lamp: Turn signal lamp:

3457A

Rear lamps Type: Passenger side: Tail lamp P 21 W

Driver’s side: Tail lamp and rear fog lampP 21 W

; Side marker lamp: W 5 W= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W? Tail lamp, brake lamp: P 21 WA Tail lamp, brake lamp: P 21 WB Backup lamp: P 21 W

Notes on bulb replacement! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not

described in this section. You couldotherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs orparts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and

bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

314 Replacing bulbsPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 314

G Observe Safety notes, see page 313.ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and

with the specified watt rating.RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb

to prevent short circuits.RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and

grease.RIf the newly installed bulb does not come

on, contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends usingLonglife (LL) bulbs.

Replacing bulbs for front lampsX Switch off the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position$.

X Open the hood (Y page 224).

G Warning!Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenonheadlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenonlamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb orrepair the lamp and its components. It isrecommended to have such work done by aqualified technician.

Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps only)

X Turn housing cover : counterclockwiseand remove it.

X Pull electric plug ; off the bulb ?.X Remove wire clip = from bulb holder by

pushing down and release from arrestorhook.

X Pull bulb ? at its socket out of bulb holder.X Insert the new bulb so that its socket

locates in the recess of bulb holder and islevel to it.

X Fold wire clip = back and press it down onbulb holder to engage it in the arrestorhook.

X Connect electric plug ; on bulb ?.X Align housing cover and turn it clockwise.

Front turn signal lamp bulb

X Turn bulb socket = with handle ;counterclockwise and remove it.

X Pull bulb out of bulb socket =.X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket= until the bulb engages.

X Place bulb socket = back into the housing.Handle ; must be in a horizontal line andmark : must be on the upper part (driver’sside headlamp) or lower part (passenger-side headlamp).

X Turn bulb socket = clockwise until itengages.

Replacing bulbs 315

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 315

Z

Replacing bulbs for rear lampsBefore you start to replace a bulb for a rearlamp, do the following:X Switch off the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position$.

X Open the trunk.

Tail lamp unit X Driver’s side: Lift up the bottom and pull out

the trim panel covering the driver side rearlight.

X Passenger side: Open the fuse box in thetrunk (Y page 329).

X Disconnect electrical connector ;.X Pull tabs : in direction of arrows.X Remove the bulb carrier.

Bulb carrier= Side marker lamp? Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only), side

marker lamp

A Backup lampB Tail lamp, brake lampC Tail lamp, brake lamp, parking and

standing lampD Turn signal lamp

Side marker lampX Turn the bulb socket on backside of tail

lamp unit counterclockwise and removeside marker lamp = with bulb socket.

X Turn the new bulb with socket on backsideof tail lamp unit clockwise until it engages.

Other lampsX Depending on which bulb needs to be

replaced, press gently onto the respectivebulb and turn it counterclockwise out of itsbulb socket.

X Gently press the new bulb into its bulbsocket and turn it clockwise until itengages.

Reinstall bulb carrierX Reinstall the bulb carrier and let tabs :

(Y page 316) engage.X Connect the electrical connector ;

(Y page 316) until it engages.X Reinstall trim panel.

Replacing wiper blades

Safety notes

G Warning!For safety reasons, switch off the wipers andremove the SmartKey from the starter switch(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure thevehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper motor could suddenly turn on and causeinjury.

316 Replacing wiper bladesPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 316

G Warning!Wiper blades are components that are subjectto wear and tear. Replace the wiper bladestwice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.Otherwise the windshield will not be wipedproperly. As a result, you may not be able toobserve surrounding traffic conditions andcould cause an accident.

! Never open the hood when a wiper arm isfolded forward.Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiperarm back. If released, the force of theimpact from the tensioning spring couldcrack the windshield.Do not allow a wiper arm to contact thewindshield glass without a wiper bladeinserted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethis work carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Remove the SmartKey from the starterswitch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Make sure the vehicle’s on-board

electronics have status 0 (Y page 78).

Removing wiper blades! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.

They could tear.

X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snapsinto place.

X Turn the wiper blade in direction ofarrow :.

X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of theretainer in the direction of arrow ;.

Installing wiper bladesX Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm

until it locks in place.X Rotate the wiper blade into a position

parallel to the wiper arm.X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the

windshield.Make sure you hold on to the wiper whenfolding the wiper arm back.

! Make sure the wiper blades are installedproperly. Improperly installed wiper bladesmay cause windshield damage.

Flat tire

Safety notes

G Warning!The dimensions of the spare wheel aredifferent from those of the road wheels. As aresult, the vehicle handling characteristicschange when driving with a spare wheelmounted. Adapt your driving styleaccordingly.The spare wheel is for temporary use only.When driving with a spare wheel mounted,ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do

Flat tire 317

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 317

Z

not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible to have thespare wheel replaced with a regular roadwheel.Never operate the vehicle with more than onespare wheel mounted.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.

Preparing the vehicleX Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a

safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,flat surface.

X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.X Turn the steering wheel so that the front

wheels are in a straight-ahead position.X Engage the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission into park

position P (manual transmission to 1st orreverse gear R).

X Turn off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the

driver’s door (this puts the starter switch inposition 0, same as with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch). Thedriver’s door can then be closed again.Open doors only when conditions are safeto do so.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button from thestarter switch.

X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at asafe distance from the roadway. Opendoors only when conditions are safe to doso.

Mounting the spare wheel

IntroductionX Prepare the vehicle as described

(Y page 318).X Take the following out of the vehicle:Rspare wheelRjackRvehicle tool kit box

For information on where to find therespective items, see “Where will I find ...?”(Y page 268) and (Y page 270).

i Vehicles without spare wheel are notfactory-equipped with the tools required fora wheel change such as a jack or a wheelwrench. Some tools required for a wheelchange are specific to your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain the tools approved foryour vehicle. This section describes thewheel change using the tools approved andrecommended for your vehicle.

Lifting the vehicle

G Warning!When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jackwhich has been specifically approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle.The jack is designed exclusively for jacking upthe vehicle at the jack take-up brackets builtinto both sides of the vehicle. Make sure thejack arm is fully seated in the jack take-upbracket. The jack must always be verticalwhen in use, especially on inclines ordeclines.The jack is intended only for lifting the vehiclebriefly for wheel changes. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use thejack only to lift the vehicle during a wheelchange.Never get beneath the vehicle while it issupported by the jack. Keep hands and feet

318 Flat tirePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 318

away from the area under the lifted vehicle.Always lower the vehicle onto sufficientcapacity jackstands before working under thevehicle.Always engage the parking brake firmly andblock the wheels with wheel chocks or othersizeable objects before raising the vehiclewith the jack. Do not disengage the parkingbrake while the vehicle is raised.Make sure that the ground on which thevehicle is standing and where you place thejack is solid, level and not slippery. Ifnecessary, use a large underlay. On slipperysurfaces, such as tiled floors, you should usea non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.Do not use wooden blocks or similar objectsto support the jack. Otherwise the jack maynot be able to achieve its load-bearingcapacity if it is not at its full height.Never start the engine when the vehicle israised.Also observe the notes on the jack.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byblocking wheels with wheel chocks or othersizeable objects.When your vehicle is equipped with a wheelchock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit(Y page 268). For information on setting upthe collapsible wheel chock, see(Y page 269).

When changing a wheel on a level surface:X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable

object in front of and another wheel chockor other sizeable object behind the wheelthat is diagonally opposite to the wheelbeing changed.

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack ona level surface. However, shouldcircumstances require you to do so on a hill:X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable

objects on the downhill side in front of bothwheels on the side opposite to the side onwhich the wheel is to be changed.

G Warning!Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or onslight inclines/declines. Otherwise, thevehicle could fall off the jack and injure you orothers.

X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but donot yet remove the wheel bolts(approximately one full turn with wheelwrench :).

The jack take-up brackets are located directlybehind the front wheel housings and in frontof the rear wheel housings.

G Warning!The jack is designed exclusively for jacking upthe vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Makesure the jack arm is fully seated in the jacktake-up bracket.If you do not position the jack correctly in thejack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall offthe jack and seriously or fatally injure you orothers.

! Do not position the jack on the body ofthe vehicle, as this may cause damage tothe vehicle.

Flat tire 319

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 319

Z

X Place jack = on firm ground.X Position jack = under take-up

bracket ; so that it is always vertical asseen from the side, even if the vehicle isparked on an incline.

X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = isfully seated in take-up bracket ; and thejack base evenly meets the ground.

X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing the wheelX Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.This could result in damage to the wheelbolts and wheel hub threads.

X Remove the wheel.

Attaching the spare wheel

G Warning!Always replace wheel bolts that are damagedor rusted.Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.Damaged wheel hub threads should berepaired immediately. Do not continue todrive under these circumstances! Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or callRoadside Assistance.Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightenedwheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.This could cause an accident. Make sure touse the correct wheel bolts.

G Warning!Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.Other wheel bolts may come loose.Do not tighten the wheel bolts when thevehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle couldfall off the jack.

X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheelhub.

! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flatagainst hub and hold it there whileinstalling first wheel bolt.

X Guide the spare wheel onto the wheel huband push it on.

X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten themslightly.

320 Flat tirePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 320

Lowering the vehicleX Lower the vehicle by turning the crank

counterclockwise until the vehicle isresting fully on its own weight.

X Remove the jack.

X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,following the diagonal sequence illustrated(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observea tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

G Warning!Have the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. The wheels could comeloose if they are not tightened to a torque of96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Fully collapse the jack, with handle foldedin (storage position), see (Y page 269).

X Store the jack and the other vehicle toolsin the designated storage space.

For information on storing the spare wheelafter it has been replaced by a regular roadwheel, see (Y page 270).

i Vehicles with TPMS:Do not restart the tire inflation pressuremonitor until a full size wheel/tire withfunctioning sensor has been placed backinto service on the vehicle.

Battery

Safety notesA battery should always be sufficientlycharged in order to achieve its rated servicelife. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for batterymaintenance intervals.If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have thebattery charge checked more frequently.When replacing a battery, always use abattery approved by Mercedes-Benz.If you do not intend to operate your vehiclefor an extended period of time, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center aboutsteps you need to observe.

G Warning!Observe all safety instructions andprecautions when handling automotivebatteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames andsmoking are prohibitedwhen handling batteries.Avoid creating sparks.Battery acid is caustic. Donot allow it to come intocontact with skin, eyes orclothing.Wear suitable protectiveclothing, especially gloves,apron and faceguard.Wear eye protection.Rinse any acid spillsimmediately with clearwater. Contact a physicianif necessary.

Battery 321

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 321

Z

Keep children away.

Follow the instructions inthis Operator’s Manual.

A battery contains materials that can harmthe environment if disposed of improperly. Alarge 12 V storage battery contains lead.Recycling of the battery is the preferredmethod of disposal. Many states (USA only)or provinces (Canada only) require sellers ofbatteries to accept the old battery forrecycling.

G Warning!Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting.You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,skin or clothing. In case it does, immediatelyflush affected area with water and seekmedical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking etc.

G Warning!Do not place metal objects on the battery asthis could result in a short circuit.Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the riskof acid burns in the event of an accident.Take care that you do not become staticallycharged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing orrubbing against textiles. For this reason, youalso should not pull or push the battery overcarpets or other synthetic materials.Never touch the battery first. First touch theoutside body of the vehicle in order to releaseany possible electrostatic charges.

Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. Thebattery could explode if touched due toelectrostatic charge or due to sparkformation.

! As any other battery, the battery maydischarge if you do not operate the vehiclefor an extended period of time. Have thebattery disconnected at a qualifiedworkshop or an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter in such a case. You may alsoconnect an accessory battery charge unitexpressly approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle model to maintain the batterycharge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.The battery, the battery ventilation hoseand the lateral plug must always besecurely installed when the vehicle is inoperation.

! Never loosen or detach battery terminalclamps while the engine is running or theSmartKey is in the starter switch orKEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.Otherwise the alternator and otherelectronic components could be severelydamaged.Have the battery checked regularly at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Refer to Maintenance Booklet formaintenance intervals or contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forfurther information.

i After battery power was interrupted, dothe following:RReset the automatic exterior mirror fold

in function (Y page 88).RSet the clock (Y page 132). Vehicles with

COMAND: see separate COMANDoperating instructions.

322 BatteryPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 322

Charging the battery

G Warning!Never charge a battery while still installed inthe vehicle unless the accessory batterycharge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz isbeing used. Gases may escape duringcharging and could cause an explosion thatmay result in personal injury, paint damage orcorrosion.An accessory battery charge unit speciallyadapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles andtested and approved by Mercedes-Benz isavailable. It permits the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forinformation and availability.Charge battery in accordance with theseparate instructions for the accessorybattery charger.

Have the battery charged at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. If you charge thebattery yourself, follow the operatinginstructions for your charging device.Only use a battery charge unit with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.X Charge battery in accordance with the

instructions of the battery chargermanufacturer.

Jump starting

G Warning!Failure to follow these directions will causedamage to the electronic components, andcan lead to a battery explosion and severeinjury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting orjump starting. You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately

flush affected area with water, and seekmedical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking, etc.Attempting to jump start a frozen battery canresult in it exploding, causing personal injury.Read all instructions before proceeding.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionand/or 4MATIC:Do not tow-start the vehicle. You couldotherwise seriously damage the automatictransmission which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Jump starting should only be performedusing the jump-start terminals located inthe engine compartment.Avoid repeated and lengthy startingattempts.Do not attempt to start the engine using abattery quick-charge unit.If the engine does not run after severalunsuccessful starting attempts, have itchecked at the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Excessive unburned fuel generated byrepeated failed starting attempts maydamage the catalytic converter and maypresent a fire risk.Make sure the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation.Make sure the cable clamps do not touchany other metal part while the other end isstill attached to a battery.

If the battery is discharged, the engine can bestarted with jumper cables and the fullycharged battery of another vehicle or anequivalent starter pack. Observe thefollowing:RAccess to the battery is not possible on all

vehicles. If you cannot access the battery

Jump starting 323

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 323

Z

of the other vehicle, provide jump startpower by an external battery or starterpack.RJump starting should only be performed

when the engine and catalytic converterare cold.RDo not jump start the engine or charge the

battery if the battery is frozen. Let thebattery thaw out first.ROnly jump start from batteries with the

same voltage rating (12 V). Jump startingwith a more powerful battery could damagethe vehicle’s electrical system. Suchdamage will not be covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient

cross-section and insulated terminalclamps.

RAlways make sure the jumper cables arenot on or near pulleys, fans or other partsthat move when an engine is started orrunning.RShould the battery be drained completely,

let the donating power source charge thevehicle for several minutes beforereattempting the starting process.

The jump-start contacts are located in theengine compartment on the passenger side.X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Engage the parking brake.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in

park position P (manual transmission toNeutral).

X Open the hood (Y page 224).

Position B represents the charged battery ofanother vehicle or an equivalent starter pack.X Slide cover : from positive terminal = in

direction of arrow.

! Never invert the terminal connections!

X Connect positive terminal ; of chargedbattery B with positive terminal = with ajumper cable. Clamp the cable to positiveterminal ; of charged battery B first.

X Start engine of the vehicle with chargedbattery B and run at idle speed.

324 Jump startingPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 324

X Connect negative terminal ? of chargedbattery B with negative terminal A witha jumper cable. Clamp the cable tonegative terminal ? of charged batteryB first.

X Start engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery and run at idle speed.You can now turn on the electricalconsumers. Do not switch on theheadlamps under any circumstances.

X Remove the jumper cables from negativeterminals ? and A first.

X Remove the jumper cables from positiveterminals ; and =.You can now switch on the headlamps.

X Slide cover : from positive terminal =back.

X Have the battery checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Towing the vehicle

Safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that the vehiclebe transported with all wheels off the groundusing flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dollyequipment. This method is preferable to othertypes of towing.

! To prevent damage during transport, donot tie down vehicle by its chassis orsuspension parts.

If circumstances do not permit therecommended towing methods, the vehiclemay be towed with all wheels on the groundor front axle raised (except vehicles with4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have thevehicle moved to a safe location where therecommended towing methods can beemployed.

! Before towing the vehicle observe thefollowing instructions:RVehicles with automatic transmission

and/or 4MATIC: Do not tow-start the

vehicle. You could otherwise seriouslydamage the automatic transmissionwhich is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.RDo not tow with sling-type equipment.

Towing with sling-type equipment overbumpy roads will damage radiator andsupports.RTowing of the vehicle should only be

done using the properly installed towingeye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, towrope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,frame or suspension parts.

G Warning!With the engine not running, there is no powerassistance for the brake and steeringsystems. In this case, it is important to keepin mind that a considerably higher degree ofeffort is necessary to brake and steer thevehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly ordiagonally, since it could result in damageto the chassis alignment.

! Do not use the towing eye bolt forrecovery, as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

i If the battery is disconnected ordischargedRthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter

switchRVehicles with automatic transmission:

the automatic transmission will remain inpark position P

For more information see “Battery”(Y page 321) or “Jump starting”(Y page 323).Vehicles with automatic transmission: Forinformation on manually unlocking the gearselector lever, see (Y page 311).

Towing the vehicle 325

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 325

Z

Installing towing eye boltDepending on whether you are towing avehicle or you are being towed, the towing eyebolt can be screwed into threaded holeswhich are located behind covers on eachbumper.The towing eye bolt is supplied with thevehicle tool kit, located underneath the trunkfloor (Y page 268).X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.

Removing cover in front bumper

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by thearrow.

X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded holefor the towing eye bolt.

Removing cover in rear bumper

G Warning!In order to avoid possible serious burns orinjury, use extreme caution when removingthe rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipeis extremely hot.

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by thearrow.

X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded holefor the towing eye bolt.

Fixing towing eye bolt

Example illustration front bumper

X Take the towing eye bolt and, if soequipped, the wheel wrench from thevehicle tool kit (Y page 268).

X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise intothreaded hole to its stop.

X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye andtighten towing eye bolt ; by turning itclockwise.

orX If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel

wrench, use a suitable object to turn thetowing eye bolt.

326 Towing the vehiclePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 326

Removing towing eye boltX Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it

counterclockwise.X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.

X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheelwrench back into the vehicle tool kit.

Towing with all wheels on the ground

G Warning!If circumstances require towing the vehiclewith all wheels on the ground, always tow witha tow bar if:Rthe engine will not runRthere is a malfunction in the brake systemRthere is a malfunction in the power supply

or in the vehicle’s electrical system

This is necessary to adequately control thetowed vehicle.Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels onthe ground, make sure the SmartKey is instarter switch position 2.If the SmartKey is left in the starter switchposition 0 for an extended period of time, itcan no longer be turned in the switch. In thiscase, the steering is locked. To unlock,remove SmartKey from starter switch andreinsert.

G Warning!With the engine not running, there is no powerassistance for the brake and steeringsystems. In this case, it is important to keepin mind that a considerably higher degree ofeffort is necessary to brake and steer thevehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the

brake pedal and keep it pressed.




X Release the brake pedal.X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning flasher

(Y page 93).

! The vehicle may be towed only fordistances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at aspeed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).

i While being towed with the hazardwarning flasher in use, use the combinationswitch in the usual manner to signal turns.Only the selected turn signal will operate.Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazardwarning flasher will operate again.

Towing with front axle raised! The vehicle may be towed only for

distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at aspeed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow withone axle raised. Doing so could damage thetransfer case, which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.All wheels must be on or off the ground.Observe instructions for towing the vehiclewith all wheels on the ground.

X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the

brake pedal and keep it pressed.

Towing the vehicle 327

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 327

Z




X Release the brake pedal.X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Switch off the automatic central locking

(Y page 135).X Switch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the starter switch.X Switch on the hazard warning flasher

(Y page 93).

! Vehicles without 4MATIC:Because the ESP® operates automatically,the engine and ignition must be shut off(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inposition 0 or 1) when the vehicle is beingtowed with the front axle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®


Fuses

IntroductionThe electrical fuses in your vehicle serve toswitch off malfunctioning power circuits.If a fuse is blown, the components andsystems secured by that fuse will stopoperating.

G Warning!Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benzwith the specified amperage for the system inquestion and do not attempt to repair orbridge a blown fuse. Using other thanapproved fuses or using repaired or bridgedfuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,and/or cause damage to electrical

components and/or systems. Have the causedetermined and remedied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

A blown fuse must be replaced by anappropriate spare fuse (recognizable by itscolor or the fuse rating given on the fuse) ofthe amperage recommended in the fusechart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be gladto advise you on this subject.

i In case of a blown fuse contact RoadsideAssistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have thecause determined and rectified by anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The fuse chart is located in the trunk with thevehicle tool kit (Y page 268). The fuse chartexplains the fuse allocation and fuseamperages.

Before replacing fusesX Engage the parking brake.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in

park position P (manual transmission toNeutral).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the

driver’s door (this puts the starter switch inposition 0, same as with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch). Thedriver’s door then can be closed again.

Fuse box in passenger compartment! Do not use sharp objects such as a

screwdriver to open the fuse box cover inthe dashboard. You could damage the fusebox cover or the dashboard.

328 FusesPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 328

X Open the driver’s door.X Opening: Using your hands, pull fuse box

cover : in direction of arrow = andremove in direction of arrow ;.

X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into theopening at the front.

X Press fuse box cover : back on until itengages.

! The fuse box cover must be properlypositioned as described. Otherwise,moisture or dirt could enter the fuse boxand possibly impair fuse operation.

Fuse box in trunk

X Open the trunk.X Opening: Turn lock : clockwise.X Pull cover ; downward in direction of

arrow.X Closing: Press cover ; backward.X Turn lock : counterclockwise.

Fuse box in engine compartmentX Open the hood.

X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture fromfuse box cover.

X Opening: Release wire ; from fuse boxcover.

X Release clamps :.X Remove fuse box cover.X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is

positioned properly.X Press fuse box cover down and secure with

clamps :.X Fasten wire ; on fuse box cover.

! The fuse box cover must be properlypositioned as described. Otherwise,moisture or dirt could enter the fuse boxand possibly impair fuse operation.

X Close the hood after checking or replacingfuses.

Fuses 329

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 329

Z

330


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 330

Vehicle equipment ............................ 332Parts service ..................................... 332Warranty coverage ........................... 332Identification labels .......................... 332Vehicle specification C 250(204.052) ........................................... 334Vehicle specification C 250 Sport(204.052) ........................................... 334Vehicle specification C 2504MATIC (204.085) ............................. 335Vehicle specification C 2504MATIC Sport (204.085) .................. 336Vehicle specification C 300(204.054) ........................................... 337Vehicle specification C 300 Sport(204.054) ........................................... 338Vehicle specification C 3004MATIC (204.081) ............................. 339Vehicle specification C 3004MATIC Sport (204.081) .................. 340Vehicle specification C 350(204.056) ........................................... 341Vehicle specification C 350 Sport(204.056) ........................................... 342Vehicle specification C 3504MATIC (204.087) ............................. 343Vehicle specification C 63 AMG(204.077) ........................................... 343Rims and tires ................................... 344Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 349

331

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 331

Vehicle equipment


Parts service

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-BenzParts required for maintenance and repairwork. In addition, strategically located partsdistribution centers provide quick andreliable parts service.More than 300 000 different parts forMercedes-Benz models are available.Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjectedto stringent quality inspections. Each part hasbeen specifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles.Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Partsshould be installed.

! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benzparts and accessories not authorized byMercedes-Benz. Doing so could damagethe vehicle, which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, itcould compromise the vehicle’s durabilityor safety.

Warranty coverage

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:

RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties, copies of which areavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Loss of Service and Warranty Information booklet

Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification labels

332 Identification labelsTe

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 332

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) canbe foundRon certification label : on the driver’s door

B-pillarRembossed underneath the carpet in the

front passenger footwell (Y page 333)Ron the lower edge of the windshield

(Y page 333)

Example certification label (U.S. vehicles); VIN= Paintwork code

Example certification label (Canada vehicles); VIN= Paintwork code

i Data shown on certification label are forillustration purposes only. These data are

specific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the illustration. Refer tocertification label on vehicle for actual dataspecific to your vehicle.

X Move the front passenger seat backwardas far as possible (Y page 80).

X Fold carpet ? backward.VIN A is now visible.

B Emission control information label,includes both federal and Californiacertification exhaust emission standards

C VIN (on lower edge of windshield)D Engine number (engraved on engine)

i When ordering parts, please specifyvehicle identification and engine number.

Identification labels 333

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 333

Z

Vehicle specification C 250 (204.052)

The quoted data apply only to the standardvehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of allspecial bodies and special equipment.

i The C 250 is available in Canada only.

Engine C 250

Engine, type 272

Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,gasoline injection

No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)

Stroke 2.69 in (68.40 mm)

Total piston displacement

152.3 cu in(2 496 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.4:1

Output acc. to SAE J 134921

201 hp/6 100 rpm(150 kW/6 100 rpm)

Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349

181 lb-ft/2 900 - 5 500 rpm

(245 Nm/2 900 - 5 500 rpm)

Maximum engine speed

6 500 rpm

Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5

Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm

Electrical system C 250

Alternator 14 V/150 A

Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW

Battery 12 V/74 Ah


Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33

Spark plugs, electrode gap

0.031 in (0.8 mm)

Spark plugs, tightening torque

15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

Main dimensions C 250

Overall vehicle length

182.3 in (4 630 mm)

Overall vehicle width22

79.5 in (2 020 mm)

Overall vehicle height

56.9 in (1 444 mm)

Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm)

Track, front 60.7 in (1 541 mm)

Track, rear 60.8 in (1 544 mm)

Turning circle 35.4 ft (10.8 m)

Weights C 250

Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Vehicle specification C 250 Sport (204.052)


i The C 250 Sport is available in Canadaonly.

21 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.22 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.

334 Vehicle specification C 250 Sport (204.052)Te

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 334

Engine C 250 Sport

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)



152.3 cu in(2 496 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.4:1


201 hp/6 100 rpm(150 kW/6 100 rpm)


181 lb-ft/2 900 - 5 500 rpm

(245 Nm/2 900 - 5 500 rpm)


6 500 rpm



Electrical system C 250 Sport



Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

Main dimensions C 250 Sport


182.8 in (4 630 mm)


79.5 in (2 020 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)





Weights C 250 Sport



Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC (204.085)


i The C 250 4MATIC is available in Canadaonly.

Engine C 250 4MATIC

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)



Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC (204.085) 335

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 335

Z

Engine C 250 4MATIC


152.3 cu in(2 496 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.4:1


201 hp/6 100 rpm(150 kW/6 100 rpm)


181 lb-ft/2 900 - 5 500 rpm

(245 Nm/2 900 - 5 500 rpm)


6 500 rpm



Electrical system C 250 4MATIC



Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

Main dimensions C 250 4MATIC


182.8 in (4 630 mm)


79.5 in (2 020 mm)


56.9 in (1 445 mm)






Weights C 250 4MATIC



Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC Sport (204.085)


i The C 250 4MATIC Sport is available inCanada only.

Engine C 250 4MATIC Sport

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)



152.3 cu in(2 496 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.4:1


201 hp/6 100 rpm(150 kW/6 100 rpm)

25 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.26 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.27 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

336 Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC Sport (204.085)Te

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 336



181 lb-ft/2 900 - 5 500 rpm

(245 Nm/2 900 - 5 500 rpm)


6 500 rpm



Electrical system C 250 4MATIC Sport



Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

Main dimensions C 250 4MATIC Sport


182.8 in (4 630 mm)


79.5 in (2 020 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)





Weights C 250 4MATIC Sport





Engine C 300

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)



182.8 cu in(2 996 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.3:1


228 hp/6 000 rpm(170 kW/6 000 rpm)


221 lb-ft/2 500 - 5 000 rpm

(300 Nm/2 500 - 5 000 rpm)


6 500 rpm



28 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.29 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Vehicle specification C 300 (204.054) 337

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 337

Z




Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)



182.8 in (4 630 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)31

56.9 in (1 444 mm)32


Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm)31

60.7 in (1 541 mm)32

Track, rear 59.6 in (1 514 mm)31

60.8 in (1 544 mm)32


Weights C 300





i The C 300 Sport is available in the USAonly.

Engine C 300 Sport

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)



182.8 cu in(2 996 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.3:1


228 hp/6 000 rpm(170 kW/6 000 rpm)


221 lb-ft/2 500 - 5 000 rpm

(300 Nm/2 500 - 5 000 rpm)


6 500 rpm



30 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.31 Canada only.32 USA only.33 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 338




Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)



182.8 in (4 630 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)





Weights C 300 Sport





Engine C 300 4MATIC

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)



182.8 cu in(2 996 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.3:1


228 hp/6 000 rpm(170 kW/6 000 rpm)


221 lb-ft/2 500 - 5 000 rpm

(300 Nm/2 500 - 5 000 rpm)


6 500 rpm






Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

34 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.35 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Vehicle specification C 300 4MATIC (204.081) 339

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 339

Z



182.3 in (4 630 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)37

56.9 in (1 445 mm)38


Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm)37

60.7 in (1 541 mm)38

Track, rear 60.5 in (1 536 mm)37

60.8 in (1 544 mm)38





Vehicle specification C 300 4MATIC Sport (204.081)


i The C 300 4MATIC Sport is available inthe USA only.


Engine, type 272



No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)



182.8 cu in(2 996 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.3:1


228 hp/6 000 rpm(170 kW/6 000 rpm)


221 lb-ft/2 500 - 5 000 rpm

(300 Nm/2 500 - 5 000 rpm)


6 500 rpm



Electrical system C 300 4MATIC Sport



Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

36 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.37 Canada only.38 USA only.39 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

340 Vehicle specification C 300 4MATIC Sport (204.081)Te

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 340

Main dimensions C 300 4MATIC Sport


182.3 in (4 630 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)





Weights C 300 4MATIC Sport





i The C 350 is available in Canada only.

Engine C 350

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)



213.5 cu in(3 498 cm3)

Engine C 350

Compression ratio

10.7:1


268 hp/6 000 rpm(200 kW/6 000 rpm)


258 lb-ft/2 400 - 5 000 rpm

(350 Nm/2 400 - 5 000 rpm)


6 500 rpm






Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)



182.3 in (4 630 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)


40 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.41 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.42 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.

Vehicle specification C 350 (204.056) 341

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 341

Z





Weights C 350





i The C 350 Sport is available in the USAonly.

Engine C 350 Sport

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)



213.5 cu in(3 498 cm3)

Compression ratio

10.7:1


268 hp/6 000 rpm(200 kW/6 000 rpm)

Engine C 350 Sport


258 lb-ft/2 400 - 5 000 rpm

(350 Nm/2 400 - 5 000 rpm)


6 500 rpm






Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)



182.8 in (4 630 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)







chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 342

Weights C 350 Sport





i The C 350 4MATIC is available in Canadaonly.

Engine C 350 4MATIC

Engine, type 272


No. of cylinders 6

Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)



213.5 cu in(3 498 cm3)

Compression ratio

10.7:1


268 hp/6 000 rpm(200 kW/6 000 rpm)


258 lb-ft/2 400 - 5 000 rpm

(350 Nm/2 400 - 5 000 rpm)


6 500 rpm






Battery 12 V/74 Ah



0.031 in (0.8 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)



182.3 in (4 630 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


57.0 in (1 449 mm)








Vehicle specification C 63 AMG (204.077)



Vehicle specification C 63 AMG (204.077) 343

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 343

Z

Engine C 63 AMG

Engine, type 156


No. of cylinders 8

Bore 4.02 in (102.20 mm)



378.8 cu in(6 208 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.3:1


450 hp/6 800 rpm(336 kW/6 800 rpm)


443 lb-ft/5 000 rpm(600 Nm/5 000 rpm)


7 200 rpm

Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8


Electrical system C 63 AMG



Battery 12 V/95 Ah

Spark plugs, type NGK ILZKAR 7A10


0.039 in (1.0 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

Main dimensions C 63 AMG


186.1 in (4 726 mm)


79.2 in (2 012 mm)


56.6 in (1 438 mm)




Weights C 63 AMG



Rims and tires

Notes! Only use tires which have been tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tiresapproved by Mercedes-Benz are developedto provide best possible performance inconjunction with the driving safety systemson your vehicle such as the ABS or theESP®. Tires specially developed for yourvehicle and tested and approved byMercedes-Benz can be identified by findingthe following on the tire’s sidewall:RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original

equipment tiresUsing tires other than those approved byMercedes-Benz may result in damage thatis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.


344 Rims and tiresTe

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 344

! Using tires other than those approved byMercedes-Benz can have detrimentaleffects, such asRpoor handling characteristicsRincreased noiseRincreased fuel consumptionMoreover, tires and rims not approved byMercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibitdimensional variations and different tiredeformation characteristics that couldcause them to come into contact with thevehicle body or axle parts. Damage to thetires or the vehicle may be the result.

i Further information on tires and rims isavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. The Tire and Loading Informationplacard with the recommended tireinflation pressures for cold tires is locatedon the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplementaltire inflation pressure information fordriving at high speeds or for vehicle loadsless than the maximum loaded vehiclecondition can be found on the tire inflationpressure label. The tire inflation pressurelabel is located on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. The tire inflation pressure should bechecked regularly and should only beadjusted on cold tires. Follow tiremanufacturer’s maintenancerecommendation included with the vehicle.

For information on recommended tireinflation pressure and supplemental tireinflation pressure information for specialdriving situations, see (Y page 230).

i Please keep in mind that the vehicle mustbe equippedRwith wheels of identical dimensions on

each axle (left and right)Rwith tires of identical characteristics all

around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires, orall-season tires etc.

i The following pages also list the approvedrim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle

with winter tires. Winter tires are notavailable as standard or optional factoryequipment, but can be purchased from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Equipping your vehicle with winter tiresapproved for your vehicle model mayrequire the purchase of rims of therecommended size for use with thesewinter tires. This depends on vehicle modeland the standard or optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration onyour vehicle. For more information contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Rims and tires 345

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 345

Z

Same size tires

Model C 25049

C 250 4MATIC49

16" wheels Rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

7 J x 16 H21.69 in (43 mm)

All-season tires50 205/55 R16 91H M+S

Winter tires50,51 205/55 R16 91H M+Si

Model C 30052

C 300 4MATIC52C 35049

C 350 4MATIC49

17" wheels Rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

7.5 J x 17 H21.85 in (47 mm)

7.5 J x 17 H21.85 in (47 mm)

All-season tires50 225/45 R17 91H M+S —

Winter tires50,51 225/45 R17 91HM+Si

225/45 R17 91HM+Si

Model C 63 AMG

18" wheels AMG rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

8 J x 18 H21.77 in (45 mm)

Winter tires50,51 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load) M+Si

49 Canada only.50 Radial-ply tires.51 Not available as factory equipment.52 USA only.


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 346

Mixed size tires

Model C 250 Sport53

C 250 4MATIC Sport53

C 30053

C 300 Sport54

C 300 4MATIC53

17" wheels Front axle Rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

7.5 J x 17 H21.85 in (47 mm)


Rear axle Rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

8.5 J x 17 H22.28 in (58 mm)

All-season tires55,56 245/40 R17 91H M+S

Model C 30053

C 300 4MATIC53

C 350 Sport54

C 350 4MATIC53

17" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

7.5 J x 17 H21.85 in (47 mm)


Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

8.5 J x 17 H22.28 in (58 mm)

All-season tires55,56 245/40 R17 91H M+S

53 Canada only.54 USA only.55 Radial-ply tires.56 Must not be used with snow chains.

Rims and tires 347

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 347

Z

Model C 300 Sport57


C 35058

C 350 Sport57

C 350 4MATIC58


8 J x 18 H21.97 in (50 mm)

All-season tires59 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load)M+S


8.5 J x 18 H22.13 in (54 mm)

All-season tires59,60 255/35 R18 94H XL (Extra Load)M+S

Model C 63 AMG


8 J x 18 H21.77 in (45 mm)

Summer tires59 235/40 ZR18 95Y XL (Extra Load)


9 J x 18 H22.13 in (54 mm)

Summer tires59,60 255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load)

57 USA only.58 Canada only.59 Radial-ply tires.60 Must not be used with snow chains.


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 348

Spare wheel

! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflationpressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the valuesgiven in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressuregiven on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.

i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflationpressure of the road tires.

Model C 250 (all models)61

C 30062

C 300 4MATIC62

C 30061

C 300 4MATIC61

C 300 Sport62


C 350 (all models)

C 63 AMG

Rim (steel) 3.5 B x 16 H2 3.5 B x 17 H2 3.5 B x 18

Wheel offset 0.79 in (20 mm) 0.79 in (20 mm) 0.79 in (20 mm)

Minispare tire63 T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/80 R17 99M T 125/70 R18 99M

Recommended tire inflation pressure

61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar)

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

CapacitiesVehicle components and their respectivelubricants must match. Therefore only useproducts tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.For information on tested and approvedproducts, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

G Warning!Comply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of service

fluids. Otherwise you could endanger personsor the environment.Keep service fluids out of the reach ofchildren.For health reasons, you should preventservice fluids from coming into direct contactwith your skin or clothing.If a service fluid is swallowed, contact aphysician immediately.

61 Canada only.62 USA only.63 Must not be used with snow chains.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 349

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 349

Z

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter

C 25064

C 250 Sport64

C 300C 300 Sport65

C 350

8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engineoils

C 250 4MATIC64


C 300 4MATICC 300 4MATIC Sport65

C 350 4MATIC64

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

C 63 AMG66 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

Manual transmission

C 25064

C 250 Sport64

1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB ManualTransmission Oil

C 300C 300 Sport65

1.6 US qt (1.5 l)


C 25064

C 250 Sport64

9.0 US qt (8.5 l) MB AutomaticTransmission Fluid

C 250 4MATIC64


10.3 US qt (9.7 l)

C 300C 300 Sport65

C 35064

C 350 Sport65

9.5 US qt (9.0 l)


C 350 4MATIC64

10.5 US qt (9.9 l)

C 63 AMG67 9.6 US qt (9.1 l)

64 Canada only.65 USA only.66 Engine with oil cooler.67 Automatic transmission with oil cooler.

350 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.Te

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 350


Front axle C 250 4MATIC64


0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil(SAE 85W-90)


C 350 4MATIC64

1.2 US qt (1.1 l)

Rear axle C 25064

C 250 Sport64

1.1 US qt (1.0 l) Hypoid gear oil(SAE 85W-90)

C 250 4MATIC64


C 300C 300 Sport65


C 35064

C 350 Sport65

C 350 4MATIC64

1.2 US qt (1.1 l)

C 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs TitanEG 5010 D

Power steering

All models approx. 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) MB Power SteeringFluid (ChevronTexaco PSF 9109)

Brake system All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid(DOT 4+)

Cooling system

All models,except C 63 AMG

approx. 5.1 US qt (4.8 l) MB 325.0Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

C 63 AMG approx. 12.4 US qt (11.7 l)

64 Canada only.65 USA only.


Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 351

Z


Fuel tank All models 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Premium unleadedgasoline (MinimumPosted Octane 91[Avg. of96 RON/86 MON])C 300, all models(with automatictransmission):Flexible FuelVehicles (identifiedby a label readingPremium gasoline or E85 only! on the fuelfiller flap).Alternative fuel:Ethanol fuel (E85)

Fuel tank reserve

All models,except C 63 AMG

approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

C 63 AMG approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)

Air conditioning system

All models — R134a refrigerantand specialPAG lubricant oil(never R 12)

Washer system

C 25064

C 250 Sport64

C 250 4MATIC64


4.2 US qt (4.0 l) MB WindshieldWasherConcentrate68

(Y page 358)Washer fluid mixingratio (Y page 358)C 300

C 300 Sport65

C 350C 350 Sport65

3.7 US qt (3.5 l)



C 350 4MATIC64

C 63 AMG

6.3 US qt (6.0 l)

64 Canada only.68 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.65 USA only.


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 352

Approved engine oilsEngine oils are specifically tested for theirsuitability in our engines and durability for ourservice intervals. Therefore, only useapproved engine oils and oil filters requiredfor vehicles with the Maintenance System.For a listing of approved engine oils and oilfilters, contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).

! Using engine oils and oil filters of aspecification other than those expresslyrequired for the Maintenance System, orchanging of oil and oil filter at changeintervals longer than those called for by theMaintenance System will result in engine oremission control system damage notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.Please follow Maintenance Systemrecommendations for scheduled oilchanges. Failure to do so will result inengine or emission control system damagenot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.Use the table below to determine theMB sheet number.

Model Engine,type

MB sheetnumber

C 25069 272 229.5

C 250 Sport69 272 229.5

C 250 4MATIC69 272 229.5

C 250 4MATICSport69

272 229.5

C 300 272 229.5

C 300 Sport70 272 229.5

C 300 4MATIC 272 229.5

Model Engine,type

MB sheetnumber

C 300 4MATICSport70

272 229.5

C 35069 272 229.5

C 350 Sport70 272 229.5

C 350 4MATIC69 272 229.5

C 63 AMG 156 229.571

i MB sheet numbers are printed on theoutside of oil containers.

Viscosity grades for engine oilsUsing the chart below, select oil viscosityaccording to the lowest air temperatureexpected before the next oil change.

Engine oil additives! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.

They may damage the engine. Damage ormalfunctions resulting from blending oiladditives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

69 Canada only.70 USA only.71 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.


Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 353

Z

Air conditioning refrigerantR134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAGlubricating oil are used in the air conditioningsystem.

! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-basedlubricating oil. Otherwise damage to thesystem will occur.

Brake fluid

G Warning!During vehicle operation, the boiling point ofthe brake fluid is continuously reducedthrough the absorption of moisture from theatmosphere.Under extremely strenuous operatingconditions, this moisture content can lead tothe formation of bubbles in the system, thusreducing the system’s efficiency.Therefore, the brake fluid must be replacedregularly. Refer to your vehicle’s MaintenanceBooklet for replacement interval.

Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benzis recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additionalinformation.

Premium unleaded gasoline

G Warning!Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline!Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact. Extinguish all smoking materials.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging yourhealth.

! To maintain the engine’s durability andperformance, premium unleaded gasolinemust be used.If premium unleaded gasoline is notavailable and low octane gasoline is used,follow these precautions:RHave the fuel tank only partially filled

with unleaded regular gasoline and fill upwith premium unleaded gasoline as soonas possible.RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.RDo not exceed an engine speed of

3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with alight load such as two persons and noluggage.RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum

accelerator pedal position if the vehicleis fully loaded or operating inmountainous terrain.

Fuel requirementsOnly use premium unleaded gasoline. Theoctane number (posted at the pump) must be91 min. It is an average of both the ResearchOctane Number (RON) and the Motor OctaneNumber (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is alsoknown as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/orunleaded gasoline containing oxygenatessuch as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, andTBA can be used provided the ratio of any oneof these oxygenates to gasoline does notexceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.The ratio of methanol to gasoline must notexceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is notallowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can beused.These blends must also meet all other fuelrequirements, such as resistance to sparkknock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 354

Flexible Fuel VehiclesAll models of the C 300 with automatictransmission are Flexible Fuel Vehicles.Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a labelreading Premium gasoline or E85 only! onthe fuel filler flap.These vehicles are designed to operate onpremium unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel(E85), or on any mixture of these two. Ethanolfuel (E85) is a mixture of approximately 85%ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

G Warning!Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highlyflammable, poisonous and burn easily.Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries ifignited or if you come into contact with it orinhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanolfumes and skin contact with ethanol.Extinguish all open flames before refueling.Never smoke or create sparks close toethanol.

Switching fuelsFor best performance and driveability it isrecommended to use either one or the otherfuel. A refueling pattern that alternatesbetween the two different fuels should beavoided if possible.When switching fuels, make sure:RFuel level is below half full.RFuel level is above reserve (fuel tank

reserve warning lamp is not lit).RAmount of added fuel is more than

5 gallons (20 liters).RIgnition is off during refill.RImmediately after refueling engine is

started and operated for at least 5 minutes.These precautions and recommendations aresupposed to prevent any difficulties whenstarting and operating the engine whichotherwise may be experienced before theengine has fully adapted to the different fuel.

If in spite of these recommendations theengine does not perform properly, addingmore gasoline (at least 3 gallons [12 liters])to the fuel may improve the engine behavior.

Fuel consumptionE85 fuel contains less energy per gallon thangasoline. To ensure that engine performancewith ethanol fuel is similar to that when usinggasoline, the engine must burn more ethanolfuel. As a result, it is to be expected that thefuel consumption will increase when usingE85 compared to gasoline operation.

MaintenancePlease inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you use or have used E85 fuelwhen your vehicle is delivered formaintenance or repairs.

Cold weather performanceIt is possible that starting times willsignificantly increase at temperatures below32‡ (0†). At low temperatures the use of ablock heater is recommended (contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation). Rough idling may also beexperienced at such temperatures before theengine is fully warmed up.

! E85 fuel is unsuitable for use whenambient temperatures fall below 14‡(-10†).

Hot weather performanceAt ambient temperatures above 95‡ (35†)start times may increase and beaccompanied by a rough idle following thestart.

Gasoline additivesA major concern among enginemanufacturers is carbon build-up caused bygasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only


Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 355

Z

the use of quality gasoline containingadditives that prevent the build-up of carbondeposits.After an extended period of using fuelswithout such additives carbon deposits canbuild up, especially on the intake valves andin the combustion area, leading to engineperformance problems such as:RWarm-up hesitationRUnstable idleRKnocking/pingingRMisfireRPower lossIn areas where carbon deposits may beencountered due to lack of availability ofgasoline which contains these additives, theuse of Mercedes-Benz approved additives isrecommended.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for alisting of approved products. Followdirections on the product label.Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.This only results in unnecessary cost and maybe harmful to the engine operation.

! Damage or malfunction resulting frompoor fuel quality or from blending additionalfuel additives other than those tested andapproved by us for use on Mercedes-Benzvehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-ownedor Extended Limited Warranties.

CoolantsThe engine coolant is a mixture of water andanticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:RCorrosion protectionRFreeze protectionRBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling

point)

The cooling system was filled at the factorywith a coolant providing freeze protection toapproximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosionprotection.

! Add premixed coolant solution only.Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze separately from each other,could cause engine damage not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in thepressurized cooling system is reached atapproximately 266‡ (130†).The coolant solution must be used year roundto provide the necessary corrosion protectionand increase boil-over protection. Refer tothe Maintenance Booklet for replacementinterval.Coolant system design and coolant useddetermine the replacement interval. Thereplacement interval published in theMaintenance Booklet is only applicable ifMB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solutionor other Mercedes-Benz approved productsof equal specification are used to renew thecoolant concentration or bring it back up tothe proper level.For information on other Mercedes-Benzapproved products of equal specification,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).To provide important corrosion protection,the solution must be at least 50%anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent tofreeze protection to approximately -35‡[-37†]).If you use a solution that is more than 55%anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protectionto approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the enginetemperature will increase due to the lowerheat transfer capability of the solution.Therefore, do not use more than this amountof anticorrosion/antifreeze.If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used tobring it up to the proper level (have cooling


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 356

system checked for signs of leakage). Pleasemake sure the mixture is in accordance withlabel instructions.The water in the cooling system must meetminimum requirements, which are usuallysatisfied by normal drinking water.If you are not sure about the water quality,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminumparts. The use of aluminum components inmotor vehicle engines necessitates thatanticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in

such engines be specifically formulated toprotect the aluminum parts. Failure to usesuch anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant willresult in a significantly shortened service life.Therefore, the following product is stronglyrecommended for use in your vehicle:MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.Before the start of the winter season (or oncea year in hot southern regions), you shouldhave the anticorrosion/antifreezeconcentration checked.The coolant is also regularly checked eachtime you bring your vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for service.

Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)

Cooling system All models,except C 63 AMG

2.5 US qt (2.4 l) 2.8 US qt (2.6 l)

C 63 AMG 6.2 US qt (5.85 l) 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)


Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 357

Z


G Warning!Washer solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate“MB SummerFit”.

X Mix with water for temperatures abovefreezing point.

X Mix with commercially available premixedwasher solvent/antifreeze fortemperatures below freezing point.

Washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above the freezing point:1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal[4.0 l] water)For temperatures below freezing point:1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal[4.0 l] solvent)


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 358

359


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 359

360


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 360

Service and LiteratureYour authorized Mercedes-Benz Center hastrained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.For expert advice and quality service, contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If you are interested in obtaining serviceliterature for your vehicle, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.We consider this the best way for you toobtain accurate information for your vehicle.For further information you can find us on theMercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca(Canada only).

G Warning!To help avoid personal injury, be extremelycareful when performing any service work orrepairs. Improper or incomplete service or theuse of incorrect or inappropriate parts ormaterials may damage the vehicle or itsequipment, which may in turn result inpersonal injury.If you have any questions about carrying outany type of service, turn to the advice of anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to make changes indesign and equipment.Therefore, information, illustrations anddescriptions in this Operator’s Manual mightdiffer from your vehicle.Reprinting, translation and copying, even ofexcerpts, is not permitted without our priorauthorization in writing.Press time July 17, 2009GSP/OISPrinted in U. S. A.


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 361

Order no. 6515 0712 13 Part no. 204 584 5381 Edition B 2010

É2045845381zËÍ2045845381


2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 362

c-class - mercedes-benz usa · pdf fileour company and staff congratulate you on the purchase...

Documents